Casio Fx Cg10 20 Soft E CG10_CG20_Software_Eng

: Casio Fx-Cg10-20-Soft-E fx-cg10-20-soft-e casio pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 601

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

E

fx-CG10
fx-CG20
Software
User’s Guide

CASIO Worldwide Education Website

http://edu.casio.com
CASIO EDUCATIONAL FORUM

http://edu.casio.com/forum/

• The contents of this user’s guide are subject to change without notice.
• No part of this user’s guide may be reproduced in any form without the express written
consent of the manufacturer.
• Be sure to keep all user documentation handy for future reference.
i

Contents
Getting Acquainted — Read This First!
Chapter 1 Basic Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Keys .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
Display .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
Inputting and Editing Calculations ................................................................................. 1-7
Using the Math Input/Output Mode ............................................................................. 1-13
Option (OPTN) Menu .................................................................................................. 1-27
Variable Data (VARS) Menu ....................................................................................... 1-28
Program (PRGM) Menu ............................................................................................. 1-31
Using the Setup Screen .............................................................................................. 1-32
Using Screen Capture ................................................................................................. 1-36
When you keep having problems… ........................................................................... 1-37

Chapter 2 Manual Calculations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Basic Calculations ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Special Functions .......................................................................................................... 2-7
Specifying the Angle Unit and Display Format ............................................................ 2-12
Function Calculations .................................................................................................. 2-14
Numerical Calculations ............................................................................................... 2-24
Complex Number Calculations.................................................................................... 2-34
Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal Calculations with Integers ......................... 2-38
Matrix Calculations ...................................................................................................... 2-41
Metric Conversion Calculations................................................................................... 2-58

Chapter 3 List Function
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Inputting and Editing a List ............................................................................................ 3-1
Manipulating List Data................................................................................................... 3-7
Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists ............................................................................. 3-13
Switching between List Files ....................................................................................... 3-17
Using CSV Files .......................................................................................................... 3-18

Chapter 4 Equation Calculations
1. Simultaneous Linear Equations .................................................................................... 4-1
2. High-order Equations from 2nd to 6th Degree .............................................................. 4-3
3. Solve Calculations......................................................................................................... 4-4

Chapter 5 Graphing
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Sample Graphs ............................................................................................................. 5-1
Controlling What Appears on a Graph Screen .............................................................. 5-4
Drawing a Graph ......................................................................................................... 5-13
Saving and Recalling Graph Screen Contents............................................................ 5-20
Drawing Two Graphs on the Same Screen................................................................. 5-23
Manual Graphing......................................................................................................... 5-25
Using Tables ............................................................................................................... 5-30
Modifying a Graph ....................................................................................................... 5-36
Dynamic Graphing ...................................................................................................... 5-40
Graphing a Recursion Formula ................................................................................... 5-43
Graphing a Conic Section ........................................................................................... 5-48
Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph Screen (Sketch) ................................... 5-50
Function Analysis ........................................................................................................ 5-52
ii

Chapter 6 Statistical Graphs and Calculations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Before Performing Statistical Calculations .................................................................... 6-1
Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data ........................................... 6-8
Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data (Curve Fitting) ................. 6-14
Performing Statistical Calculations.............................................................................. 6-22
Tests ........................................................................................................................... 6-32
Confidence Interval ..................................................................................................... 6-46
Distribution .................................................................................................................. 6-49
Input and Output Terms of Tests, Confidence Interval, and Distribution .................... 6-65
Statistic Formula ......................................................................................................... 6-68

Chapter 7 Financial Calculation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Before Performing Financial Calculations ..................................................................... 7-1
Simple Interest .............................................................................................................. 7-3
Compound Interest........................................................................................................ 7-4
Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal) ................................................................................ 7-7
Amortization .................................................................................................................. 7-9
Interest Rate Conversion ............................................................................................ 7-12
Cost, Selling Price, Margin .......................................................................................... 7-13
Day/Date Calculations................................................................................................. 7-14
Depreciation ................................................................................................................ 7-15
Bond Calculations ....................................................................................................... 7-17
Financial Calculations Using Functions ...................................................................... 7-20

Chapter 8 Programming
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Basic Programming Steps............................................................................................. 8-1
Program Mode Function Keys...................................................................................... 8-2
Editing Program Contents ............................................................................................. 8-4
File Management .......................................................................................................... 8-6
Command Reference .................................................................................................. 8-11
Using Calculator Functions in Programs ..................................................................... 8-28
Program Mode Command List ................................................................................... 8-51
CASIO Scientific Function Calculator
Special Commands ⇔ Text Conversion Table .......................................................... 8-59
9. Program Library .......................................................................................................... 8-66

Chapter 9 Spreadsheet
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Spreadsheet Basics and the Function Menu ................................................................ 9-1
Basic Spreadsheet Operations ..................................................................................... 9-3
Using Special Spreadsheet Mode Commands .......................................................... 9-19
Conditional Formatting ................................................................................................ 9-21
Drawing Statistical Graphs, and Performing Statistical and Regression
Calculations................................................................................................................. 9-27
6. Spreadsheet Mode Memory....................................................................................... 9-34

Chapter 10 eActivity
1.
2.
3.
4.

eActivity Overview ....................................................................................................... 10-1
eActivity Function Menus ............................................................................................ 10-2
eActivity File Operations ............................................................................................. 10-4
Inputting and Editing Data ........................................................................................... 10-6

Chapter 11 Memory Manager
1. Using the Memory Manager ........................................................................................ 11-1
iii

Chapter 12 System Manager
1. Using the System Manager ......................................................................................... 12-1
2. System Settings .......................................................................................................... 12-1

Chapter 13 Data Communication
1. Performing Data Communication between
the Calculator and a Personal Computer .................................................................... 13-3
2. Performing Data Communication between Two Calculators..................................... 13-10
3. Connecting the Calculator to a Projector .................................................................. 13-16

Chapter 14 Geometry
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Geometry Mode Overview ......................................................................................... 14-1
Drawing and Editing Objects ..................................................................................... 14-11
Controlling the Appearance of the Geometry Window .............................................. 14-33
Using Text and Labels in a Screen Image ................................................................ 14-37
Using the Measurement Box ..................................................................................... 14-41
Working with Animations ........................................................................................... 14-56

Chapter 15 Picture Plot
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Picture Plot Function Menus ....................................................................................... 15-3
Managing Picture Plot Files ........................................................................................ 15-5
Using the Plot Function ............................................................................................... 15-7
Using the Plot List ..................................................................................................... 15-13
Common Functions with the Graph Mode ................................................................ 15-18

Appendix
1. Error Message Table ....................................................................................................α-1
2. Input Ranges ..............................................................................................................α-14

E-Con2 Application
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

E-Con2 Overview .......................................................................................................... ε-1
Using the Setup Wizard ................................................................................................ ε-2
Using Advanced Setup.................................................................................................. ε-8
Using a Custom Probe ................................................................................................ ε-19
Using the MULTIMETER Mode................................................................................... ε-23
Using Setup Memory................................................................................................... ε-24
Using Program Converter ........................................................................................... ε-27
Starting a Sampling Operation .................................................................................... ε-30
Using Sample Data Memory ....................................................................................... ε-33
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data .......................................................... ε-35
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations .......................................................... ε-39
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity ................................................................ ε-50

iv

Getting Acquainted — Read This First!
k About this User’s Guide
u Math natural input and display
Under its initial default settings, the calculator is set up to use the “Math input/output mode”,
which enables natural input and display of math expressions. This means you can input
fractions, square roots, derivatives, and other expressions just as they are written. In the
“Math input/output mode”, most calculation results also are displayed using natural display.
You also can select a “Linear input/output mode” if you like, for input and display of
calculation expressions in a single line.
The examples shown in this User’s Guide are mainly presented using the Math input/output
mode. “” will be indicated for examples that use the Linear input/
output mode.
• For information about switching between the Math input/output mode and Linear input/
output mode, see the explanation of the “Input/Output” mode setting under “Using the Setup
Screen” (page 1-32).
• For information about input and display using the Math input/output mode, see “Using the
Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-13).

u !x(')
The above indicates you should press ! and then x, which will input a ' symbol. All
multiple-key input operations are indicated like this. Key cap markings are shown, followed by
the input character or command in parentheses.

u m Equation
This indicates you should first press m, use the cursor keys (f, c, d, e) to select
the Equation mode, and then press w. Operations you need to perform to enter a mode
from the Main Menu are indicated like this.

u Function Keys and Menus
• Many of the operations performed by this calculator can be executed by pressing function
keys 1 through 6. The operation assigned to each function key changes according to
the mode the calculator is in, and current operation assignments are indicated by function
menus that appear at the bottom of the display.
• This User’s Guide shows the current operation assigned to a function key in parentheses
following the key cap for that key. 1(Comp), for example, indicates that pressing 1
selects {Comp}, which is also indicated in the function menu.
• When (g) is indicated in the function menu for key 6, it means that pressing 6 displays
the next page or previous page of menu options.

v

0

u Menu Titles
• Menu titles in this User’s Guide include the key operation required to display the menu
being explained. The key operation for a menu that is displayed by pressing K and then
{LIST} would be shown as: [OPTN]-[LIST].
• 6(g) key operations to change to another menu page are not shown in menu title key
operations.

u Command List
The Program Mode Command List (page 8-51) provides a graphic flowchart of the various
function key menus and shows how to maneuver to the menu of commands you need.
Example: The following operation displays Xfct: [VARS]-[FACTOR]-[Xfct]

k Display Brightness Adjustment
Adjust the brightness whenever objects on the display appear dim or difficult to see.
1. Use the cursor keys (f, c, d, e) to select the System icon and press w, then
press 1(DISPLAY) to display the brightness adjustment screen.

2. Adjust the brightness.
• The e cursor key makes display brightness lighter.
• The d cursor key makes display brightness darker.
• 1(INITIAL) returns display brightness to its initial default.
3. To exit display brightness adjustment, press m.

vi

Chapter 1 Basic Operation
1. Keys

1

k Key Table
Page

5-52

1-2
2-9
1-2

Page

Page

Page

5-8

5-4

5-50

1-27

1-31
1-28

1-32
1-3

2-17

2-16

2-17

2-16

5-54

1-16

2-16

2-22

2-22

2-1,
2-22

1-22,
2-22

2-16

2-1

2-1
Page

1-11

1-12

5-4,
5-15

Page

1-12

Page

Page

1-7,1-17
1-19
1-8

2-48
2-1
2-16
2-9

2-11

2-1

2-1

1-1

10-19
2-7

2-1

2-35

5-2,
5-33

2-16
10-21

1-36

3-3

Page

2-16

2-35

Page

Page

2-1

k Key Markings
Many of the calculator’s keys are used to perform more than one function. The functions
marked on the keyboard are color coded to help you find the one you need quickly and easily.

Function

Key Operation

1

log

l

2

10x

!l

3

B

al

The following describes the color coding used for key markings.
Color

•

Key Operation

Yellow

Press ! and then the key to perform the marked function.

Red

Press a and then the key to perform the marked function.

Alpha Lock
Normally, once you press a and then a key to input an alphabetic character, the keyboard
reverts to its primary functions immediately.
If you press ! and then a, the keyboard locks in alpha input until you press a again.

1-2

2. Display
k Selecting Icons
This section describes how to select an icon in the Main Menu to enter the mode you want.

u To select an icon
1. Press m to display the Main Menu.
2. Use the cursor keys (d, e, f, c) to move the
highlighting to the icon you want.

Currently selected icon

3. Press w to display the initial screen of the mode whose icon you selected.
• You can also enter a mode without highlighting an icon in the Main Menu by inputting the
number or letter marked in the upper right corner of the icon.
The following explains the meaning of each icon.
Icon

Mode Name

Description

Run-Matrix

Use this mode for arithmetic calculations and function
calculations, and for calculations involving binary, octal,
decimal, and hexadecimal values and matrices.

Statistics

Use this mode to perform single-variable (standard deviation)
and paired-variable (regression) statistical calculations, to
perform tests, to analyze data and to draw statistical graphs.

eActivity

eActivity lets you input text, math expressions, and other data
in a notebook-like interface. Use this mode when you want to
store text or formulas, or built-in application data in a file.

Spreadsheet

Use this mode to perform spreadsheet calculations. Each file
contains a 26-column × 999-line spreadsheet. In addition to
the calculator’s built-in commands and Spreadsheet mode
commands, you can also perform statistical calculations and
graph statistical data using the same procedures that you use
in the Statistics mode.

Graph

Use this mode to store graph functions and to draw graphs
using the functions.

Dyna Graph

Use this mode to store graph functions and to draw multiple
versions of a graph by changing the values assigned to the
variables in a function.

(Dynamic Graph)

1-3

Icon

Mode Name

Description

Table

Use this mode to store functions, to generate a numeric table
of different solutions as the values assigned to variables in a
function change, and to draw graphs.

Recursion

Use this mode to store recursion formulas, to generate a
numeric table of different solutions as the values assigned to
variables in a function change, and to draw graphs.

Conic Graphs

Use this mode to draw graphs of conic sections.

Equation

Use this mode to solve linear equations with two through six
unknowns, and high-order equations from 2nd to 6th degree.

Program

Use this mode to store programs in the program area and to
run programs.

Financial

Use this mode to perform financial calculations and to draw
cash flow and other types of graphs.

E-Con2

Use this mode to control the optionally available EA-200 Data
Analyzer.

Link

Use this mode to transfer memory contents or back-up data to
another unit or PC.

Memory

Use this mode to manage data stored in memory.

System

Use this mode to initialize memory, adjust display brightness,
and to make other system settings.

Geometry

Use this mode to draw and analyze geometric objects.

Picture Plot

Use this mode to plot points (that represent coordinates) on the
screen and to perform various types of analysis based on the
plotted data (coordinate values).

1-4

k About the Function Menu
Use the function keys (1 to 6) to access the menus and commands in the menu bar
along the bottom of the display screen. You can tell whether a menu bar item is a menu or a
command by its appearance.

k Status Bar
The status bar is an area that displays messages and the current status of the calculator. It is
always displayed at the top of the screen.

• Icons are used to indicate the information described below.
This icon:

Indicates this:
The current battery level. The icons indicated (from left to right): Level 3,
Level 2, Level 1, Dead. See “Low Battery Message” (page 1-38) for more
information.
Important!
If the Level 1 icon ( ) appears, immediately replace the batteries. For
details about battery replacement, see the separate “Hardware User’s
Guide”.
Calculation in progress.
! key was pressed and the calculator is standing by for the next key
operation.
a key was pressed and the calculator is standing by for the next key
operation. The
icon indicates the lower-case input mode (eActivity
and Program modes only).
Alpha Lock (page 1-2) is in effect.
!i(CLIP) was pressed and the calculator is standing by for range
specification (page 1-11).
Setup “Input/Output” setting.
Setup “Angle” setting.
Setup “Display” setting.
Setup “Frac Result” setting.
Setup “Complex Mode” setting.

• For details about the Setup screen, see “Using the Setup Screen” (page 1-32).
• For information about other icons and messages that are specific to each application, see
the chapters that cover each application.

1-5

k About Display Screens
This calculator uses two types of display screens: a text screen and a graph screen. The
text screen can show 21 columns and 8 lines of characters, with the bottom line used for the
function key menu. The graph screen uses an area that measures 384 (W) × 216 (H) dots.
Text Screen

Graph Screen

k Normal Display
The calculator normally displays values up to 10 digits long. Values that exceed this limit are
automatically converted to and displayed in exponential format.

u How to interpret exponential format

1.2E+12 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 × 1012. This means that you should move
the decimal point in 1.2 twelve places to the right, because the exponent is positive. This
results in the value 1,200,000,000,000.

1.2E–03 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 × 10–3. This means that you should move
the decimal point in 1.2 three places to the left, because the exponent is negative. This results
in the value 0.0012.
You can specify one of two different ranges for automatic changeover to normal display.
Norm 1 ................... 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010
Norm 2 ................... 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| > 1010
All of the examples in this manual show calculation results using Norm 1.
See page 2-13 for details on switching between Norm 1 and Norm 2.

1-6

k Special Display Formats
This calculator uses special display formats to indicate fractions, hexadecimal values, and
degrees/minutes/seconds values.
u Fractions
.................... Indicates: 456

12
23

u Hexadecimal Values
.................... Indicates: 0ABCDEF1(16), which equals
180150001(10)
u Degrees/Minutes/Seconds
.................... Indicates: 12° 34’ 56.78”

• In addition to the above, this calculator also uses other indicators or symbols, which are
described in each applicable section of this manual as they come up.

3. Inputting and Editing Calculations
k Inputting Calculations
When you are ready to input a calculation, first press A to clear the display. Next, input your
calculation formulas exactly as they are written, from left to right, and press w to obtain the
result.
Example

2 + 3 – 4 + 10 =
Ac+d-e+baw

k Editing Calculations
Use the d and e keys to move the cursor to the position you want to change, and then
perform one of the operations described below. After you edit the calculation, you can execute
it by pressing w. Or you can use e to move to the end of the calculation and input more.
• You can select either insert or overwrite for input*1. With overwrite, text you input replaces
the text at the current cursor location. You can toggle between insert and overwrite by
performing the operation: !D(INS). The cursor appears as “ ” for insert and as “ ” for
overwrite.
*1 Insert and overwrite switching is possible only when the Linear input/output mode (page
1-32) is selected.

1-7

u To change a step
Example

To change cos60 to sin60
Acga
ddd
D
s

u To delete a step
Example

To change 369 × × 2 to 369 × 2
Adgj**c
dD

In the insert mode, the D key operates as a backspace key.

u To insert a step
Example

To change 2.362 to sin2.362
Ac.dgx
ddddddd
s

k Parentheses Colors during Calculation Formula Input
Parentheses are color coded during input and editing of calculation formulas in order to make
it easier to confirm the proper relationship between opening and closing parentheses.
The following rules are applied when assigning parentheses colors.
• When there are nested parentheses, colors are assigned in sequence from the outermost
parentheses inward. Colors are assigned in the following sequence: blue, red, green,
magenta, black. When there are more than five nesting levels, the color sequence is
repeated starting from blue again.

1-8

• Inputting a closing parenthesis assigns it the same color as the corresponding opening
parenthesis.

• The parentheses of parenthetical expressions that are of the same level are the same color.

Executing a calculation causes the color of all parentheses to become black.

k Using Replay Memory
The last calculation performed is always stored into replay memory. You can recall the
contents of the replay memory by pressing d or e.
If you press e, the calculation appears with the cursor at the beginning. Pressing d causes
the calculation to appear with the cursor at the end. You can make changes in the calculation
as you wish and then execute it again.
• Replay memory is enabled in the Linear input/output mode only. In the Math input/output
mode, the history function is used in place of replay memory. For details, see “History
Function” (page 1-21).
Example 1

To perform the following two calculations
4.12 × 6.4 = 26.368
4.12 × 7.1 = 29.252
Ae.bc*g.ew
dddd
!D(INS)
h.b
w

1-9

After you press A, you can press f or c to recall previous calculations, in sequence from
the newest to the oldest (Multi-Replay Function). Once you recall a calculation, you can use
e and d to move the cursor around the calculation and make changes in it to create a new
calculation.
Example 2
Abcd+efgw
cde-fghw
A
f (One calculation back)
f (Two calculations back)
• A calculation remains stored in replay memory until you perform another calculation.
• The contents of replay memory are not cleared when you press the A key, so you can
recall a calculation and execute it even after pressing the A key.

k Making Corrections in the Original Calculation
Example

14 ÷ 0 × 2.3 entered by mistake for 14 ÷ 10 × 2.3
Abe/a*c.d
w

Press J.
Cursor is positioned automatically at the
location of the cause of the error.

Make necessary changes.
db
Execute again.
w

1-10

k Using the Clipboard for Copy and Paste
You can copy (or cut) a function, command, or other input to the clipboard, and then paste the
clipboard contents at another location.

Note
In the Math input/output mode, the copy (or cut) range you can specify is limited by the range
of movement of the cursor. In the case of parentheses, you can select any range within a
parenthetical expression or you can select the entire parenthetical expression.

u To specify the copy range
1. Move the cursor ( ) to the beginning or end of the range of text you want to copy and then
press !i(CLIP).
• This will cause

to appear in the status bar.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and highlight the range of text you want to copy.

3. Press 1(COPY) to copy the highlighted text to the clipboard, and exit the copy range
specification mode.

The selected characters are not
changed when you copy them.

To cancel text highlighting without performing a copy operation, press J.

u To cut the text
1. Move the cursor ( ) to the beginning or end of the range of text you want to cut and then
press !i(CLIP).
• This will cause

to appear in the status bar.

2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and highlight the range of text you want to cut.

3. Press 2(CUT) to cut the highlighted text to the clipboard.

Cutting causes the original
characters to be deleted.

1-11

u Pasting Text
Move the cursor to the location where you want to paste the text, and then press
!j(PASTE). The contents of the clipboard are pasted at the cursor position.
A
!j(PASTE)

k Catalog Function
The Catalog is an alphabetic list of all the commands available on this calculator. You can
input a command by calling up the Catalog and then selecting the command you want.

u To use the Catalog to input a command
1. Press !e(CATALOG) to display an alphabetic Catalog of commands.
• The screen that appears first is the last one you used for command input.
2. Press 6(CAT) to display the category list.
• You can skip this step and go straight to step 5,
if you want.

3. Use the cursor keys (f, c) to highlight the command category you want, and then press
1(EXE) or w.
• This displays a list of commands in the category you selected.
4. Input the first letter of the command you want to input. This will display the first command
that starts with that letter.
5. Use the cursor keys (f, c) to highlight the command you want to input, and then press
1(INPUT) or w.
Example

To use the Catalog to input the Cash_IRR( command
A!e(CATALOG)I(C)c~cw

Pressing J or !J(QUIT) closes the Catalog.

1-12

4. Using the Math Input/Output Mode
Selecting “Math” for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen (page 1-32) turns on
the Math input/output mode, which allows natural input and display of certain functions, just as
they appear in your textbook.
• The operations in this section all are performed in the Math input/output mode. The initial
default setting for this calculator is the Math input/output mode. If you have changed to the
Linear input/output mode, switch back to the Math input/output mode before performing the
operations in this section. See “Using the Setup Screen” (page 1-32) for information about
how to switch modes.
• In the Math input/output mode, all input is insert mode (not overwrite mode) input. Note that
the !D(INS) operation (page 1-7) you use in the Linear input/output mode to switch to
insert mode input performs a completely different function in the Math input/output mode. For
more information, see “Using Values and Expressions as Arguments” (page 1-17).
• Unless specifically stated otherwise, all operations in this section are performed in the
Run-Matrix mode.

k Input Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode
u Math Input/Output Mode Functions and Symbols
The functions and symbols listed below can be used for natural input in the Math input/output
mode. The “Bytes” column shows the number of bytes of memory that are used up by input in
the Math input/output mode.
Function/Symbol

Key Operation

Bytes

Fraction (Improper)

v

9

Mixed Fraction*1

!v(&)

14

Power

M

4

Square

x

4

Negative Power (Reciprocal)

!)(x –1)

5

'

!x(')

6

Cube Root

!((3')

9

Power Root

!M(x')

9

ex

!I(ex)

6

10x

!l(10x)

6

log(a,b)

(Input from MATH menu*2)

7

Abs (Absolute Value)

(Input from MATH menu*2)

6

2

First Derivative

(Input from MATH menu* )

7

Second Derivative

(Input from MATH menu*2)

7

Integral*3

(Input from MATH menu*2)

8

Σ Calculation*4

(Input from MATH menu*2)

11

Matrix

2

(Input from MATH menu* )

1-13

14*5

Function/Symbol

Key Operation

Bytes

Parentheses

( and )

1

Braces (Used during list input.)

!*( { ) and !/( } )

1

Brackets (Used during matrix input.)

!+( [ ) and !-( ] )

1

*1 Mixed fraction is supported in the Math input/output mode only.
*2 For information about function input from the MATH function menu, see “Using the MATH
Menu” described below.
*3 Tolerance cannot be specified in the Math input/output mode. If you want to specify
tolerance, use the Linear input/output mode.
*4 For Σ calculation in the Math input/output mode, the pitch is always 1. If you want to specify
a different pitch, use the Linear input/output mode.
*5 This is the number of bytes for a 2 × 2 matrix.

u Using the MATH Menu
In the Run-Matrix mode, pressing 4(MATH) displays the MATH menu.
You can use this menu for natural input of matrices, derivatives, integrals, etc.
• {MAT} ... {displays the MAT submenu, for natural input of matrices}
• {2×2} ... {inputs a 2 × 2 matrix}
• {3×3} ... {inputs a 3 × 3 matrix}
• {m×n} ... {inputs a matrix with m lines and n columns (up to 6 × 6)}
• {logab} ... {starts natural input of logarithm logab}
• {Abs} ... {starts natural input of absolute value |X|}

d f(x) }
x=a
dx
d2
• {d2/dx2} ... {starts natural input of second derivative 2 f(x)x = a}
dx
b
• {∫dx} … {starts natural input of integral a f(x)dx }
• {d/dx} ... {starts natural input of first derivative

• {Σ(} … {starts natural input of Σ calculation

β

Σ f(x) }

α
x=α

1-14

u Math Input/Output Mode Input Examples
This section provides a number of different examples showing how the MATH function menu
and other keys can be used during Math input/output mode natural input. Be sure to pay
attention to the input cursor position as you input values and data.
Example 1

To input 23 + 1
AcM
d
e
+b
w

Example 2

(

To input 1+

2
5

)

2

A(b+
v

cc

f

e

)x

w

1-15

1

Example 3

To input 1+

0

x + 1dx

Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx)
v+b

ea

fb

e

w

Example 4

To input 2 ×

1
2
2

2
1
2

Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT)1(2×2)

vbcc

ee

!x(')ce

e!x(')ceevbcc

w

1-16

u When the calculation does not fit within the display window
Arrows appear at the left, right, top, or bottom edge of the
display to let you know when there is more of the
calculation off the screen in the corresponding direction.
When you see an arrow, you can use the cursor keys to
scroll the screen contents and view the part you want.

u Math Input/Output Mode Input Restrictions
Certain types of expressions can cause the vertical width of a calculation formula to be greater
than one display line. The maximum allowable vertical width of a calculation formula is about
two display screens. You cannot input any expression that exceeds this limitation.

u Using Values and Expressions as Arguments
A value or an expression that you have already input can be used as the argument of a
function. After you have input “(2+3)”, for example, you can make it the argument of ',
resulting in (2+3).
Example
1. Move the cursor so it is located directly to the left of the part of the expression that you want
to become the argument of the function you will insert.

2. Press !D(INS).
• This changes the cursor to an insert cursor ( ).

3. Press !x(') to insert the ' function.
• This inserts the ' function and makes the parenthetical expression its argument.

As shown above, the value or expression to the right of the cursor after !D(INS) are
pressed becomes the argument of the function that is specified next. The range encompassed
as the argument is everything up to the first open parenthesis to the right, if there is one, or
everything up to the first function to the right (sin(30), log2(4), etc.).

1-17

This capability can be used with the following functions.
Function

Key Operation

Improper Fraction

v

Power

M

'

!x(')

Cube Root

!((3')

Power Root

!M(x')

ex

!I(ex)

10x

!l(10x)

log(a,b)

4(MATH)2(logab)

Absolute Value

4(MATH)3(Abs)

First Derivative

4(MATH)4(d/dx)

Second Derivative

4(MATH)5(d2/dx2)

Integral

4(MATH)6(g)
1(∫dx)

Σ Calculation

4(MATH)6(g)
2(Σ( )

Original
Expression

Expression After
Insertion

• In the Linear input/output mode, pressing !D(INS) will change to the insert mode. See
page 1-7 for more information.

u Editing Calculations in the Math Input/Output Mode
The procedures for editing calculations in the Math input/output mode are basically the same
as those for the Linear input/output mode. For more information, see “Editing Calculations”
(page 1-7).
Note however, that the following points are different between the Math input/output mode and
the Linear input/output mode.
• Overwrite mode input that is available in the Linear input/output mode is not supported by
the Math input/output mode. In the Math input/output mode, input is always inserted at the
current cursor location.
• In the Math input/output mode, pressing the D key always performs a backspace operation.

1-18

• Note the following cursor operations you can use while inputting a calculation with Math
input/output mode.
To do this:
Move the cursor from the end of the calculation to the beginning
Move the cursor from the beginning of the calculation to the end

Press this key:
e
d

k Using Undoing and Redoing Operations
You can use the following procedures during calculation expression input in the Math input/
output mode (up until you press the w key) to undo the last key operation and to redo the
key operation you have just undone.
- To undo the last key operation, press: aD(UNDO).
- To redo a key operation you have just undone, press: aD(UNDO) again.
• You also can use UNDO to cancel an A key operation. After pressing A to clear an
expression you have input, pressing aD(UNDO) will restore what was on the display
before you pressed A.
• You also can use UNDO to cancel a cursor key operation. If you press e during input and
then press aD(UNDO), the cursor will return to where it was before you pressed e.
• The UNDO operation is disabled while the keyboard is alpha-locked. Pressing
aD(UNDO) while the keyboard is alpha-locked will perform the same delete operation
as the D key alone.
Example
b+vbe
D
aD(UNDO)

c
A
aD(UNDO)

1-19

k Math Input/Output Mode Calculation Result Display
Fractions, matrices, and lists produced by Math input/output mode calculations are displayed
in natural format, just as they appear in your textbook.

Sample Calculation Result Displays
• Fractions are displayed either as improper fractions or mixed fractions, depending on the
“Frac Result” setting on the Setup screen. For details, see “Using the Setup Screen” (page
1-32).
• Matrices are displayed in natural format, up to 6 × 6. A matrix that has more than six rows or
columns will be displayed on a MatAns screen, which is the same screen used in the Linear
input/output mode.
• Lists are displayed in natural format for up to 20 elements. A list that has more than 20
elements will be displayed on a ListAns screen, which is the same screen used in the Linear
input/output mode.
• Arrows appear at the left, right, top, or bottom edge of the display to let you know when there
is more data off the screen in the corresponding direction.

You can use the cursor keys to scroll the screen and view the data you want.
• Pressing 2(DELETE)1(DEL-LINE) while a calculation result is selected will delete both
the result and the calculation that produced it.
• The multiplication sign cannot be omitted immediately before an improper fraction or mixed
fraction. Be sure to always input a multiplication sign in this case.
2
Example: 2× 5
c*cvf
• A M, x, or !)(x–1) key operation cannot be followed immediately by another M,
x, or !)(x–1) key operation. In this case, use parentheses to keep the key operations
separate.
Example: (32)–1

(dx)!)(x–1)

1-20

k History Function
The history function maintains a history of calculation expressions and results in the Math
input/output mode. Up to 30 sets of calculation expressions and results are maintained.
b+cw
*cw

You can also edit the calculation expressions that are maintained by the history function and
recalculate. This will recalculate all of the expressions starting from the edited expression.
Example

To change “1+2” to “1+3” and recalculate

Perform the following operation following the sample shown above.
ffffdDdw

• You can get a rough idea of how many entries (calculation expressions and results) are
contained in history by checking the length of the scroll bar. A shorter bar indicates a greater
number of entries.

• The value stored in the answer memory is always dependent on the result produced by
the last calculation performed. If history contents include operations that use the answer
memory, editing a calculation may affect the answer memory value used in subsequent
calculations.
- If you have a series of calculations that use the answer memory to include the result of the
previous calculation in the next calculation, editing a calculation will affect the results of all
the other calculations that come after it.
- When the first calculation of the history includes the answer memory contents, the answer
memory value is “0” because there is no calculation before the first one in history.

1-21

k Calculation Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode
This section introduces Math input/output mode calculation examples.
• For details about calculation operations, see “Chapter 2 Manual Calculations”.

u Performing Function Calculations Using Math Input/Output Mode
Example

Operation

6 = 3
4 × 5 10

A6v4*5w

cos π = 1 (Angle: Rad)
3
2

Ac(!E(π)v3e)w

log28 = 3

A4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w

7

A!M(x') 7e123w

( )

123 = 1.988647795

2 + 3 × 3 64 − 4 = 10
log

3
= 0.1249387366
4

A2+3*!M(x') 3e64e-4w
A4(MATH)3(Abs)l3v4w

2 + 3 1 = 73
5
4 20

A2v5e+3!v(()1e4w

1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i
2 10

A1.5+2.3!a(i)wM

d 3
2
dx ( x + 4x + x − 6 ) x = 3 = 52

A4(MATH)4(d/dx)vM3e+4
vx+v-6e3w

∫ 2x

A4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) 2vx+3v+4e1
e5w

5

2

1

6

∑ (k
k=2

2

+ 3 x + 4 dx = 404
3

)

− 3k + 5 = 55

A4(MATH)6(g)2(Σ)a,(K)x-3a,(K)
+5ea,(K)e2e6w

1-22

k Performing Matrix Calculations Using Math Input/Output Mode
u To specify the dimensions (size) of a matrix
1. In the Run-Matrix mode, press !m(SET UP)1(Math)J.
2. Press 4(MATH) to display the MATH menu.
3. Press 1(MAT) to display the following menu.
• {2×2} … {inputs a 2 × 2 matrix}
• {3×3} … {inputs a 3 × 3 matrix}
• {m×n} … {inputs an m-row × n-column matrix (up to 6 × 6)}
Example

To create a 2-row × 3-column matrix
3(m×n)

Specify the number of rows.
cw
Specify the number of columns.
dw
w

1-23

u To input cell values
Example

To perform the calculation shown below
1
1
33
2
×8
13
5
6
4

The following operation is a continuation of the example calculation on the previous page.
bebvceedde
bdveeefege
*iw

u To assign a matrix created using Math input/output mode to a specified
matrix memory
Example

To assign the calculation result to Mat J
!c(Mat)!-(Ans)a
!c(Mat)a)(J)w

• Pressing the D key while the cursor is located at the top (upper left) of the matrix will delete
the entire matrix.

D
⇒

1-24

k Using Graph Modes and the Equation Mode in the Math Input/Output
Mode
Using the Math input/output mode with any of the modes below lets you input numeric
expressions just as they are written in your text book and view calculation results in natural
display format.
Modes that support input of expressions as they are written in textbooks:
Run-Matrix, eActivity, Graph, Dyna Graph, Table, Recursion, Equation (SOLVER)
Modes that support natural display format:
Run-Matrix, eActivity, Equation
The following explanations show Math input/output mode operations in the Graph,
Dyna Graph, Table, Recursion and Equation modes, and natural calculation result display in
the Equation mode.
• See the sections that cover each calculation for details about its operation.
• See “Input Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-13) and “Calculation
Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-22) for details about Math input/output
mode input operations and calculation result displays in the Run-Matrix mode.
• eActivity mode input operations and result displays are the same as those in the
Run-Matrix mode. For information about eActivity mode operations, see “Chapter 10
eActivity”.

u Math Input/Output Mode Input in the Graph Mode
You can use the Math input/output mode for graph expression input in the Graph,
Dyna Graph, Table, and Recursion modes.
Example 1

x
x2
In the Graph mode, input the function y = 2 − 2 −1 and then graph it.
' '
Make sure that initial default settings are configured on the View Window.
mGraphvxv!x(')c
ee-vv!x(')cee
-bw
6(DRAW)

1-25

Example 2

∫

x 1
In the Graph mode, input the function y =
x 2− 1 x −1 dx and then
0 4
2
graph it.
Make sure that initial default settings are configured on the View Window.

mGraphK2(CALC)3(∫dx)
bveevx-bvce
v-beaevw
6(DRAW)

• Math Input/Output Mode Input and Result Display in the Equation Mode
You can use the Math input/output mode in the Equation mode for input and display as shown
below.
• In the case of simultaneous equations (1(SIMUL)) and high-order equations (2(POLY)),
solutions are output in natural display format (fractions, ', π are displayed in natural format)
whenever possible.
• In the case of Solver (3(SOLVER)), you can use Math input/output mode natural input.
Example

To solve the quadratic equation x2 + 3x + 5 = 0 in the Equation mode
mEquation!m(SET UP)
cccc(Complex Mode)
2(a+bi)J
2(POLY)1(2)bwdwfww

1-26

5. Option (OPTN) Menu
The option menu gives you access to scientific functions and features that are not marked on
the calculator’s keyboard. The contents of the option menu differ according to the mode you
are in when you press the K key.
• The option menu does not appear if you press K while binary, octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal is set as the default number system.
• For details about the commands included on the option (OPTN) menu, see the “K key”
item in the “Program Mode Command List” (page 8-51).
• The meanings of the option menu items are described in the sections that cover each mode.
The following list shows the option menu that is displayed when the Run-Matrix or Program
mode is selected.
• {LIST} ... {list function menu}
• {MAT} ... {matrix operation menu}
• {COMPLEX} ... {complex number calculation menu}
• {CALC} ... {functional analysis menu}
• {STAT} ... {menu for paired-variable statistical estimated value, distribution, standard
deviation, variance, and test functions}
• {CONVERT} ... {metric conversion menu}*
• {HYPERBL} ... {hyperbolic calculation menu}
• {PROB} ... {probability/distribution calculation menu}
• {NUMERIC} ... {numeric calculation menu}
• {ANGLE} ... {menu for angle/coordinate conversion, sexagesimal input/conversion}
• {ENG-SYM} ... {engineering symbol menu}
• {PICTURE} ... {graph save/recall menu}
• {FUNCMEM} ... {function memory menu}
• {LOGIC} ... {logic operator menu}
• {CAPTURE} ... {screen capture menu}
• {FINANCE} ... {financial calculation menu}
• The PICTURE, FUNCMEM and CAPTURE items are not displayed when “Math” is selected
for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
* Metric conversion commands are supported only when the Metric Conversion add-in
application is installed.

1-27

6. Variable Data (VARS) Menu
To recall variable data, press J to display the variable data menu.
{V-WIN}/{FACTOR}/{STAT}/{GRAPH}/{DYNA}/{TABLE}/{RECURSION}/{EQUATION}/
{FINANCE}/{Str}
• Note that the EQUATION and FINANCE items appear for function keys (3 and 4) only
when you access the variable data menu from the Run-Matrix or Program mode.
• The variable data menu does not appear if you press J while binary, octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal is set as the default number system.
• For details about the commands included on the variable data (VARS) menu, see the “J
key” item in the “Program Mode Command List” (page 8-51).

u V-WIN — Recalling V-Window values
• {X}/{Y}/{T,} ... {x-axis menu}/{y-axis menu}/{T, menu}
• {R-X}/{R-Y}/{R-T,} ... {x-axis menu}/{y-axis menu}/{T, menu} for right side of Dual
Graph
• {min}/{max}/{scale}/{dot}/{pitch} ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{scale}/{dot
value*1}/{pitch}
*1 The dot value indicates the display range (Xmax value – Xmin value) divided by the
screen dot pitch. The dot value is normally calculated automatically from the
minimum and maximum values. Changing the dot value causes the maximum to be
calculated automatically.

u FACTOR — Recalling zoom factors
• {Xfct}/{Yfct} ... {x-axis factor}/{y-axis factor}
u STAT — Recalling statistical data
• {X} … {single-variable, paired-variable x-data}
• {n}/{x
¯ }/{Σx}/{Σx2}/{x}/{sx}/{minX}/{maxX} ... {number of data}/{mean}/{sum}/{sum
of squares}/{population standard deviation}/{sample standard deviation}/{minimum
value}/{maximum value}
• {Y} ... {paired-variable y-data}
• {}/{Σy}/{Σy2}/{Σxy}/{y}/{sy}/{minY}/{maxY} ... {mean}/{sum}/{sum of squares}/{sum
of products of x-data and y-data}/{population standard deviation}/{sample standard
deviation}/{minimum value}/{maximum value}
• {GRAPH} ... {graph data menu}
• {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{e} ... regression coefficient and polynomial coefficients
• {r}/{r2} ... {correlation coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}
• {MSe} ... {mean square error}
• {Q1}/{Q3} ... {first quartile}/{third quartile}
• {Med}/{Mod} ... {median}/{mode} of input data
• {Start}/{Pitch} ... histogram {start division}/{pitch}

1-28

• {PTS} ... {summary point data menu}
• {x1}/{y1}/{x2}/{y2}/{x3}/{y3} ... coordinates of summary points
• {INPUT} ... {statistical calculation input values}
¯ }/{sx}/{n1}/{n2}/{x¯ 1}/{x¯ 2}/{sx1}/{sx2}/{sp} ... {size of sample}/{mean of sample}/
• {n}/{x
{sample standard deviation}/{size of sample 1}/{size of sample 2}/{mean of sample 1}/
{mean of sample 2}/{standard deviation of sample 1}/{standard deviation of sample 2}/
{standard deviation of sample p}
• {RESULT} ... {statistical calculation output values}
• {TEST} ... {test calculation results}
• {p}/{z}/{t}/{Chi}/{F}/{ p
ˆ }/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ 2}/{df}/{se}/{r}/{r 2}/{pa}/{Fa}/{Adf}/{SSa}/{MSa}/{pb}/{Fb}/
{Bdf}/{SSb}/{MSb}/{pab}/{Fab}/{ABdf}/{SSab}/{MSab}/{Edf}/{SSe}/{MSe}
... {p-value}/{z score}/{t score}/{χ2 value}/{F value}/{estimated sample proportion}/
{estimated proportion of sample 1}/{estimated proportion of sample 2}/{degrees of
freedom}/{standard error}/{correlation coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}/
{factor A p-value}/{factor A F value}/{factor A degrees of freedom}/{factor A sum of
squares}/{factor A mean squares}/{factor B p-value}/{factor B F value}/{factor B
degrees of freedom}/{factor B sum of squares}/{factor B mean squares}/{factor AB
p-value}/{factor AB F value}/{factor AB degrees of freedom}/{factor AB sum of
squares}/{factor AB mean squares}/{error degrees of freedom}/{error sum of
squares}/{error mean squares}
• {INTR} ... {confidence interval calculation results}
• {Lower}/{Upper}/{ p
ˆ }/{ pˆ 1}/{ pˆ 2}/{df} ... {confidence interval lower limit}/{confidence
interval upper limit}/{estimated sample proportion}/{estimated proportion of
sample 1}/{estimated proportion of sample 2}/{degrees of freedom}
• {DIST} ... {distribution calculation results}
• {p}/{xInv}/{x1Inv}/{x2Inv}/{zLow}/{zUp}/{tLow}/{tUp} ... {probability distribution
or cumulative distribution calculation result (p-value)}/{inverse Student-t, χ2, F,
binomial, Poisson, geometric or hypergeometric cumulative distribution calculation
result}/{inverse normal cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge) or lower limit
(left edge)}/{inverse normal cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge)}/{normal
cumulative distribution lower limit (left edge)}/{normal cumulative distribution upper
limit (right edge)}/{Student-t cumulative distribution lower limit (left edge)}/{Student-t
cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge)}

u GRAPH — Recalling graph functions
• {Y}/{r} ... {rectangular coordinate function (Y=f(x) type)}/{polar coordinate function}
• {Xt}/{Yt} ... parametric graph function {Xt}/{Yt}
• {X} ... {rectangular coordinate function (X=f(y) type)}
• Press these keys before inputting a value to specify a memory area.

u DYNA — Recalling dynamic graph setup data
• {Start}/{End}/{Pitch} ... {coefficient range start value}/{coefficient range end value}/
{coefficient value increment}

1-29

u TABLE — Recalling table setup and content data
• {Start}/{End}/{Pitch} ... {table range start value}/{table range end value}/{table value
increment}
• {Result*1} ... {matrix of table contents}
*1 The Result item appears only when the TABLE menu is displayed in the Run-Matrix and
Program modes.

u RECURSION — Recalling recursion formula*1, table range, and table content
data
• {FORMULA} ... {recursion formula data menu}
• {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{Cn}/{Cn+1}/{Cn+2} ... {an}/{an+1}/{an+2}/{bn}/{bn+1}/{bn+2}/{cn}/
{cn+1}/{cn+2} expressions
• {RANGE} ... {table range data menu}
• {Start}/{End} ... table range {start value}/{end value}
• {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{C0}/{C1}/{C2} ... {a0}/{a1}/{a2}/{b0}/{b1}/{b2}/{c0}/{c1}/{c2} value
• {anStart}/{bnStart}/{CnStart} ... origin of {an}/{bn}/{cn} recursion formula convergence/
divergence graph (WEB graph)
• {Result*2} ... {matrix of table contents*3}
*1 An error occurs when there is no function or recursion formula numeric table in memory.
*2 “Result” is available only in the Run-Matrix and Program modes.
*3 Table contents are stored automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).

u EQUATION — Recalling equation coefficients and solutions*1 *2
• {SimRes}/{SimCoef} ... matrix of {solutions}/{coefficients} for linear equations with two
through six unknowns*3
• {PlyRes}/{PlyCoef} ... matrix of {solution}/{coefficients} for high-order equations from 2nd
to 6th degree
*1 Coefficients and solutions are stored automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).
*2 The following conditions cause an error.
- When there are no coefficients input for the equation
- When there are no solutions obtained for the equation
3

* Coefficient and solution memory data for a linear equation cannot be recalled at the same
time.

u FINANCE — Recalling financial calculation data
• {n}/{I%}/{PV}/{PMT}/{FV} ... {payment periods (installments)}/{annual interest rate}/
{present value}/{payment}/{future value}
• {P/Y}/{C/Y} ... {installment periods per year}/{compounding periods per year}

u Str — Str command
• {Str} ... {string memory}

1-30

7. Program (PRGM) Menu
To display the program (PRGM) menu, first enter the Run-Matrix or Program mode from the
Main Menu and then press !J(PRGM). The following are the selections available in the
program (PRGM) menu.
• The program (PRGM) menu items are not displayed when “Math” is selected for the “Input/
Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
• {COMMAND} .....{program command menu}
• {CONTROL} ......{program control command menu}
• {JUMP} ...............{jump command menu}
• {?} ......................{input command}
• {^} ....................{output command}
• {CLEAR} ............{clear command menu}
• {DISPLAY} ........{display command menu}
• {RELATNL} .......{conditional jump relational operator menu}
• {I/O} ...................{I/O control/transfer command menu}
• {:} .......................{multi-statement command}
• {STR} .................{string command}
The following function key menu appears if you press !J(PRGM) in the Run-Matrix
mode or the Program mode while binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default
number system.
• {Prog} .................{program recall}
• {JUMP}/{?}/{^}/{RELATNL}/{:}
The functions assigned to the function keys are the same as those in the Comp mode.
For details on the commands that are available in the various menus you can access from the
program menu, see “Chapter 8 Programming”.

1-31

8. Using the Setup Screen
The mode’s Setup screen shows the current status of mode settings and lets you make any
changes you want. The following procedure shows how to change a setup.

u To change a mode setup
1. Select the icon you want and press w to enter a mode and display its initial screen. Here
we will enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Press !m(SET UP) to display the mode’s Setup
screen.
• This Setup screen is just one possible example. Actual
Setup screen contents will differ according to the mode
you are in and that mode’s current settings.

3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item whose setting you
want to change.
4. Press the function key (1 to 6) that is marked with the setting you want to make.
5. After you are finished making any changes you want, press J to exit the Setup screen.

k Setup Screen Function Key Menus
This section details the settings you can make using the function keys in the Setup screen.
indicates default setting.
• The setting of each item with a frame around it is indicated by an icon in the status bar.

u Input/Output (input/output mode)
• {Math}/{Line} ... {Math}/{Linear} input/output mode

u Mode (calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal mode)
• {Comp} ... {arithmetic calculation mode}
• {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct} ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}

u Frac Result (fraction result display format)
• {d/c}/{ab/c} ... {improper}/{mixed} fraction

1-32

u Func Type (graph function type)
Pressing one of the following function keys also switches the function of the v key.
• {Y=}/{r=}/{Parm}/{X=} ... {rectangular coordinate (Y= f (x) type)}/{polar coordinate}/
{parametric}/{rectangular coordinate (X= f (y) type)} graph
• {Y>}/{Y<}/{Yt}/{Ys} ... {y>f(x)}/{y}/{X<}/{Xt}/{Xs} ... {x>f(y)}/{x
6/(4*5)w

*1 Final closed parentheses (immediately before operation of the w key) may be omitted, no
matter how many are required.

k Number of Decimal Places, Number of Significant Digits, Normal
Display Range
[SET UP]- [Display] -[Fix] / [Sci] / [Norm]
• Even after you specify the number of decimal places or the number of significant digits,
internal calculations are still performed using a 15-digit mantissa, and displayed values are
stored with a 10-digit mantissa. Use Rnd of the Numeric Calculation Menu (NUMERIC) (page
2-14) to round the displayed value off to the number of decimal place and significant digit
settings.
• Number of decimal place (Fix) and significant digit (Sci) settings normally remain in effect
until you change them or until you change the normal display range (Norm) setting.

2-1

2

Example 1

100 ÷ 6 = 16.66666666...

Condition

Operation

Display
100/6w

16.66666667

4 decimal places

!m(SET UP) ff
1(Fix)ewJw

*1
16.6667

5 significant digits

!m(SET UP) ff
2(Sci)fwJw

*1E+01
1.6667

Cancels specification

!m(SET UP) ff
3(Norm)Jw

16.66666667

*1 Displayed values are rounded off to the place you specify.
Example 2

200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400

Condition

Operation

3 decimal places

Display

200/7*14w

400

!m(SET UP) ff
1(Fix)dwJw

400.000

200/7w
*
14w

Calculation continues using
display capacity of 10 digits

28.571
Ans × I
400.000

• If the same calculation is performed using the specified number of digits:
200/7w

28.571

The value stored internally is
rounded off to the number of
decimal places specified on
the Setup screen.

K6(g)4(NUMERIC)4(Rnd)w
*
14w

28.571
Ans × I
399.994

200/7w

28.571

You can also specify the
number of decimal places for
rounding of internal values
for a specific calculation.
(Example: To specify
rounding to two decimal
places)

6(g)1(RndFix)!-(Ans),2)
w
*
14w

RndFix(Ans,2)
28.570
Ans × I
399.980

• You cannot use a first derivative, second derivative, integration, Σ, maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or logab calculation expression inside of a RndFix calculation term.

2-2

k Calculation Priority Sequence
This calculator employs true algebraic logic to calculate the parts of a formula in the following
order:
1 Type A functions
• Coordinate transformation Pol (x, y), Rec (r, θ)
• Functions that include parentheses (such as derivatives, integrations, Σ, etc.)
d/dx, d2/dx2, ∫dx, Σ, Solve, FMin, FMax, List→Mat, Fill, Seq, SortA, SortD, Min, Max,
Median, Mean, Augment, Mat→List, P(, Q(, R(, t(, RndFix, logab
• Composite functions*1, List, Mat, fn, Yn, rn, Xtn, Ytn, Xn
2 Type B functions
With these functions, the value is entered and then the function key is pressed.
x2, x–1, x!, ° ’ ”, ENG symbols, angle unit °, r, g
3 Power/root ^(xy), x'
4 Fractions a b/c
5 Implied multiplication format in front of π, memory name, or variable name.
2π, 5A, Xmin, F Start, etc.
6 Type C functions
With these functions, the function key is pressed and then the value is entered.
', 3', log, In, ex, 10x, sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh–1, cosh–1,
tanh–1, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Ref, Rref, Sum, Prod, Cuml,
Percent, ΔList, Abs, Int, Frac, Intg, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP
7 Implied multiplication format in front of Type A functions, Type C functions, and parenthesis.
2'
3, A log2, etc.
8 Permutation, combination, complex number operator in polar form nPr, nCr, ∠
9 Metric conversion commands*2
0 ×, ÷, Int÷, Rmdr
! +, –
@ Relational operators =, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤
# And (logical operator), and (bitwise operator)
$ Or, Xor (logical operator), or, xor, xnor (bitwise operator)
*1 You can combine the contents of multiple function memory (fn) locations or graph memory
(Yn, rn, Xtn, Ytn, Xn) locations into composite functions. Specifying fn1(fn2), for example,
results in the composite function fn1°fn2 (see page 5-14). A composite function can consist
of up to five functions.
2
* Metric conversion commands are supported only when the Metric Conversion add-in application
is installed.

2-3

Example

2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 (angle unit = Rad)
1

2
3
4
5
6

• When functions with the same priority are used in series, execution is performed from right to
left.

exIn 120 → ex{In( 120)}
Otherwise, execution is from left to right.
• Compound functions are executed from right to left.
• Anything contained within parentheses receives highest priority.

k Calculation Result Irrational Number Display
You can configure the calculator to display calculation results in irrational number format
(including ' or π) by selecting “Math” for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
Example

'
2+'
8 = 3'
2

(Input/Output: Math)

!x(')ce+!x(')iw

u Calculation Result Display Range with '
Display of a calculation result in ' format is supported for result with ' in up to two terms.
Calculation results in ' format take one of the following forms.

b ± d'
e
± a'
b, ± d ± a'
b, ± a'
c

f

• The following are the ranges for each of the coefficients (a, b, c, d, e, f) can be displayed in
the ' calculation result format.
1 < a < 100, 1 < b < 1000, 1 < c < 100
0 < d < 100, 0 < e < 1000, 1 < f < 100

2-4

• In the cases shown below, a calculation result may be able to be displayed in ' format even
if their coefficients (a, c, d) are outside the above ranges.
A ' format calculation result uses a common denominator.

b + d´'
e
a'
b + d'
e → a´'
c´
c
f

* c´ is the least common multiple of c and f.

Since the calculation result uses a common denominator, calculation result still may be
displayed using the ' format even when coefficients (a´, c´, d´) are outside the corresponding
range of coefficients (a, c, d).
Example:

3 + 11'
2
3 '
2 10'
'
+
=
110
11 10

Calculation Examples
This calculation:

Produces this type of display:

2 × (3 – 2'
5) = 6 – 4'
5

' format

35'
2 × 3 = 148.492424 (= 105 '
2)*1

Decimal format

150'
2
= 8.485281374*1
25
23 × (5 – 2'
3) = 35.32566285 (= 115 – 46'
3)*1

Decimal format

'
2+'
3+'
8='
3 + 3'
2

' format

2+'
3+'
6 = 5.595754113*2
'

Decimal format

*1 Decimal format because values are outside of range.
*2 Decimal format because calculation result has three terms.
• The calculation result is displayed using decimal format even if an intermediate result goes
greater than two terms.
Example: (1 + '
2+'
3) (1 – '
2–'
3)

(= – 4 – 2'
6)

= –8.898979486
• If the calculation formula has a ' term and a term that cannot be displayed as a fraction,
the calculation result will be displayed in decimal format.
Example: log3 + '
2 = 1.891334817

2-5

u Calculation Result Display Range with π
A calculation results is displayed using π format in the following cases.
• When the calculation result can be displayed in the form nπ

n is an integer up to |106|.

b
b
π or
π
c
c
However, {number of a digits + number of b digits + number of c digits} must be 8 or less
b
b
when the above a or
is reduced.*1*2 Also, the maximum number of allowable c digits is
c
c
2

• When the calculation result can be displayed in the form a

three.*

*1 When c < b, the number of a, b, and c digits are counted when the fraction is converted
from an improper fraction ( b ) to a mixed fraction (a

c

b
).
c

2

* When “Manual” is specified for the Setup screen “Simplify” setting, the calculation result
may be displayed in decimal format, even if these conditions are met.
Calculation Examples
This calculation:

Produces this type of display:

78π × 2 = 156π

π format

123456π × 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 π)*3

Decimal format

105
2

568
71
π = 105
π
824
103

258
π = 6.533503684
3238

π format
2

129
π *4
1619

Decimal format

*3 Decimal format because calculation result integer part is |106| or greater.
*4 Decimal format because number of denominator digits is four or greater for the a

b
π form.
c

k Multiplication Operations without a Multiplication Sign
You can omit the multiplication sign (×) in any of the following operations.
• Before Type A functions (1 on page 2-3) and Type C functions (6 on page 2-3), except for
negative signs
Example 1

3, 2Pol(5, 12), etc.
2sin30, 10log1.2, 2'

• Before constants, variable names, memory names
Example 2

2π, 2AB, 3Ans, 3Y1, etc.

• Before an open parenthesis
Example 3

3(5 + 6), (A + 1)(B – 1), etc.

2-6

k Overflow and Errors
Exceeding a specified input or calculation range, or attempting an illegal input causes an error
message to appear on the display. Further operation of the calculator is impossible while an
error message is displayed. For details, see the “Error Message Table” on page α-1.
• Most of the calculator’s keys are inoperative while an error message is displayed. Press J
to clear the error and return to normal operation.

k Memory Capacity
Each time you press a key, either one byte or two bytes is used. Some of the functions that
require one byte are: b, c, d, sin, cos, tan, log, In, ', and π.
Some of the functions that take up two bytes are d/dx(, Mat, Xmin, If, For, Return, DrawGraph,
SortA(, PxIOn, Sum, and an+1.
• The required number of bytes to input functions and commands is different in the Linear
input/output mode and the Math input/output mode. For details about the number of bytes
required for each function in the Math input/output mode, see page 1-13.

2. Special Functions
k Calculations Using Variables
Example

Operation

Display

193.2aav(A)w

193.2

193.2 ÷ 23 = 8.4

av(A)/23w

8.4

193.2 ÷ 28 = 6.9

av(A)/28w

6.9

k Memory
u Variables (Alpha Memory)
This calculator comes with 28 variables as standard. You can use variables to store values you
want to use inside of calculations. Variables are identified by single-letter names, which are
made up of the 26 letters of the alphabet, plus r and θ. The maximum size of values that you
can assign to variables is 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits for the exponent.
• Variable contents are retained even when you turn power off.

2-7

u To assign a value to a variable
[value] a [variable name] w
Example 1

To assign 123 to variable A
Abcdaav(A)w

Example 2

To add 456 to variable A and store the result in variable B
Aav(A)+efga
al(B)w

• You can input an X variable by pressing a+(X) or v. Pressing a+(X) will input X,
while pressing v will input x. Values assigned to X and x are stored in the same memory
area.
Example 3

Assign 10 to x and then assign 5 to X. Next, check what is assigned to
x.
Abaavw
faa+(X)w
vw

u To assign the same value to more than one variable
[value]a [first variable name]a3(~) [last variable name]w
• You cannot use “r” or “θ ” as a variable name.
Example

To assign a value of 10 to variables A through F
Abaaav(A)
!e(CATALOG).
ccc ... c(22 times)
1(INPUT)at(F)w

u String Memory
You can store up to 20 strings (named Str 1 to Str 20) in string memory. Stored strings can be
output to the display or used inside functions and commands that support the use of strings as
arguments.
For details about string operations, see “Strings” (page 8-25).

2-8

Example

To assign string “ABC” to Str 1 and then output Str 1 to the display
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
A!a( A -LOCK)E(”)v(A)
l(B)I(C)E(”)a(Releases Alpha Lock.)
aJ6(g)5(Str)bw

5(Str)bw

String is displayed justified left.
• Perform the above operation in the Linear input/output mode. It cannot be performed in the
Math input/output mode.

u Function Memory

[OPTN]-[FUNCMEM]

Function memory is convenient for temporary storage of often-used expressions. For longer
term storage, we recommend that you use the Graph mode for expressions and the Program
mode for programs.
• {STORE}/{RECALL}/{fn}/{SEE} ... {function store}/{function recall}/{function area
specification as a variable name inside an expression}/{function list}

u To store a function
Example

To store the function (A+B) (A–B) as function memory number 1
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
A(av(A)+al(B))
(av(A)-al(B))
K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM)
1(STORE)bw
JJJ

• If the function memory number to which you store a function already contains a function, the
previous function is replaced with the new one.
• You can also use a to store a function in function
memory in a program. In this case, you must enclose the
function inside of double quotation marks.

2-9

u To recall a function
Example

To recall the contents of function memory number 1
AK6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM)
2(RECALL)bw

• The recalled function appears at the current location of the cursor on the display.

u To recall a function as a variable
Adaav(A)w
baal(B)w
K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM)3(fn)
b+cw

u To display a list of available functions
K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM)
4(SEE)

u To delete a function
Example

To delete the contents of function memory number 1
A
K6(g)6(g)3(FUNCMEM)
1(STORE)bw

• Executing the store operation while the display is blank deletes the function in the function
memory you specify.

2-10

k Answer Function
The Answer Function automatically stores the last result you calculated by pressing w
(unless the w key operation results in an error). The result is stored in the answer memory.
• The largest value that the answer memory can hold is 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits
for the exponent.
• Answer memory contents are not cleared when you press the A key or when you switch
power off.

u To use the contents of the answer memory in a calculation
Example

123 + 456 = 579
789 – 579 = 210
Abcd+efgw
hij-!-(Ans)w

• Performing an operation that assigns a value to an Alpha memory (such as
faal(B)w), answer memory contents are updated in the Math input/output mode
but not in the Linear input/output mode.

k Performing Continuous Calculations
Answer memory also lets you use the result of one calculation as one of the arguments in the
next calculation.
Example

1÷3=
1÷3×3=
Ab/dw
(Continuing)*dw

Continuous calculations can also be used with Type B functions (x2, x–1, x!, on page 2-3), +, –,
^(xy), x', ° ’ ”, etc.

2-11

3. Specifying the Angle Unit and Display Format
Before performing a calculation, you should use the Setup screen to specify the angle unit and
display format.

k Setting the Angle Unit

[SET UP]- [Angle]

1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Angle”.
2. Press the function key for the angle unit you want to specify, then press J.
• {Deg}/{Rad}/{Gra} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads}
• The relationship between degrees, grads, and radians is shown below.
360° = 2π radians = 400 grads
90° = π/2 radians = 100 grads

k Setting the Display Format

[SET UP]- [Display]

1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Display”.
2. Press the function key for the item you want to set, then press J.
• {Fix}/{Sci}/{Norm}/{Eng} ... {fixed number of decimal places specification}/
{number of significant digits specification}/{normal display}/{Engineering mode}

u To specify the number of decimal places (Fix)
Example

To specify two decimal places
1(Fix)cw
Press the number key that corresponds to the number of decimal places you want to specify
(n = 0 to 9).

• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of decimal places you specify.

2-12

u To specify the number of significant digits (Sci)
Example

To specify three significant digits
2(Sci)dw
Press the number key that corresponds to the number of significant digits you want to specify
(n = 0 to 9). Specifying 0 makes the number of significant digits 10.

• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of significant digits you specify.

u To specify the normal display (Norm 1/Norm 2)
Press 3(Norm) to switch between Norm 1 and Norm 2.
Norm 1: 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| >1010
Norm 2: 10–9 (0.000000001) > |x|, |x| >1010

u To specify the engineering notation display (Eng mode)
Press 4(Eng) to switch between engineering notation and standard notation. The indicator
“/E” is on the display while engineering notation is in effect.
You can use the following symbols to convert values to engineering notation, such as 2,000
(= 2 × 103) → 2k.
E (Exa)

× 1018

m (milli)

× 10–3

P (Peta)

× 1015

μ (micro)

× 10–6

T (Tera)

× 1012

n (nano)

× 10–9

G (Giga)

× 109

p (pico)

× 10–12

M (Mega)

× 106

f (femto)

× 10–15

k (kilo)

× 103

• The engineering symbol that makes the mantissa a value from 1 to 1000 is automatically
selected by the calculator when engineering notation is in effect.

2-13

4. Function Calculations
k Function Menus
This calculator includes five function menus that give you access to scientific functions not
printed on the key panel.
• The contents of the function menu differ according to the mode you entered from the Main
Menu before you pressed the K key. The following examples show function menus that
appear in the Run-Matrix or Program mode.

u Hyperbolic Calculations (HYPERBL)

[OPTN]-[HYPERBL]

• {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanh} ... hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}
• {sinh–1}/{cosh–1}/{tanh–1} ... inverse hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}

u Probability/Distribution Calculations (PROB)

[OPTN]-[PROB]

• {x!} ... {press after inputting a value to obtain the factorial of the value}
• {nPr}/{nCr} ... {permutation}/{combination}
• {RAND} ... {random number generation}
• {Ran#}/{Int}/{Norm}/{Bin}/{List} ... {random number generation (0 to 1)}/{random integer
generation}/{random number generation in accordance with normal distribution based
on mean  and standard deviation }/{random number generation in accordance with
binomial distribution based on number of trials n and probability p}/{random number
generation (0 to 1) and storage of result in ListAns}
• {P(}/{Q(}/{R(} ... normal probability {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t)}
• {t(} ... {value of normalized variate t(x)}

u Numeric Calculations (NUMERIC)

[OPTN]-[NUMERIC]

• {Abs} ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the absolute value of the value}
• {Int}/{Frac} ... select the item and input a value to extract the {integer}/{fraction} part.
• {Rnd} ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to 10 significant digits (to match
the value in the answer memory), or to the number of decimal places (Fix) and number
of significant digits (Sci) specified by you}
• {Intg} ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the largest integer that is not greater
than the value}
• {RndFix} ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to specified digits (0 to 9) (see
page 2-2)}
• {GCD} ... {greatest common divisor for two values}
• {LCM} ... {least common multiple for two values}
• {MOD} ... {remainder of division (remainder output when n is divided by m)}
• {MOD_Exp} ... {remainder when division is performed on a power value (remainder output
when n is raised to p power and then divided by m)}

2-14

u Angle Units, Coordinate Conversion, Sexagesimal Operations (ANGLE)
[OPTN]-[ANGLE]
• {°}/{r}/{g} ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads} for a specific input value
• {° ’ ”} ... {specifies degrees (hours), minutes, seconds when inputting a degrees/minutes/
seconds value}
• {° ’ ”} ... {converts decimal value to degrees/minutes/seconds value}
• The {° ’ ”} menu operation is available only when there is a calculation result on the display.
• {Pol(}/{Rec(} ... {rectangular-to-polar}/{polar-to-rectangular} coordinate conversion
• {'DMS} ... {converts decimal value to sexagesimal value}

u Engineering Symbol (ENG-SYM)

[OPTN]-[ENG-SYM]

• {m}/{}/{n}/{p}/{f} ... {milli (10–3)}/{micro (10–6)}/{nano (10–9)}/{pico (10–12)}/{femto (10–15)}
• {k}/{M}/{G}/{T}/{P}/{E} ... {kilo (103)}/{mega (106)}/{giga (109)}/{tera (1012)}/{peta (1015)}/
{exa (1018)}
• {ENG}/{ENG} ... shifts the decimal place of the displayed value three digits to the {left}/{right}
and {decreases}/{increases} the exponent by three.
When you are using engineering notation, the engineering symbol is also changed
accordingly.
• The {ENG} and {ENG} menu operations are available only when there is a calculation result
on the display.

k Angle Units
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

To convert 4.25 rad to degrees:
243.5070629

!m(SET UP)cccccc1(Deg)J
4.25K6(g)5(ANGLE)2(r)w

47.3° + 82.5rad = 4774.20181°

47.3+82.5K6(g)5(ANGLE)2(r)w

2°20´30˝ + 39´30˝ = 3°00´00˝

2K6(g)5(ANGLE)4(° ’ ”) 204(° ’ ”) 30
4(° ’ ”)+04(° ’ ”)394(° ’ ”) 304(° ’ ”)w
5(° ’ ”)

2.255° = 2°15´18˝

2.255K6(g)5(ANGLE)6(g)3('DMS)w

2-15

k Trigonometric and Inverse Trigonometric Functions
• Be sure to set the angle unit before performing trigonometric function and inverse
trigonometric function calculations.
π
radians = 100 grads)
2
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
(90° =

Example

Operation

1
cos ( π rad) =
(0.5)
3
2

!m(SET UP)cccccc2(Rad)J
c$!E(π)c3w

c(!E(π)/3)w

2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775

!m(SET UP)cccccc1(Deg)J
2*s45*c65w*1

sin–10.5 = 30°
(x when sinx = 0.5)

!s(sin–1) 0.5*2w

*1 * can be omitted.
*2 Input of leading zero is not necessary.

k Logarithmic and Exponential Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

log 1.23 (log101.23) = 0.08990511144 l1.23w
4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w

K4(CALC)6(g)4(logab) 2,8)w

log28 = 3

(–3)4 = (–3) × (–3) × (–3) × (–3) = 81
7

1
7

123 (= 123 ) = 1.988647795

(-3)M4w
!M(x') 7e123w

7!M(x')123w

• The Linear input/output mode and Math input/output mode produce different results when
two or more powers are input in series, like: 2 M 3 M 2.
Linear input/output mode: 2^3^2 = 64

2

Math input/output mode: 23 = 512

This is because the Math input/output mode internally treats the above input as: 2^(3^(2)).

2-16

k Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation
K6(g)2(HYPERBL)1(sinh) 3.6w

sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536
cosh–1

20
= 0.7953654612
15

K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)$20c15w

K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)(20
/15)w

k Other Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

'
2 +'
5 = 3.65028154

!x(') 2e+!x(') 5wM

!x(') 2+!x(')5w

(–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9

(-3)xw

8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × .... × 8) = 40320

8K6(g)3(PROB)1(x!)w

What is the integer part of – 3.5?

K6(g)4(NUMERIC)2(Int)-3.5w
–3

k Random Number Generation (RAND)
u Random Number Generation (0 to 1) (Ran#, RanList#)
Ran# and RanList# generate 10 digit random numbers randomly or sequentially from 0 to 1.
Ran# returns a single random number, while RanList# returns multiple random numbers in list
form. The following shows the syntaxes of Ran# and RanList#.
Ran# [a]

10

1 < n < 999

• Omitting a value for n returns a generated random number as-is. Specifying a value for n
returns the specified number of random values in list form.
Example

Operation

RanNorm# (8, 68)
(Randomly produces a body length value
obtained in accordance with the normal
distribution of a group of infants less than
one year old with a mean body length of
68cm and standard deviation of 8.)

K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND)3(Norm)
8,68)w

RanNorm# (8, 68, 5)
(Randomly produces the body lengths of five
infants in the above example, and displays
them in a list.)

K6(g)3(PROB)4(RAND)3(Norm)
8,68,5)w

2-19

u Random Number Generation in Accordance with Binomial Distribution
(RanBin#)
This function generates random integers in accordance with binomial distribution based on
values specified for the number of trials n and probability p.
RanBin# (n, p [,m])

1 < n < 100000

1 < m < 999

0
2$5+3$1$4w
M

= 3.65 (Conversion to decimal)*1
1
1
––––– + ––––– = 6.066202547 × 10–4 *2
2578
4572

$1c2578e+$1c4572w

1$2578+1$4572w

1
–– × 0.5 = 0.25*3
2

$1c2e*.5w

1$2*.5w

*1 Fractions can be converted to decimal values and vice versa.
*2 When the total number of characters, including integer, numerator, denominator and delimiter
marks exceeds 10, the fraction is automatically displayed in decimal format.
*3 Calculations containing both fractions and decimals are calculated in decimal format.
• Pressing the !M(<) key toggles the display fraction between mixed fraction and
improper fraction format.

k Engineering Notation Calculations
Input engineering symbols using the engineering notation menu.
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

Operation

999k (kilo) + 25k (kilo)
= 1.024M (mega)

!m(SET UP)ff4(Eng)J999K6(g)6(g)
1(ENG-SYM)6(g)1(k)+251(k)w

9 ÷ 10 = 0.9 = 900m (milli)
= 0.9

9/10w
K6(g)6(g)1(ENG-SYM)6(g)6(g)3(ENG)*1

= 0.0009k (kilo)
= 0.9
= 900m

3(ENG)*1
2(ENG)*2
2(ENG)*2

*1 Converts the displayed value to the next higher engineering unit, by shifting the decimal
point three places to the right.
*2 Converts the displayed value to the next lower engineering unit, by shifting the decimal point
three places to the left.

2-22

k Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT, XOR)

[OPTN]-[LOGIC]

The logical operator menu provides a selection of logical operators.
• {And}/{Or}/{Not}/{Xor} ... {logical AND}/{logical OR}/{logical NOT}/{logical XOR}
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example

What is the logical AND of A and B when A = 3 and B = 2?
A AND B = 1
Operation

Display

3aav(A)w
2aal(B)w
av(A)K6(g)6(g)
4(LOGIC)1(And)al(B)w

1

u About Logical Operations
• A logical operation always produces either 0 or 1 as its result.
• The following table shows all of possible results that can be produced by AND, OR and XOR
operations.
Value or Expression A

Value or Expression B

A AND B

A OR B

A XOR B

A≠0

B≠0

1

1

0

A≠0

B=0

0

1

1

A=0

B≠0

0

1

1

A=0

B=0

0

0

0

• The following table shows the results produced by the NOT operation.
Value or Expression A

NOT A

A≠0

0

A=0

1

2-23

5. Numerical Calculations
The following explains the numerical calculation operations included in the function menu
displayed when K4(CALC) is pressed. The following calculations can be performed.
• {Int÷}/{Rmdr}/{Simp} ... {quotient}/{remainder}/{simplification}
• {Solve}/{d/dx}/{d2/dx2}/{∫dx}/{SolveN} ... {equality solution}/{first derivative}/{second
derivative}/{integration}/{f(x) function solution}
• {FMin}/{FMax}/{Σ(}/{logab} ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{summation}/{logarithm
logab}

k Quotient of Integer ÷ Integer

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Int÷]

The “Int÷” function can be used to determine the quotient when one integer is divided by
another integer.
Example

To calculate the quotient of 107 ÷ 7
AbahK4(CALC)6(g)
6(g)1(Int÷)h
w

k Remainder of Integer ÷ Integer

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Rmdr]

The “Rmdr” function can be used to determine the remainder when one integer is divided by
another integer.
Example

To calculate the remainder of 107 ÷ 7
AbahK4(CALC)6(g)
6(g)2(Rmdr)h
w

2-24

k Simplification

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Simp]

The “'Simp” function can be used to simplify fractions manually. The following operations can
be used to perform simplification when an unsimplified calculation result is on the display.
• {Simp} w ... This function automatically simplifies the displayed calculation result using the
smallest prime number available. The prime number used and the simplified result are
shown on the display.
• {Simp} n w ... This function performs simplification according to the specified divisor n.
Under initial default settings, this calculator automatically simplifies fraction calculation results
before displaying them. Before performing the following examples, use the Setup screen to
change the “Simplify” setting from “Auto” to “Manual” (page 1-35).
• When “a+bi” or “r∠θ” is specified for the Setup screen “Complex Mode” setting, fraction
calculation results always are simplified before being displayed, even if the “Simplify” setting
is “Manual”.
• If you want to simplify fractions manually (Simplify: Manual), make sure that the “Real” is
selected for the “Complex Mode” setting.
Example 1

To simplify

15
60

5
1
15
=
=
4
60 20

A$bfcgaw
K4(CALC)6(g)6(g)3(Simp)w

3(Simp)w

The “F=” value is the divisor.

2-25

Example 2

To simplify

27
specifying a divisor of 9
63

3
27
=
7
63

A$chcgdw
K4(CALC)6(g)6(g)3(Simp)j
w

• An error occurs if simplification cannot be performed using the specified divisor.
• Executing 'Simp while a value that cannot be simplified is displayed will return the original
value, without displaying “F=”.

k Solve Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Solve]

The following is the syntax for using the Solve function in a program.
Solve( f(x), n, a, b)

(a: lower limit, b: upper limit, n: initial estimated value)

There are two different input methods that can be used for Solve calculations: direct
assignment and variable table input.
With the direct assignment method, you assign values directly to variables. This type of input is
identical to that used with the Solve command used in the Program mode.
Variable table input is used with the Solve function in the Equation mode. This input method is
recommended for most normal Solve function input.
An error (Time Out) occurs when there is no convergence of the solution.
For information about Solve calculations, see page 4-4.
• You cannot use a second derivative, Σ, maximum/minimum value or Solve calculation
expression inside of any of the above functions.
• Pressing A during calculation of Solve (while the cursor is not shown on the display)
interrupts the calculation.

k Solving an f(x) Function

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[SolveN]

You can use SolveN to solve an f(x) function using numerical analysis. The following is the
input syntax.
SolveN (left side [=right side] [,variable] [, lower limit, upper limit])
• The right side, variable, lower limit and upper limit all can be omitted.
• “left side[=right side]” is the expression to be solved. Supported variables are A through Z, r,
and θ. When the right side is omitted, solution is perform using right side = 0.
• The variable specifies the variable within the expression to be solved for (A through Z, r, θ).
Omitting a variable specification cause X to be used as the variable.

2-26

• The lower limit and upper limit specify the range of the solution. You can input a value or an
expression as the range.
• The following functions cannot be used within any of the arguments.
Solve(, d2/dx2(, FMin(, FMax(, Σ(
Up to 10 calculation results can be displayed simultaneously in ListAns format.
• The message “No Solution” is displayed if no solution exists.
• The message “More solutions may exist.” is displayed when there may be solutions other
than those displayed by SolveN.
Example

To solve x2 – 5x – 6 = 0
K4(CALC)5(SolveN)
vx-fv-g)w

J

k First Derivative Calculations

[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d/dx]

To perform first derivative calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and then input
the values using the syntax below.
, ,

Vertical 
Horizontal 

k Using Background Picture in a Program
You can change the “Background” setting on the Setup screen from a program.
• Syntax when a background image is displayed
BG-Pict  [,a] ... area: 1 to 20
BG-Pict "folder name\file name" [,a]
Appending “a” at the end loads V-Window values (that are saved with the image data) when
the background image is displayed.
• Syntax when a background image is not displayed (or hidden)
BG-None

k Using Dynamic Graph Functions in a Program
Using Dynamic Graph functions in a program makes it possible to perform repeated Dynamic
Graph operations. The following shows how to specify the Dynamic Graph range inside a
program.
• Dynamic Graph range
1 → D Start_
5 → D End_
1 → D pitch_

8-33

k Using Table & Graph Functions in a Program
Table & Graph functions in a program can generate numeric tables and perform graphing
operations. The following shows various types of syntax you need to use when programming
with Table & Graph functions.
• Table range setting

• Graph draw operation

1 → F Start_

Connect type: DrawFTG-Con

5 → F End_

Plot type: DrawFTG-Plt

1 → F pitch_
• Numeric table generation
DispF-Tbl

k Using Recursion Table & Graph Functions in a Program
Incorporating Recursion Table & Graph functions in a program lets you generate numeric
tables and perform graphing operations. The following shows various types of syntax you
need to use when programming with Recursion Table & Graph functions.
• Recursion formula input

an+1 Type_ .... Specifies recursion type.
"3an + 2" → an+1_
"4bn + 6" → bn+1_
• Table range setting

• Numeric table generation

1 → R Start_
5 → R End_

DispR-Tbl
• Graph draw operation

1 → a0_

Connect type: DrawR-Con, DrawRΣ-Con

2 → b0_

Plot type: DrawR-Plt, DrawRΣ-Plt

1 → an Start_
3 → bn Start_

• Statistical convergence/divergence graph
(WEB graph)
DrawWeb an+1, 10

8-34

k Using List Sort Functions in a Program
These functions let you sort data in lists into ascending or descending order.
• Ascending order
SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)

• Descending order
SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)

k Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program
Including statistical calculations and graphing operations in a program lets you calculate and
graph statistical data.

u To set conditions and draw a statistical graph
Following a StatGraph command (“S-Gph1”, “S-Gph2”, or “S-Gph3”), you must specify the
following graph conditions:
• Graph draw/non-draw status (DrawOn/DrawOff)
• Graph Type
• x-axis data location (list name)
• y-axis data location (list name)
• Frequency data location (list name)
• Mark Type
• ColorLink setting (X&Y, OnlyX, OnlyY, On, Off, X&Freq)
• Graph Color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
When “Pie” is specified for the Graph Type:
• Display setting (% or Data)
• Percent data storage list specification (None or list name)
When “Pie” or “Hist” is specified for the Graph Type:
• Area color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
• Paint style setting (ColorNormal, ColorLighter)
• Border color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorClr)

8-35

When “MedBox” is specified for the Graph Type:
• Outliers On/Off setting
• Box color setting (one of the seven colors*)
• Whisker color setting (one of the seven colors*)
• Outliers color setting (one of the seven colors*)
• Box inside color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
• Box inside paint setting (ColorNormal, ColorLighter)
When “Bar” is specified for the Graph Type:
• First bar graph data (list name)
• Second and third bar graph data (list name)
• Bar graph orientation (Length or Horizontal)
• Area color settings for each data (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
• Paint style settings for each data (ColorNormal, ColorLighter)
• Border color settings for each data (one of the seven colors* or ColorClr)
* Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow
The graph conditions that are required depends on the graph type. See “General Graph
Settings” (page 6-2).
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a scatter diagram or xyLine graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto
In the case of an xy line graph, replace “Scatter” in the above specification with “xyLine”.
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a normal probability plot.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a histogram.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Hist, List 1, List 2, ColorLinkOff, Blue ColorLighter
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a broken graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Broken, List 1, List 2, ColorLinkOff, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a normal distribution graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, N-Dist, List 1, List 2, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a med-box graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, MedBox, List 1, List 2, 1, Yellow, Green, Blue, Red
Outliers On/Off (1: On, 0: Off)
Outliers color
Box color
Whisker color
Box inside color

8-36

• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3, Blue
The same format can be used for the following types of graphs, by simply replacing “Linear”
in the above specification with the applicable graph type.
Linear Regression .......... Linear

Logarithmic Regression ...... Log

Med-Med......................... Med-Med

Exponential Regression ...... ExpReg(a·eˆbx)
ExpReg(a·bˆx)

Quadratic Regression .... Quad
Cubic Regression .......... Cubic

Power Regression ............... Power

Quartic Regression ........ Quart
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a sinusoidal regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Sinusoidal, List 1, List 2, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a logistic regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Logistic, List 1, List 2, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a pie chart.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Pie, List 1, %, None, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto ColorLighter, ColorClr
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a bar graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Bar, List 1, None, None, StickLength, ColorLinkOff, Blue ColorLighter,
Black, Red ColorLighter, Black, Green ColorLighter, Black
To draw a statistical graph, insert the “DrawStat” command following the graph condition
specification line.
ClrGraph _
S-Wind Auto _
{1, 2, 3} → List 1 _
{1, 2, 3} → List 2 _
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto _
DrawStat

8-37

k Using Distribution Graphs in a Program
Special commands are used to draw distribution graphs in a program.

• To draw a normal cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistNorm ,  [,σ, ]
Population mean*1
Population standard deviation*1
Data upper limit
Data lower limit

*1 This can be omitted. Omitting these items performs the calculation using  = 1 and  = 0.
p= 1
2πσ

∫

Upper

–

e

(x – μμ)2
2σ

2

dx

ZLow =

Lower

Lower – μ
σ

ZUp =

Upper – μ
σ

• Executing DrawDistNorm performs the above calculation
in accordance with the specified conditions and draws
the graph. At this time the ZLow < x < ZUp region on the
graph is filled in.

• At the same time, the p, ZLow, and ZUp calculation result values are assigned respectively
to variables p, ZLow, and ZUp, and p is assigned to Ans.

• To draw a Student- t cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistT , , 
Degree of freedom
Data upper limit
Data lower limit

p=

∫

Upper
Lower

df + 1
Γ
2
df
Γ
2

–

df + 1

2
2
1+ x
df
dx
×
π × df

tLow = Lower

tUp = Upper

• Executing DrawDistT performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower < x < Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, the p calculation result value and the Lower and Upper input values are
assigned respectively to variables p, tLow, and tUp, and p is assigned to Ans.

8-38

• To draw a 2 cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistChi , , 
Degree of freedom
Data upper limit
Data lower limit

p=

∫

Upper
Lower

df

1
df
Γ
2

×

1
2

2

df

× x

2

–1

× e

–

x
2

dx

• Executing DrawDistChi performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower < x < Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, calculation result is assigned to variables p and Ans.

• To draw an F cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistF , , , 
Degrees of freedom of denominator
Degrees of freedom of numerator
Data upper limit
Data lower limit

p=

∫

Upper
Lower

ndf + ddf
2
ndf
×
ndf × ddf
ddf
Γ
Γ
2
2
Γ

ndf
2

ndf

× x

2

–1

ndf × x
× 1+
ddf

–

ndf + ddf
2

dx

• Executing DrawDistF performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower < x < Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, calculation result p is assigned to variables p and Ans.

8-39

k Performing Statistical Calculations in a Program
• Single-variable statistical calculation
1-Variable List1, List 2
Frequency data (Frequency)

x-axis data (XList)
• Paired-variable statistical calculation
2-Variable List 1, List 2, List 3
Frequency data (Frequency)

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)
• Regression statistical calculation
LinearReg(ax+b) List 1, List 2, List 3
Calculation
type*

Frequency data (Frequency)

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

* Any one of the following can be specified as the calculation type.
LinearReg(ax+b) ......linear regression (ax+b type)
LinearReg(a+bx) ......linear regression (a+bx type)
Med-MedLine ..........Med-Med calculation
QuadReg .................quadratic regression
CubicReg .................cubic regression
QuartReg .................quartic regression
LogReg ...................logarithmic regression
ExpReg(a·eˆbx)........exponential regression (a·ebx type)
ExpReg(a·bˆx)..........exponential regression (a·bx type)
PowerReg ...............power regression
• Sinusoidal regression statistical calculation
SinReg List 1, List 2

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

8-40

• Logistic regression statistical calculation
LogisticReg List 1, List 2

y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)

k Performing Distribution Calculations in a Program
• The following values are substituted whenever any of the arguments enclosed in brackets
([ ]) are omitted.

σ=1, =0, tail=L (Left)
• For the calculation formula of each probability density function, see “Statistic Formula”
(page 6-68).

• Normal Distribution
NormPD(: Returns the normal probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: NormPD(x[, σ, )]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
NormCD(: Returns the normal cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: NormCD(Lower, Upper[, σ, )]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation results p, ZLow, and
ZUp are assigned respectively to variables p, ZLow, and ZUp. Calculation result p also is
assigned to Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvNormCD(: Returns the inverse normal cumulative distribution (lower and/or upper value(s))
for the specified p value.
Syntax: InvNormCD(["L(or –1) or R(or 1) or C(or 0)", ]p[,σ, ])
tail (Left, Right, Central)

• A single value or a list can be specified for p. Calculation results are output in accordance
with the tail setting as described below.
tail = Left
The Upper value is assigned to variables x1InvN and Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
tail = Right
The Lower value is assigned to variables x1InvN and Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
tail = Central
The Lower and Upper values are assigned respectively to variables x1InvN and x2InvN.
Lower only is assigned to Ans (ListAns when p is a list).

8-41

• Student- t Distribution
tPD(: Returns the Student-t probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: tPD(x, df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
tCD(: Returns the Student-t cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: tCD(Lower,Upper,df [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation results p, tLow,
and tUp are assigned respectively to variables p, tLow, and tUp. Calculation result p also is
assigned to Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvTCD(: Returns the inverse Student-t cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified
p value.
Syntax: InvTCD(p,df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The Lower value is assigned to the xInv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• 2 Distribution
ChiPD(: Returns the 2 probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: ChiPD(x,df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
ChiCD(: Returns the 2 cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: ChiCD(Lower,Upper,df [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvChiCD(: Returns the inverse 2 cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified p
value.
Syntax: InvChiCD(p,df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The Lower value is assigned to the xInv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

8-42

• F Distribution
FPD(: Returns the F probability density (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: FPD(x,ndf,ddf [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
FCD(: Returns the F cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: FCD(Lower,Upper,ndf,ddf [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvFCD(: Returns the inverse F cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified data.
Syntax: InvFCD(p,ndf,ddf [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The Lower value is assigned to the xInv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Binomial Distribution
BinomialPD(: Returns the binomial probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: BinomialPD([x,]n,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
BinomialCD(: Returns the binomial cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: BinomialCD([[Lower,] Upper,]n,P[)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvBinomialCD(: Returns the inverse binomial cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvBinomialCD(p,n,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to
the xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

8-43

• Poisson Distribution
PoissonPD(: Returns the Poisson probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: PoissonPD(x, [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
PoissonCD(: Returns the Poisson cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: PoissonCD([Lower,] Upper, [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvPoissonCD(: Returns the inverse Poisson cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvPoissonCD(p, [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to
the xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

• Geometric Distribution
GeoPD(: Returns the geometric probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: GeoPD(x, P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
GeoCD(: Returns the geometric cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: GeoCD([Lower,] Upper,P[)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvGeoCD(: Returns the inverse geometric cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvGeoCD(p,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result is assigned to the xInv
and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

8-44

• Hypergeometric Distribution
HypergeoPD(: Returns the hypergeometric probability (p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: HypergeoPD(x, n, M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for x. Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
HypergeoCD(: Returns the hypergeometric cumulative distribution (p value) for the specified
data.
Syntax: HypergeoCD([Lower,] Upper, n, M, N[)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvHypergeoCD(: Returns the inverse hypergeometric cumulative distribution for the specified
data.
Syntax: InvHypergeoCD(p, n, M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for p. The calculation result X value is assigned to
the xInv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).

k Using the TEST Command to Execute a Command in a Program
• The following are the specifications ranges for the “ condition” argument of the command.
“<” or –1 when  < 0
“≠” or 0 when  ≠ 0
“>” or 1 when  > 0
The above also apply for the “ρ condition” and “&ρ condition” specification methods.
• For explanations of arguments, see “Tests” (page 6-32) and “Input and Output Terms of
Tests, Confidence Interval, and Distribution” (page 6-65).
• For the calculation formula of each command, see “Statistic Formula” (page 6-68).

• Z Test
OneSampleZTest: Executes 1-sample Z-test calculation.
Syntax:

OneSampleZTest " condition", 0, σ, o, n

Output Values:

z, p, o, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, o, n and to ListAns
elements 1 through 4.

Syntax:

OneSampleZTest " condition", 0, σ, List[, Freq]

Output Values:

z, p, o, sx, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, o, sx, n and to
ListAns elements 1 through 5.

8-45

TwoSampleZTest: Executes 2-sample Z-test calculation.
Syntax:

TwoSampleZTest "1 condition", σ1, σ2, o1, n1, o2, n2

Output Values:

z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to variables z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2
and to ListAns elements 1 through 6.

Syntax:

TwoSampleZTest "1 condition", σ1, σ2, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2]]

Output Values:

z, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to variables z, p, o1, o2,
sx1, sx2, n1, n2 and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.

OnePropZTest:

Executes 1-proportion Z-test calculation.

Syntax:

OnePropZTest "p condition", p0, x, n

Output Values:

z, p, p̂, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, p̂, n and to ListAns
elements 1 through 4.

TwoPropZTest:

Executes 2-proportion Z-test calculation.

Syntax:

TwoPropZTest "p1 condition", x1, n1, x2, n2

Output Values:

z, p, p̂ 1, p̂ 2, p̂, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to variables z, p, p̂ 1, p̂ 2, p̂,
n1, n2 and to ListAns elements 1 through 7.

• t Test
OneSampleTTest: Executes 1-sample t-test calculation.
Syntax:

OneSampleTTest " condition", 0, o, sx, n
OneSampleTTest " condition", 0, List[, Freq]

Output Values:

t, p, o, sx, n are assigned respectively to the variables with the same
names and to ListAns elements 1 through 5.

TwoSampleTTest: Executes 2-sample t-test calculation.
Syntax:

TwoSampleTTest "1 condition", o1, sx1, n1, o2, sx2, n2[,Pooled condition]
TwoSampleTTest "1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1[, Freq2[,
Pooled condition ]]]

Output Values:

When Pooled condition = 0, t, p, df, o1 o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned
respectively to the variables with the same names and to ListAns
elements 1 through 9.
When Pooled condition = 1, t, p, df, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, sp, n1, n2 are assigned
respectively to the variables with the same names and to ListAns
elements 1 through 10.

Note:

Specify 0 when you want to turn off the Pooled condition and 1 when you
want to turn it on. Omitting the input is treated as Pooled condition off.

LinRegTTest:

Executes linear regression t-test calculation.

Syntax:

LinRegTTest "&ρ condition", XList, YList[, Freq]

Output Values:

t, p, df, a, b, s, r, r2 are assigned respectively to the variables with the
same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.

8-46

• 2 Test
ChiGOFTest:

Executes a chi-square goodness of fit test.

Syntax:

ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2, df, List 3
(List 1 is the Observed list, List 2 is the Expected list, and List 3 is the
CNTRB list.)

Output Values:

2, p, df are assigned respectively to the variables with the same names
and to ListAns elements 1 through 3. The CNTRB list is stored in List 3.

ChiTest:

Executes a chi-square test.

Syntax:

ChiTest MatA, MatB
(MatA is the Observed matrix and MatB is the Expected matrix.)

Output Values:

2, p, df are assigned respectively to the variables with the same names
and to ListAns elements 1 through 3. The Expected matrix is assigned to
MatB.

• F Test
TwoSampleFTest: Executes 2-sample F-test calculation.
Syntax:

TwoSampleFTest "σ1 condition", sx1, n1, sx2, n2

Output Values:

F, p, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to the variables with the
same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 6.

Syntax:

TwoSampleFTest "σ1 condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1 [, Freq2]]

Output Values:

F, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2 are assigned respectively to the variables with
the same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.

• ANOVA
OneWayANOVA:

Executes one-factor ANOVA analysis of variance.

Syntax:

OneWayANOVA List1, List2
(List1 is Factor list (A) and List2 is the Dependent list.)

Output Values:

Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms are assigned respectively
to variables Adf, SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Edf, SSe, MSe.
Also, output values are assigned to MatAns as shown below.
MatAns =

Adf

Ass

Ams

ERRdf ERRss ERRms

AF Ap
0

0

TwoWayANOVA:

Executes two-factor ANOVA analysis of variance.

Syntax:

TwoWayANOVA List1, List2, List3
(List1 is Factor list (A), List2 is Factor list (B), and List3 is the Dependent
list.)

8-47

Output Values:

Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF,
ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms are assigned respectively to variables Adf,
SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab,
Edf, SSe, MSe.
Also, output values are assigned to MatAns as shown below.

MatAns =

Adf

Ass

Ams

AF

Ap

Bdf

Bss

Bms

BF

Bp

ABdf

ABss

ABms ABF ABp

ERRdf ERRss ERRms

0

0

k Performing Financial Calculations in a Program
• Setup Commands
• Date Mode Setting for Financial Calculations
DateMode365 ....... 365 days
DateMode360 ....... 360 days
• Payment Period Setting
PmtBgn................. Start of period
PmtEnd................. End of period
• Bond Calculation Payment Periods
PeriodsAnnual ...... Annual
PeriodsSemi ......... Semiannual

• Financial Calculation Commands
For the meaning of each argument, see “Chapter 7 Financial Calculation”.
• Simple Interest
Smpl_SI:

Returns the interest based on simple interest calculation.

Syntax:

Smpl_SI(n, I%, PV)

Smpl_SFV:

Returns the total of principal and interest based on simple interest calculation.

Syntax:

Smpl_SFV(n, I%, PV)

8-48

• Compound Interest
Note:
• P/Y and C/Y can be omitted for all compound interest calculations. When they are omitted,
calculations are performed using P/Y=12 and C/Y=12.
• If you perform a calculation that uses a compound interest function (Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I%(,
Cmpd_PV(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FV(), the argument(s) you input and the calculation results
will be saved to the applicable variables (n, I%, PV, etc.). If you perform a calculation that
uses any other type of financial calculation function, the argument and calculation results are
not assigned to variables.
Cmpd_n:

Returns the number of compound periods.

Syntax:

Cmpd_n(I%, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_I%:

Returns the annual interest.

Syntax:

Cmpd_I%(n, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_PV:

Returns the present value (loan amount for installment payments, principal for
savings).

Syntax:

Cmpd_PV(n, I%, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_PMT: Returns equal input/output values (payment amounts for installment payments,
deposit amounts for savings) for a fixed period.
Syntax:

Cmpd_PMT(n, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y)

Cmpd_FV:

Returns the final input/output amount or total principal and interest.

Syntax:

Cmpd_FV(n, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

• Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal)
Cash_NPV:

Returns the net present value.

Syntax:

Cash_NPV(I%, Csh)

Cash_IRR:

Returns the internal rate of return.

Syntax:

Cash_IRR(Csh)

Cash_PBP: Returns the payback period.
Syntax:

Cash_PBP(I%, Csh)

Cash_NFV:

Returns the net future value.

Syntax:

Cash_NFV(I%, Csh)

• Amortization
Amt_BAL:

Returns the remaining principal balance following payment PM2.

Syntax:

Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_INT:

Returns the interest paid for payment PM1.

Syntax:

Amt_INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_PRN:

Returns the principal and interest paid for payment PM1.

Syntax:

Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

8-49

Amt_ΣINT:

Returns the total principal and interest paid from payment PM1 to PM2.

Syntax:

Amt_ΣINT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

Amt_ΣPRN: Returns the total principal paid from payment PM1 to PM2.
Syntax:

Amt_ΣPRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)

• Interest Rate Conversion
Cnvt_EFF:

Returns the interest rate converted from the nominal interest rate to the effective
interest rate.

Syntax:

Cnvt_EFF(n, I%)

Cnvt_APR:

Returns the interest rate converted from the effective interest rate to the nominal
interest rate.

Syntax:

Cnvt_APR(n, I%)

• Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations
Cost:

Returns the cost based on a specified selling price and margin.

Syntax:

Cost(Sell, Margin)

Sell:

Returns the selling price based on a specified cost and margin.

Syntax:

Sell(Cost, Margin)

Margin:

Returns the margin based on a specified cost and selling price.

Syntax:

Margin(Cost, Sell)

• Day/Date Calculations
Days_Prd:

Returns the number of days from a specified d1 to specified d2.

Syntax:

Days_Prd(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2)

• Bond Calculations
Bond_PRC: Returns in list form bond prices based on specified conditions.
Syntax:

Bond_PRC(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, YLD) = {PRC,
INT, CST}

Bond_YLD: Returns the yield based on specified conditions.
Syntax:

Bond_YLD(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, PRC)

8-50

7. Program Mode Command List
RUN Program
4(MENU) key
Level 1
STAT

Level 2
DRAW
GRAPH

List
TYPE
DIST

CALC

MAT

LIST
GRAPH

Swap
Row
Row+
Row+
SortA
SortD
SEL
TYPE

Level 3

Command

On
DrawOn
Off
DrawOff
S-Gph1
S-Gph1_
S-Gph2
S-Gph2_
S-Gph3
S-Gph3_
Scatter
Scatter
xyLine
xyLine
Hist
Hist
Box
MedBox
Bar
Bar
N-Dist
N-Dist
Broken
Broken
X
Linear
Med
Med-Med
X2
Quad
X3
Cubic
X4
Quart
Log
Log
*1 (see page 8-57)
Power
Power
Sin
Sinusoidal
NPPlot
NPPlot
Logistic
Logistic
Pie
Pie
List_
*2 (see page 8-57)
DrawN
DrawDistNorm_
DrawT
DrawDistT_
DrawC
DrawDistChi_
DrawF
DrawDistF_
1-VAR
1-Variable_
2-VAR
2-Variable_
*3 (see page 8-57)
Med
Med-MedLine_
X2
QuadReg_
X3
CubicReg_
X4
QuartReg_
Log
LogReg_
*4 (see page 8-57)
Power
PowerReg_
Sin
SinReg_
Logistic
LogisticReg_
Swap_
`Row_
`Row+_
Row+_
SortA(
SortD(
On
G_SelOn_
Off
G_SelOff_
Y=
Y=Type
r=
r=Type
Param
ParamType
X=
X=Type

STYLE

Y>
Y<
Y≥
Y≤
X>
X<
X≥
X≤
—
—
·····
······
—

GPH-MEM

DYNA

TABLE

GRHCLR
On
Off
Var
TYPE

GRHCLR
On
Off
TYPE

STYLE

Store
Recall

Y=
r=
Param

Y=
r=
Param
—
—
·····
······
—

RECURSION

GRHCLR
SEL+S

On
Off
—
—
·····
······
—

TYPE

n.a n..

8-51

an
a n+1
a n+2
n
an
a n+1
a n+2
bn
b n+1
b n+2
cn
c n+1
c n+2
Σa n
Σa n+1

Y>Type
YType
X
<
≥
≤
Locate_
Getkey
Send(
Receive(
Send38k_
Receive38k_
OpenComport38k
CloseComport38k
:
StrJoin(
StrLen(
StrCmp(
StrSrc(
StrLeft(
StrRight(
StrMid(
Exp'Str(
Exp(
StrUpr(
StrLwr(
StrInv(
StrShift(
StrRotate(

>
<
≥
≤
Locate
Getkey
Send
Receive
S38k
R38k
Open
Close
Join
Len
Cmp
Src
Left
Right
Mid
E→S
Exp
Upr
Lwr
Inverse
Shift
Rotate

!m(SET UP) key
Level 1
ANGLE

COORD
GRID

AXES

LABEL
DISPLAY

SKT/LIN

Level 2
Deg
Rad
Gra
On
Off
On
Off
Line
On
Off
Scale
On
Off
Fix
Sci
Norm
ENG

—
—
·····
······
—

DRAW
DERIV

8-55

Connect
Plot
On
Off

Level 3

On
Off
Eng

Command
Deg
Rad
Gra
CoordOn
CoordOff
GridOn
GridOff
GridLine
AxesOn
AxesOff
AxesScale
LabelOn
LabelOff
Fix_
Sci_
Norm_
EngOn
EngOff
Eng
S-L-Normal
S-L-Thick
S-L-Broken
S-L-Dot
S-L-Thin
G-Connect
G-Plot
DerivOn
DerivOff

BACK

FUNC
SIMUL
SGV-WIN
LIST
LOCUS
TBL-VAR
ΣDISP
RESID
COMPLEX

FRAC
Y=SPEED
DATE
PMT
PERIODS
INEQ
SIMP
Q1Q3

BG-None
BG-Pict_
*8 (see page 8-58)
FuncOn
FuncOff
SimulOn
SimulOff
S-WindAuto
S-WindMan
File_
LocusOn
LocusOff
VarRange
VarList_
Σ dispOn
ΣdispOff
Resid-None
Resid-List_
Real
a+bi
r∠θ
d/c
ab/c
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
DateMode365
DateMode360
PmtBgn
PmtEnd
PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsSemi
IneqTypeIntsect
IneqTypeUnion
SimplfyAuto
SimplfyMan
Q1Q3TypeStd
Q1Q3TypeOnData
Plot/Line-Color_

None
Pict
OPEN
On
Off
On
Off
Auto
Manual
File
On
Off
Range
List
On
Off
None
List
Real
a+bi
r∠θ
d/c
ab/c
Norm
High
365
360
Begin
End
Annual
Semi
Intsect
Union
Auto
Manual
Std
OnData

P/L-CLR

X>
X<
X≥
X≤
Plot
PlotOn
PlotOff
PlotChg
Line
F-Line

PLOT

LINE
Circle
Vertical
Horz
Text
PIXEL

Test
STYLE

On
Off
Pxlchg
—
—
·····
······
—

Graph_X>
Graph_X<
Graph_X≥≥
Graph_X≤
Plot_
PlotOn_
PlotOff_
PlotChg_
Line
F-Line_
Circle_
Vertical_
Horizontal_
Text_
PxlOn_
PxlOff_
PxlChg_
PxlTest(
SketchNormal_
SketchThick_
SketchBroken_
SketchDot_
SketchThin_

!f(FORMAT) key
Level 1
1:Color
Command

2:Paint
Command

Level 2

Level 3

Command
Black_
Blue_
Red_
Magenta_
Green_
Cyan_
Yellow_
ColorAuto_
ColorClr_
ColorNormal_
ColorLighter_

1:Black
2:Blue
3:Red
4:Magenta
5:Green
6:Cyan
7:Yellow
9:Auto
A:Clear
1:Normal
2:Lighter

! key
Level 1
ZOOM
V-WIN

SKETCH

Level 2
Factor
Auto
V-Win
Store
Recall
Cls
Tangent
Norm
Inverse
GRAPH

Level 3

Y=
r=
Param
x=c
G·∫ dX
Y>
Y<
Y≥
Y≤

Command
Factor_
ZoomAuto
ViewWindow_
StoV-Win_
RclV-Win_
Cls
Tangent_
Normal_
Inverse_
Graph_Y=
Graph_r=
Graph(X,Y)=(
Graph_X=
Graph_ ∫
Graph_Y>
Graph_Y<
Graph_Y≥
Graph_Y≤≤

BASE Program
4(MENU) key
Level 1
d~o

LOGIC

DISPLAY

8-56

Level 2
d
h
b
o
Neg
Not
and
or
xor
xnor
'Dec
'Hex
'Bin
'Oct

Level 3

Command
d
h
b
o
Neg_
Not_
and
or
xor
xnor
'Dec
'Hex
'Bin
'Oct

Level 3

!J(PRGM) key
Level 1
Prog
JUMP

Level 2

Level 3

Lbl
Goto
⇒
Isz
Dsz
Menu

?
^
RELATNL

Command
Prog_
Lbl_
Goto_
⇒
Isz_
Dsz_
Menu_
?
^
=
≠
>
<
≥
≤
:

=
≠
>
<
≥
≤

:

!m(SET UP) key
Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

*1

Exp

*2

MARK

STICK
%DATA
None
COLOR LINK

*3

X

*4

EXP

*5

NORM

Command
Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct

Dec
Hex
Bin
Oct

t

CHI

F

!f(FORMAT) key
Level 1
1:Black
2:Blue
3:Red
4:Magenta
5:Green
6:Cyan
7:Yellow

Level 2

Level 3

Command
Black_
Blue_
Red_
Magenta_
Green_
Cyan_
Yellow_

BINOMIAL

POISSON

GEO

HYPRGEO

*6

Z

t

CHI
F
ANOVA

8-57

Level 4
aebx
abx


Length
Horz
%
Data
BothXY
X&Freq
OnlyX
OnlyY
On
Off
ax+b
a+bx
aebx
abx
Npd
Ncd
InvN
tpd
tcd
Invt
Cpd
Ccd
InvC
Fpd
Fcd
InvF
Bpd
Bcd
InvB
Ppd
Pcd
InvP
Gpd
Gcd
InvG
Hpd
Hcd
InvH
1-Sample
2-Sample
1-Prop
2-Prop
1-Sample
2-Sample
REG
GOF
2WAY
1WAYANO
2WAYANO

Command
Exp(ae^bx)
Exp(ab^x)
Square
Cross
Dot
StickLength
StickHoriz
%
Data
None
ColorLinkX&Y
ColorLinkX&Freq
ColorLinkOnlyX
ColorLinkOnlyY
ColorLinkOn
ColorLinkOff
LinearReg(ax+b)
LinearReg(a+bx)
ExpReg(a•e^bx)
ExpReg(a•b^x)
NormPD(
NormCD(
InvNormCD(
tPD(
tCD(
InvTCD(
ChiPD(
ChiCD(
InvChiCD(
FPD(
FCD(
InvFCD(
BinomialPD(
BinomialCD(
InvBinomialCD(
PoissonPD(
PoissonCD(
InvPoissonCD(
GeoPD(
GeoCD(
InvGeoCD(
HypergeoPD(
HypergeoCD(
InvHyperGeoCD(
OneSampleZTest_
TwoSampleZTest_
OnePropZTest_
TwoPropZTest_
OneSampleTTest_
TwoSampleTTest_
LinRegTTest_
ChiGOFTest_
ChiTest_
TwoSampleFTest_
OneWayANOVA_
TwoWayANOVA_

*7 Metric conversion commands (commands
included in K6(g)1(CONVERT)) are
supported only when the Metric Conversion
add-in application is installed.
8
* Selecting “OPEN” displays a dialog box for
specifying an image file. The storage memory
location (folder name and file name) of the
specified image will be input. For example:
"Pict\Pict01.g3p".
Level 3
*9

TEST

INTR

DIST

Level 4

Command

p
z
t
Chi
F
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2

p
z
t
2

df
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Lower
Upper
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2

df
se
r
r2
pa
Fa
Adf
SSa
MSa
pb
Fb
Bdf
SSb
MSb
pab
Fab
ABdf
SSab
MSab
Edf
SSe
MSe
Lower
Upper
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2

df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp

df
p
xInv
x1Inv
x2Inv
zLow
zUp
tLow
tUp

F
p̂
p̂ 1
p̂ 2

8-58

8. CASIO Scientific Function Calculator Special
Commands ⇔ Text Conversion Table
The table below shows the special text strings that correspond to commands when converting
between programs and text files. For details about the operations for converting between
programs and text files, see “Converting Programs and Text Files” (page 8-7).

Important!
• Converting a program that contains the types of commands described below to a text file will
cause the commands to be converted to text strings with underbar (_) characters appended
at the beginning and end, as shown in the table below.
- A command enclosed in quotation marks (" ")
- A command in a comment line, which is a line that begins with a single quotation mark (')
Note that non-command alpha-numeric characters in a program that are enclosed in quotation
marks (" ") or are in a comment line are output to the text file as-is.
Example:
In the program:
""
"Theta"*1
"Tmax"*2
"TThetamax"*1
"or"*3
"or"*1

In the text file (after conversion):
˝ _Theta_ ˝
˝ Theta ˝
˝ _TThetamax_ ˝
˝ TThetamax ˝
˝ _or_ ˝
˝ or ˝

*1 Non-command alpha-numeric characters
*2 V-Window Tmax command
*3 Logical operator or
Converting from a text file to a program converts the special character strings back to their
corresponding commands, shown above.
•

When converting a program that contains special characters input using 6(CHAR) when
editing the program on the calculator, the special characters will be converted to character
string codes as shown below.
Example:
In the program:
λ
1


`
⇔

In the text file (after conversion):
#E54A
#E5A5
#E5F0
#E641
#E69C
#E6D6

These codes are not included in the tables on the pages 8-60 through 8-65.

8-59

* “ ” in the following tables indicates a space.
Command

Text

Command

Text

Command

Text

f

femto

7

7

m

m

p

pico

8

8

n

n

n

nano

9

9

o

o

μ

micro

:

:

p

p

m

milli

;

;

q

q

k

kilo

<

<

r

r

M

Mega

=

=

s

s

G

Giga

>

>

t

t

T

Tera

?

?

u

u

P

Peta

@

@

v

v

E

Exa

A

A

w

w

^

Disps

B

B

x

x

↵

(CR)

C

C

y

y

→

->

D

D

z

z

E

Exp

E

E

{

{

≤

<=

F

F

|

|

G

<>

G

G

}

}

≥

>=

H

H

~

˜

⇒

=>

I

I

Pol(

Pol(

f1

f1

J

J

sin

sin

f2

f2

K

K

cos

cos

f3

f3

L

L

tan

f4

f4

M

M

f5

f5

N

N

f6

f6

O

O

'

a

&HA

P

P

-

(-)

b

&HB

Q

Q

P

nPr

c

&HC

R

R

+

+

&HD

S

S

xnor

xnor

e

&HE

T

T

2

^<2>

f

&HF

U

U

V

V

∫(

Char!

W

W

Mod

Mod

"

˝

X

X

Σx2

Sigmax^2

#

#

Y

Y

$

$

Z

Z

sin1

sin^-1

%

%

[

[

cos1

cos^-1

&

\

¥

tan1

'

’

]

]

(

(

^

^^

)

)

_

_

€

€€

'

`

+

++

a

a

c

nCr

,

,

b

b



−

-

Char-

c

c

xor

xor

.

.

d

d

1

^<-1>

/

//

e

e

°

deg

0

0

f

f

Med

Med

1

1

g

g

Σx

Sigmax

2

2

h

h

Rec(

3

3

i

i

sinh

sinh

4

4

j

j

cosh

cosh

5

5

k

k

tanh

6

6

l

l

d

!

&

8-60

tan
h

&h
ln

ln

Sqrt

dms
Integral(

x

tan^-1
d

&d
log

log
3

X

'

Cbrt
Abs

Abs

Rec(

tanh
o

&o

Command

Text

e^

Command
e^

Text

∑xy

Int

Int

Not

Not

Command
Intg

Intg
Plot

Text

Conjg

Conjg

Sigmaxy

ReP

ReP

Plot

ImP

ImP

^

^

d/dx(

d/dx(

×

€

Lbl

Lbl

d2/dx2(

d^2/dx^2(

or

or

Fix

Fix

Solve(

Solve(

!

!

Sci

Sci

Σ(

Sigma(

r

rad

Dsz

Dsz

FMin(

FMin(

minY

minY

Isz

Isz

FMax(

FMax(

minX

minX

Factor

Factor

Seq(

Seq(

n

Statn

ViewWindow

ViewWindow

Min(

Min(

Line

Line

sinh1

sinh^−1

Goto

Goto

Mean(

Mean(

cosh1

cosh^−1

Prog

Prog

Median(

Median(

SolveN(

SolveN(

tanh^−1

tanh1

Graph Y=

Graph Y=

b

&b

Graph 

Graph Integral

Red

Red

10

(10)

Graph Y>

Graph Y>

Blue

Blue

Green

Green

Frac

Frac

Graph Y<

Graph Y<

Neg

Neg

Graph Y≥

Graph Y>=

MOD(

MOD(

Graph Y≤

Graph Y<=

MOD_Exp(

MOD_Exp(
GCD(

x

'

Xrt

÷

/

Graph r=

Graph r=

GCD(

and

and

Graph(X,Y)=(

Graph(X,Y)=(

LCM(

LCM(

{

frac

,

Para,

StdDev(

StdDev(

g

gra

P(

ProbP(

Variance(

Variance(

maxY

maxY

Q(

ProbQ(

Mat

Mat

maxX

maxX

R(

ProbR(

Trn

Trn

∑y2

Sigmay2

t(

Probt(

€Row

€Row

Ans

Ans

Xmin

Xmin

€Row+

€Row+

Ran#

Xmax

Xmax

Row+

Row+

x̄

x-bar

Xscl

Xscl

Swap

Swap

ȳ

y-bar

Ymin

Ymin

Dim

Dim

σx

sigmax

Ymax

Ymax

sx

Sx

Yscl

Yscl

σx

sigmay

Tmin

TThetamin

Augment(

sy

Sy

Tmax

TThetamax

List→Mat(

List->Mat(

a

Regression_a

Tptch

TThetaptch

Mat→List(

Mat->List(

b

Regression_b

Xfct

Xfct

r
^
x

Regression_r

Yfct

Yfct

Prod

Prod
Percent

^
y

y-hat

r





Theta

RightXmin

RightXmin

List

List

∑y

Sigmay

RightXmax

RightXmax

ΔList

Dlist

RightXscl

Ran#

x-hat

Fill(

D Start

D End

D End

Cuml

D pitch

D pitch

D Start

Augment(

Sum

Sum
Percent

Fill(
Identity

Identity

Cuml

i

Imaginary

π

pi

RightXscl

Cls

Cls

RightYmin

RightYmin

Rnd

Rnd

RightYmax

RightYmax

Ref

Ref

Dec

&D

RightYscl

RightYscl

Rref

Rref

Hex

&H

RightTmin

RightTThetamin

'

Conv

Bin

&B

RightTmax

RightTThetamax

Sim Coef

Sim Coef

Oct

&O

RightTThetaptch

Ply Coef

Ply Coef

‡

RightTptch

@D8

c

Regression_c

Sim Result

Sim Result

Ply Result

Ply Result

Norm

Norm

∞

Infinity

∠

Angle

d

Regression_d

Deg

Deg

e

Regression_e

n

Financial n

Rad

Rad

Max(

Max(

I%

Financial I%

Gra

Gra

Det

Det

PV

Financial PV

Eng

Eng

Arg

Arg

PMT

Financial PMT

8-61

Command

Text

Command

Text

Command

Text

Σcn+1

Sigmacn+1

List1

Σan+

2

Sigmaan+2

MSb

MSb

List2

Σbn+2

Sigmabn+2

MSab

MSab

List3

List3

Σcn+2

Sigmacn+2

[ns]

[ns]

List4

List4

Int÷

Int/

[ƫs]

[micros]

List5

List5

Rmdr

Rmdr

[ms]

[ms]

List6

List6

Fa

Fa

[s]

[s]

Q1

Q1

n1

n1

[min]

[min]

Q3

Q3

n2

n2

[h]

[h]

x1

x1

x̄1

x-bar1

[day]

[day]

y1

y1

x̄2

x-bar2

[week]

[week]

x2

x2

sx1

sx1

[yr]

[yr]

y2

y2

sx2

sx2

[s-yr]

[s-yr]

x3

x3

sp

Sxp

[t-yr]

[t-yr]

y3

y3

p̂

p-hat

[ C]

[Centigrade]

logab(

logab(

p̂1

p-hat1

[K]

[Kel]

RndFix(

RndFix(

p̂2

p-hat2

[ F]

[Fahrenheit]

FV

Financial FV

List1
List2

SSab

SSab

RanInt#(

RanInt#(

Lower

Lower

[ R]

[Rankine]

RanList#(

RanList#(

Upper

Upper

[u]

[u]

RanBin#(

RanBin#(

P/Y

P/Year

[g]

[g]

RanNorm#(

RanNorm#(

C/Y

C/Year

[kg]

[kg]

Σan

Sigmaan

Fb

Fb

[lb]

[lb]

Σbn

Sigmabn

F

F-Value

[oz]

[oz]

Σcn

Sigmacn

z

z-Value

[slug]

[slug]

Getkey

Getkey

p

p-Value

[ton(short)]

[ton(short)]

F Result

F Result

t

t-Value

[ton(long)]

[ton(long)]

F Start

F Start

se

se

[mton]

[mton]

F End

F End

χ2

x^2

[l-atm]

[l-atm]

F pitch

F pitch

r2

r^2

[ft·lbf]

[ftlbf]

R Result

R Result

Adf

Adf

[calIT]

[calIT]

R Start

R Start

Edf

Edf

[calth]

[calth]

R End

R End

df

df

[Btu]

[Btu]

H Start

H Start

SSa

SSa

[kW·h]

[kWh]

H pitch

H pitch

MSa

MSa

[kgf·m]

[kgfm]

>Simp

SSe

SSe

[Pa]

[Pa]

an

MSe

MSe

[kPa]

[kPa]

an+1

Fab

Fab

[bar]

[bar]

[mmH2O]

[mmH2O]

'Simp
an
a n+ 1
2

an+2

Bdf

Bdf

n

Subscriptn

ABdf

ABdf

[mmHg]

[mmHg]

a0

a0

pa

pa

[inH2O]

[inH2O]

pb

[inHg]

[inHg]

a n+

a

1

a

2

a1
a2

pb
pab

2

pab

[lbf/in ]

[lbf/in^2]
[kgf/cm^2]

CellSum(

CellSum(

[kgf/cm2]

b n+ 1

bn+1

CellProd(

CellProd(

[atm]

[atm]

2

bn+2

CellMin(

CellMin(

[dyne]

[dyne]

b0

b0

CellMax(

[N]

[New]

[kgf]

[kgf]

bn
b n+

bn

CellMax(

b

1

b1

CellMean(

CellMean(

b

2

b2

CellMedian(

CellMedian(

[lbf]

[lbf]

anStart

anStart

CellIf(

CellIf(

[tonf]

[tonf]

bnStart

bnStart

Y

GraphY

[fm]

[fm]

And

And

r

Graphr

[mm]

[mm]

Or

Or

GraphXt

[cm]

[cm]

[m]

[m]

Not
Xor
Σan+

1

Σbn+

1

Xt

Not

Yt

GraphYt

Xor

X

GraphX

[km]

[km]

SSb

[Mil]

[Mil]

[in]

[in]

Sigmaan+1

SSb

Sigmabn+1

8-62

Command
[ft]

Text

Command
[ft]

IfEnd

Text

Command
IfEnd

Text

LinearReg(ax+b)

LinearReg(ax+b)

[yd]

[yd]

For

For

Med-MedLine

Med-MedLine

[fath]

[fath]

To

To

QuadReg

QuadReg

[rd]

[rd]

Step

Step

CubicReg

CubicReg

[mile]

[mile]

QuartReg

QuartReg

[n mile]

[n_mile]

LogReg

LogReg

[acre]

Next

Next

While

While

[acre]

WhileEnd

WhileEnd

ExpReg(a·e^bx)

ExpReg(ae^bx)

[ha]

[ha]

Do

Do

PowerReg

PowerReg

[cm2]

[cm^2]

S-Gph1

S-Gph1

LpWhile

LpWhile

[m2]

[m^2]

Return

Return

S-Gph2

S-Gph2

[km2]

[km^2]

Break

Break

S-Gph3

S-Gph3

[in2]

[in^2]

Stop

Stop

[ft2]

[ft^2]

[yd2]

[yd^2]

Send(

[mile2]

[mile^2]

[m/s]

Square

Square

Cross

Cross

Send(

Dot

Dot

Receive(

Receive(

Scatter

Scatter

[m/s]

OpenComport38k

OpenComport38k

xyLine

xyLine

[km/h]

[km/h]

CloseComport38k

CloseComport38k

Hist

Hist

[ft/s]

[ft/s]

Send38k

Send38k

MedBox

MedBox

[mile/h]

[mile/h]

Recieve38k

Recieve38k

N-Dist

N-Dist

[knot]

[knot]

ClrText

ClrText

Broken

Broken

[mL]

[mL]

ClrGraph

ClrGraph

Linear

Linear

[L]

[Lit]

ClrList

ClrList

Med-Med

Med-Med

[tsp]

[tsp]

LinearReg(a+bx)

Quad

Quad

[cm3]

[cm^3]

S-L-Normal

S-L-Normal

Cubic

Cubic

[m3]

[m^3]

S-L-Thick

S-L-Thick

Quart

Quart

[tbsp]

[tbsp]

S-L-Broken

S-L-Broken

Log

Log

[in3]

[in^3]

S-L-Dot

S-L-Dot

Exp(a·e^bx)

Exp(ae^bx)

[ft3]

[ft^3]

DrawGraph

DrawGraph

Power

[fl_oz(UK)]

[fl_oz(UK)]

[fl_oz(US)]

[fl_oz(US)]

DrawDyna

DrawDyna

S-WindAuto

S-WindAuto

[cup]

[cup]

DrawStat

DrawStat

S-WindMan

S-WindMan

[pt]

[pt]

DrawFTG-Con

DrawFTG-Con

Graph X=

Graph X=

[qt]

[qt]

DrawFTG-Plt

DrawFTG-Plt

Y=Type

Y=Type

[gal(US)]

[gal(US)]

DrawR-Con

DrawR-Con

r=Type

r=Type

[gal(UK)]

[gal(UK)]

DrawR-Plt

DrawR-Plt

ParamType

ParamType

[ƫm]

[microm]

DrawRΣ-Con

DrawRSigma-Con

X=Type

X=Type

[mg]

[mg]

DrawRΣ-Plt

DrawRSigma-Plt

X>Type

X>Type

[A]

[Ang]

DrawWeb

DrawWeb

XType

Y>Type

[l.y.]

[l.y.]

ThickG

ThickG

Y=Type

[ft·lbf/s]

[ftlbf/s]

DispF-Tbl

DispF-Tbl

YsType

Y<=Type

[calth/s]

[calth/s]

DispR-Tbl

DispR-Tbl

XtType

X>=Type

[hp]

[hp]

SimplifyAuto

SimplifyAuto

XsType

X<=Type

[Btu/min]

[Btu/min]

SimplifyMan

SimplifyMan

G-Connect

G-Connect

[W]

[Wat]

NPPlot

NPPlot

G-Plot

G-Plot

[eV]

[eV]

Sinusoidal

Sinusoidal

Resid-None

Resid-None

Locate

PlotPhase

[erg]

[erg]

SinReg

[J]

[Jou]

Logistic

[cal15]

[cal15]

LogisticReg

Locate

LinearReg(a+bx)

PlotPhase

SinReg
Logistic
LogisticReg

ExpReg(a·b^x)

Resid-List
BG-None
BG-Pict

Power
ExpReg(ab^x)

Resid-List
BG-None
BG-Pict

[kcal15]

[kcal15]

Pie

Pie

GridOff

GridOff

[kcalth]

[kcalth]

Bar

Bar

GridLine

GridLine

[kcalIT]

[kcalIT]

DotG

GridOn

GridOn

Exp(a·b^x)

Exp(a^bx)

DotG

If

If

1-Variable

1-Variable

Then

Then

2-Variable

2-Variable

Else

Else

8-63

D Var

D Var

Command

Text

Command

Q1Q3TypeStd

Q1Q3TypeStd

LabelOn

VarRange

VarRange

Q1Q3TypeOnData Q1Q3TypeOnData

Text

Command

Text

LabelOn

DrawDistChi

DrawDistChi

DerivOn

DerivOn

DrawDistF

DrawDistF

LocusOn

LocusOn

None

None

ΣdispOn

SigmadispOn

StickLength

StickLength

SketchNormal

SketchNormal

SketchThick

SketchThick

G SelOn

G SelOn

StickHoriz

StickHoriz

SketchBroken

SketchBroken

T SelOn

T SelOn

IneqTypeUnion

IneqTypeUnion

SketchDot

SketchDot

D SelOn

D SelOn

Graph X>

Graph X>

R SelOn

R SelOn

Graph X<

Graph X<

anType

anType

an+1Type

an+1Type

DrawOn

DrawOn

Graph X≥

Graph X>=

an+2Type

an+2Type

ab/c

ab/c

Graph X≤

Graph X<=

StoPict

StoPict

d/c

d/c

StrJoin(

StrJoin(

RclPict

RclPict

FuncOff

FuncOff

StrLen(

StrLen(

StoGMEM

StoGMEM

SimulOff

SimulOff

StrCmp(

StrCmp(

RclGMEM

RclGMEM

AxesOff

AxesOff

StrSrc(

StrSrc(

StoV-Win

CoordOff

CoordOff

StrLeft(

StrLeft(

RclV-Win

StrRight(

StoV-Win
RclV-Win
%
Data
Menu
RclCapt

LabelOff

LabelOff

StrRight(

Display%

DerivOff

DerivOff

StrMid(

StrMid(

DisplayData

LocusOff

LocusOff

Exp'Str(

Exp>Str(

ΣdispOff

SigmadispOff

Menu
RclCapt

Exp(

Exp(

G SelOff

G SelOff

StrUpr(

StrUpr(
StrLwr(

Tangent

Tangent

T SelOff

T SelOff

StrLwr(

Normal

Normal

D SelOff

D SelOff

StrInv(

StrInv(

Inverse

Inverse

R SelOff

R SelOff

StrShift(

StrShift(

Vertical

Vertical

DrawOff

DrawOff

StrRotate(

StrRotate(

Horizontal

Horizontal

'Dec

>&D

Str

Str

>&H

ColorAuto

ColorAuto

ColorLighter

ColorLighter

Text

Text

'Hex

Circle

Circle

'Bin

>&B

F-Line

F-Line

'Oct

>&O

ColorLinkX&Y

ColorLinkX&Y
ColorLinkOnlyX

PlotOn

PlotOn

'DMS

>DMS

ColorLinkOnlyX

PlotOff

PlotOff

'a+bi

>a+bi

ColorLinkOnlyY

ColorLinkOnlyY

PlotChg

PlotChg

>re^Theta

ColorLinkOn

ColorLinkOn
ColorLinkOff

'r∠Ƨ

PxlOn

PxlOn

Real

Real

ColorLinkOff

PxlOff

PxlOff

a+bi

a+bi

ColorNormal

PxlChg

PxlChg

r∠Ƨ

re^Theta

PxlTest(

PxlTest(

EngOn

EngOn

SortA(

SortA(

EngOff

EngOff

SortD(

SortD(

Sel a0

Sel a0

VarList1

VarList1

Sel a1

Sel a1

VarList2

VarList2

cn

cn

VarList3

VarList3

c n+ 1

cn+1

VarList4

VarList4

c n+ 2

cn+2

VarList5

VarList5

c0

c0

VarList6

VarList6

c1

c1

File1

File1

File2

File2

cnStart

CnStart

File3

File3

IneqTypeIntsect

IneqTypeIntsect

c2

c2

File4

File4

File5

File5

File

File

File6

File6

VarList

VarList

fn

fn

Y=DrawSpeedNorm

Y=DrawSpeedNorm

Y=DrawSpeedHigh

Y=DrawSpeedHigh

ZoomAuto

ZoomAuto

FuncOn

FuncOn

Xdot

Xdot

ClrMat

ClrMat

SimulOn

SimulOn

AxesOn

AxesOn

DrawDistNorm

DrawDistNorm

CoordOn

CoordOn

DrawDistT

DrawDistT

RightXdot

8-64

R-Xdot

ColorNormal

ERROR

ERROR

BLANK

BLANK

ColorClr

ColorClr

ColorLinkX&Freq

ColorLinkX&Freq

NormPD(

NormPD(

NormCD(

NormCD(

InvNormCD(

InvNormCD(

tPD(

tPD(

tCD(

tCD(

InvTCD(

InvTCD(

ChiPD(

ChiPD(

ChiCD(

ChiCD(

InvChiCD(

InvChiCD(

FPD(

FPD(

FCD(

FCD(

InvFCD(

InvFCD(

BinomialPD(

BinomialPD(

BinomialCD(

BinomialCD(

InvBinomialCD(

InvBinomialCD(

PoissonPD(

PoissonPD(

PoissonCD(

PoissonCD(

InvPoissonCD(

InvPoissonCD(

GeoPD(

GeoPD(

Command
GeoCD(

Text

Command

GeoCD(

Text
xInv

xInv

InvGeoCD(

InvGeoCD(

HypergeoPD(

HypergeoPD(

S-L-Thin

HypergeoCD(

HypergeoCD(

ThinG

InvHypergeoCD(

InvHypergeoCD(

SketchThin

SketchThin

S-L-Thin
ThinG

zLow

zLow

SetG-Color

SetG-Color

zUp

zUp

Plot/Line-Color

Plot/Line-Color

tLow

tLow

tUp

tUp

AxesScale

AxesScale

Black

Black

Magenta

Magenta

Cyan

Cyan

Yellow

Yellow

On Version OS 1.01,
following commands are
converted as follows.
Command
Text

Smpl_SI(

Smpl_SI(

Smpl_SFV(

Smpl_SFV(

!

!!

Cmpd_n(

Cmpd_n(

2

^2

Cmpd_I%(

Cmpd_I%(

–1

^-1

Cmpd_PV(

Cmpd_PV(

an

an

Cmpd_PMT(

Cmpd_PMT(

bn

bn

Cmpd_FV(

Cmpd_FV(

[K]

[K]

Cash_NPV(

Cash_NPV(

[N]

[N]

Cash_IRR(

Cash_IRR(

[L]

[L]

Cash_PBP(

Cash_PBP(

[A]

[A]

Cash_NFV(

Cash_NFV(

[AU]

[AU]

Amt_BAL(

Amt_BAL(

[W]

[W]

Amt_INT(

Amt_INT(

[J]

[J]

Amt_PRN(

Amt_PRN(

cn

cn

Amt_ΣINT(

Amt_SigmaINT(

E

^E

Amt_ΣPRN(

Amt_SigmaPRN(

-

--

Cnvt_EFF(

Cnvt_EFF(

r

Gamma

Cnvt_APR(

Cnvt_APR(

Cost(

Cost(

Sell(

Sell(

Margin(

Margin(

PmtEnd

PmtEnd

PmtBgn

PmtBgn

Bond_PRC(

Bond_PRC(

Bond_YLD(

Bond_YLD(

DateMode365

DateMode365

DateMode360

DateMode360

PeriodsAnnual

PeriodsAnnual

PeriodsSemi

PeriodsSemi

Days_Prd(

Days_Prd(

OneSampleZTest

OneSampleZTest

TwoSampleZTest

TwoSampleZTest

OnePropZTest

OnePropZTest

TwoPropZTest

TwoPropZTest

OneSampleTTest

OneSampleTTest

TwoSampleTTest

TwoSampleTTest

LinRegTTest

LinRegTTest

ChiGOFTest

ChiGOFTest

ChiTest

ChiTest

TwoSampleFTest

TwoSampleFTest

OneWayANOVA

OneWayANOVA

TwoWayANOVA

TwoWayANOVA

x1InvN

x1InvN

x2InvN

x2InvN

8-65

9. Program Library
• Be sure to check how many bytes of unused memory are remaining before attempting to
perform any programming.

Program Name

Prime Factorization

Description
This program continually divides a natural number by factors until all its prime factors are
produced.
Purpose
This program accepts input of natural number A, and divides it by B (2, 3, 5, 7....) to find the
prime factors of A.
• If a division operation does not produce a remainder, the result of the operation is assigned
to A.
• The above procedure is repeated until B > A.
Example

462 = 2 × 3 × 7 × 11

egcw

w

ww

w

8-66

Program Name

Ellipse

Description
This program displays a number table of the following values based on input of the foci of an
ellipse, the sum of the distance between the loci and foci, and the pitch (step size) of X.
Y1: Coordinate values of upper half of ellipse
Y2: Coordinate values of lower half of ellipse
Y3: Distances between right focus and loci
Y4: Distances between left focus and loci
Y5: Sum of Y3 and Y4
Next, the program plots the foci and values in Y1 and Y2.
Purpose
This program shows that the sums of the distances between the loci and two foci of an ellipse
are equal.

dw

baw

bw

w

8-67

Chapter 9 Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet application provides you with powerful, take-along-anywhere spreadsheet
capabilities.
All of the operations in this section are performed in the Spreadsheet mode.

Note
A Memory ERROR may occur during a Spreadsheet mode operation if main memory capacity
is low. If this happens, delete some input data or Memory mode data in order to increase
available free space.

1. Spreadsheet Basics and the Function Menu
Selecting Spreadsheet on the Main Menu will display a spreadsheet screen. Entering the
Spreadsheet mode automatically creates a new spreadsheet file named “SHEET”.
The spreadsheet screen shows a number of cells (squares) and the data contained in each
cell.
File name
Shows as many characters
as possible of the file name.

Column letters (A to Z)

Row numbers
(1 to 999)

Cell cursor

Edit box
Shows the contents of the cell where the cell
cursor is currently located. When multiple
cells are selected, the edit box indicates the
selected cell range.

Function menu

You can enter the following types of data into a cell.
Constants

A constant is something whose value is fixed as soon as you finalize its input. A
constant can be either a numeric value, or a calculation formula (such as 7+3,
sin30, A1×2, etc.) that does not have an equal sign (=) in front of it.

Text

A character string that starts with a quote mark (") is treated as text.

Formula

A formula that starts out with an equal sign (=), such as =A1×2, is executed as it
is written.

Note that complex numbers are not supported in the Spreadsheet mode.

9-1

9

Note
Though the maximum file size that can be handled by the Spreadsheet mode is 30KB, the
maximum size can be modified by changing the data type or conditional formatting. Also note
that the maximum file size changes in accordance with the amount of main memory available.
The following are examples of two conditions that would exceed the maximum file size.
(1) Inputting numeric value data into cells A1 through A999, B1 through B999, and C1 through
C520.
• In this case, the Spreadsheet strip in the eActivity mode will show up to cells A1 through
A999, B1 through B80.
(2) No data input, assigning the conditional formatting to cells A1 through A999 and B1
through B430.
Type: Expression
Expre: B1=2 A1^3+3 A1^2+4 A1+5
• In this case, the Spreadsheet strip in the eActivity mode will show up to cells A1 through
A999 and B1 through B410.

k Spreadsheet Screen Function Menu
• {FILE} ... Displays the following FILE submenu.
• {NEW}/{OPEN}/{SAVE • AS}/{RECALCS}/{CSV}
• {EDIT} ... Displays the following EDIT submenu.
• {CUT}/{PASTE}/{COPY}/{CELL}/{JUMP}/{SEQ}/{FILL}/{SORTASC}/{SORTDES}
• PASTE is displayed only immediately after CUT or COPY is executed.
• {DELETE} ... Displays the following DELETE submenu.
• {ROW}/{COLUMN}/{ALL}
• {INSERT} ... Displays the following INSERT submenu.
• {ROW}/{COLUMN}
• {CLEAR} ... Displays the following CLEAR submenu.
• {CONTENT}/{FORMAT}/{ALL}
• {GRAPH} ... Displays the following GRAPH menu. (Same as in the Statistics mode.)
• {GRAPH1}/{GRAPH2}/{GRAPH3}/{SELECT}/{SET}
• {CALC} ... Displays the following CALC (statistical calculation) menu. (Same as in the
Statistics mode.)
• {1-VAR}/{2-VAR}/{REG}/{SET}
• {STORE} ... Displays the following STORE submenu.
• {VAR}/{LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}
• {RECALL} ... Displays the following RECALL submenu.
• {LIST}/{FILE}/{MAT}
• {CONDIT} ... Displays the conditional formatting setting screen.
• {COND1}/{COND2} ... Displays the {Condition1}/{Condition2} screens.

9-2

Data Entry Function Menu
• {GRAB} ... Enters the GRAB mode for entering a cell reference name.
• {$} ... Inputs the cell absolute reference command ($).
• {:} ... Inputs the cell range specification command (:).
• {If} ... Inputs the CellIf( command.
• {CELL} ... Displays a submenu for inputting the following commands.
• CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian(, CellSum(, CellProd(
• {RELATNL} ... Displays a submenu for inputting the following relational operators.
• =, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤

2. Basic Spreadsheet Operations
This section explains spreadsheet file operations, how to move the cursor and select one or
more cells, and how to enter and edit data.

k Spreadsheet File Operations
u To create a new file
1. Press 1(FILE)1(NEW).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter up to eight characters for the file name, and then
press w.
• This will create a new file and display a blank spreadsheet.
• A new file will not be created it there is already a file with the same file name you enter in
step 2. Instead, the existing file will be opened.

u To open a file
1. Press 1(FILE)2(OPEN).
2. On the file list that appears, use f and c to select the file you want and then press w.

u Auto Save
In the Spreadsheet mode, Auto Save saves the currently open file automatically whenever
you edit it. This means you do not need to perform any manual save operation.

u To save a file under a new name
1. Press 1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter up to eight characters for the new file name, and then
press w.
• If a file already exists with the same file name you enter in step 2, a message will appear
asking if you want to replace the existing file with the new one. Press 1(Yes) to replace
the existing file, or 6(No) to cancel the save operation and return to the file name input
dialog box in step 2.

9-3

u To delete a file
1. Press 1(FILE)2(OPEN).
2. On the file list that appears, use f and c to select the file you want to delete and then
press 1(DELETE).
3. This causes a confirmation message to appear. Press 1(Yes) to delete the file, or 6(No)
to cancel without deleting anything.
4. To return to the spreadsheet from the file list, press J.
• Deleting the currently open file will automatically create a new file named “SHEET” and
display its spreadsheet.

k Transferring Data between a Spreadsheet and CSV Files
You can import the contents of a CSV file stored with this calculator or transferred from a
computer into a spreadsheet. You also can save the contents of a spreadsheet as a CSV file.

u To import the contents of a CSV file to a spreadsheet
1. Prepare the CSV file you want to import.
• See “Import CSV File Requirements” (page 3-18).
2. Press 1(FILE)5(CSV)1(LOAD).
• Pressing w in the next step will overwrite all of the data on the spreadsheet with the CSV
file data.
3. On the select file dialog box that appears, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
file you want to import and then press w.
• This imports the contents of the CSV file you specified to the spreadsheet.

Important!
• All blank data in the CSV file is imported as a blank cell.
• An error occurs if a CSV file contains even a single text string data item.
• If the CSV file includes data that cannot be converted, an error message will appear showing
the location in the CSV file (Example: row 2, column 3) where the data that cannot be
converted is located.
• Attempting to import a CSV file that has more than 26 columns or 999 rows will cause an
“Invalid Data Size” error.

u To save spreadsheet contents as a CSV file
1. If required, press 1(FILE)4(RECALCS) to recalculate the spreadsheet contents.
• Note that recalculation is not performed automatically when you save spreadsheet
contents to a CSV file. Be sure to perform recalculation if the spreadsheet contains a
formula, which starts with an equals symbol (=). See “Inputting a Formula into a Cell”
(page 9-10) for more information.
• Formulas are not saved to the CSV file. Only calculation results are saved.
• All ERROR cell data on the spreadsheet is saved as blank data.

9-4

2. Press 1(FILE)5(CSV)2(SAVE • AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
3. Select the folder where you want to save the CSV file.
• To store the CSV file in the root directory, highlight “Root”.
• To store the CSV file in a folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
5. Input up to eight characters for the file name and then press w.
• For information about how certain types of data is converted when being saved to a CSV
file, see the “Important!” note under “To save matrix contents as a CSV file” (page 2-47).

u To specify the CSV file delimiter symbol and decimal point
Press 1(FILE)5(CSV)3(SET) to display the CSV format setting screen. Next, perform the
procedure from step 3 under “Specifying the CSV File Delimiter Symbol and Decimal Point”
(page 3-20).

k Recalculating All of the Formulas in the Currently Open Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet mode has an Auto Calc features that automatically recalculates all of the
formulas in a spreadsheet whenever you open it or perform any editing operation. Auto Calc is
enabled under initial factory default settings. You also can execute a recalculation manually, if
you want.

Note
Stopping a recalculation part way through does not return spreadsheet contents to what
they were before the recalculation was started. The spreadsheet will show the results of the
recalculation up the point it was stopped.

u Auto Calc
Auto Calc is an Spreadsheet mode Setup item (page 1-35).
When Auto Calc is enabled (On), all of the formulas in a spreadsheet are recalculated when
the spreadsheet is opened or when any editing operation is performed. It should be noted,
however, that recalculation can slow down the overall processing speed. When Auto Calc is
disabled (Off), you need to execute recalculation manually as required.

u To execute spreadsheet re-calculation manually
Press 1(FILE)4(RECALCS). This recalculates all of the formulas in the currently open file
and displays the applicable results.

9-5

k Using the Cell Cursor
The cell cursor shows the cell that is selected on a spreadsheet. The highlighted cell is the one
that is currently selected by the cell cursor.

Cell cursor

Edit box

When a single cell is selected by the cell cursor, the contents of that cell are displayed in the
edit box. The cell contents can be edited in the edit box.
When a multiple cells are selected by the cell cursor, the selection range is displayed in the
edit box. In this case, you can copy, delete, or perform other cell operations on the entire range
of selected cells.

u To select cells
To select this:

Do this:

A single cell

Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to the cell
you want, or use the JUMP comment to jump directly
to the cell.

A range of cells

See “To select a range of cells” (page 9-7).

An entire row of cells

Move the cell cursor to column A of the row whose
cells you want to select and then press d. Pressing
d while the cell cursor is located at cell A2, for
example, will select the entire second row (from A2 to
Z2). This will cause A2:Z2 (which indicates the selected
range) to appear in the edit box.

An entire column of cells

Move the cell cursor to row 1 of the column whose cells
you want to select and then press f. Pressing f
while the cell cursor is located at cell C1, for example,
will select the entire column C (from C1 to C999).
This will cause C1:C999 (which indicates the selected
range) to appear in the edit box.

All of the cells in the spreadsheet

Press d while the entire column A is selected or
press f while the entire row 1 is selected. This will
select all of the cells in the spreadsheet and display the
spreadsheet file name in the edit box.

9-6

u Using the JUMP Command to Move the Cell Cursor
To move the cell cursor to here:

Do this:

A particular cell

1. Press 2(EDIT)4(JUMP)1(GO).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter the name
of the cell (A1 to Z999) to which you want to
jump.
3. Press w.

Line 1 of the current column

Press 2(EDIT)4(JUMP)2(TOP↑).

Column A of the current row

Press 2(EDIT)4(JUMP)3(TOP←).

Last line of the current column

Press 2(EDIT)4(JUMP)4(BTM↓).

Column Z of the current row

Press 2(EDIT)4(JUMP)5(BTM→).

u To select a range of cells
1. Move the cell cursor to the start point of the range of cells you want to select.
• You could select and entire row or column of cells as the start point, if you want. For details
about selecting cells, see “To select cells” on page 9-6.
2. Press !i(CLIP).
• This will change the cell cursor to a thick-line boundary instead of the normal highlighting.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to the end
point of the range of cells you want to select.
• The edit box will show the range of the selected cells.
• To cancel cell selection, press J. If you do, the cell
cursor will be located at the end point of the range you
selected.

9-7

k Data (Constants, Text, Formula) Input Basics
First let’s have a look at a few basic procedures that apply regardless of the type of data you
are inputting.

u To overwrite data currently in a cell with new data
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell where you want to input data.
• If the cell you select already contains data, the following step will overwrite the existing
data with new input.
2. Use the calculator’s keys to input data.
• As you perform key operations to input values or text
(such as b, al(B), etc.), the applicable figures
will appear aligned left inside the edit box.
• To cancel an input operation part way through at any
point before advancing to step 3 below, press J. This
will return the cell contents to what they were in step 1
of this procedure.
3. To finalize and apply your input, press w.

u To edit cell data
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell whose contents you want to edit.
2. Press 2(EDIT)3(CELL).
• Cell contents in the edit box will change from align right
to align left. A text cursor will appear in the edit box so
you can edit its contents.

3. Use e and d to move the cursor around the contents of the cell, and edit them as
required.
• To cancel an edit operation part way through at any point before advancing to step 4
below, press J. This will return the cell contents to what they were in step 1 of this
procedure.
4. To finalize and apply your edits, press w.

u To move the cell cursor while inputting data into a cell
Under factory default settings, pressing w while inputting data into a cell will cause the cell
cursor to move to the next line. You can specify movement to the next column instead using the
“Move” setting as described on page 1-35.

9-8

k Inputting a Constant (Value, Calculation Result, Number Sequence) into
a Cell
A constant is something whose value is fixed as soon as you finalize its input. A constant can
be either a numeric value, or a calculation formula (such as 7+3, sin30, A1×2, etc.) that does
not have an equal sign (=) in front of it. Inputting sdaw, for example will cause the
value 0.5 (the calculation result) to appear in the cell (when Deg is selected as the Angle unit).

u To input a number sequence automatically based on a function expression
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell where you want number sequence input to start.
• Under initial default settings, automatic input of the number sequence will proceed
downwards from the start cell. You can specify a different direction using the “Move” setting
as described on page 1-35.
2. Press 2(EDIT)5(SEQ) to display the Sequence screen, and then specify the function
expression and values required to generate the required number sequence.

You can input data for the item that is highlighted on
the screen.
Reference name of the cell selected in step 1

Item

Description

Expr

Input the function expression f(x) for generating the number sequence.
Example: a+(X)x+bw (X2 + 1)

Var

Input the variable name used in the function expression input for Expr.
Example: a+(X)w (X)

Start

Input the starting value (X1) of the value to be substituted for the variable
specified by Var.
Example: cw

End

Input the ending value (Xn) of the value to be substituted for the variable
specified by Var.
Example: baw

Incre

Input the increment value (m) for successive value of X1, as in: (X2 = X1 + m),
(X3 = X2 + m), and so on. The number sequence is generated in the range of
X1 + (n – 1) m < Xn.
Example: cw

9-9

Item
1st Cell

Description
Input the reference name (A1, B2, etc.) of the cell where you want the first
value of the number sequence to be input. Specify a cell here only if the
starting cell is different from the one you specified in step 1 of this procedure.
Example: al(B)bw (B1)

• Each time you press w after inputting data for a setting item, the highlighting will move to
the next setting item. You also can use f and c to move the highlighting upwards and
downwards as required.
• Performing the next step will input the number string automatically starting from the
specified cell. If any cell that is within the range of cells where the number sequence
values will be input already contains data, the existing data will be replaced with the
number sequence values.
3. After inputting data for all the setting items, press 6(EXE) or the w key to start number
sequence generation and input.

→

k Inputting Text into a Cell
To input text, make sure the first thing you input into the cell is aE(”). The quote mark (")
tells the calculator that what follows is text, and should be displayed as-is without calculation.
The quote mark (") is not displayed as part of the text.

k Inputting a Formula into a Cell
For the sake of example, let’s try making a table that contains data based on the formula
 ×  = . To do this, we would put  values in column
A,  values in column B, and calculation formulas (like = A1 × B1, = A2 × B2, and
so on) in column C. If the Auto Calc feature is enabled (On), the values in column C would be
recalculated and updated any time we change the values in column A or B.
In this example, note that we must start out the data in column C with the equal sign (=) in
order to indicate it is a formula. In addition to values, arithmetic operators, and cell reference
names, a formula also can contain built-in function commands (page 2-14) and special
Spreadsheet mode commands (page 9-19).

9-10

u Formula Input Example
A
1

B

PRICE

C

QUANTITY

TOTAL

2

35

15

525

3

52

15

780

4

78

20

1560

Procedure
1. Input the text for line 1, and the applicable values in cells A2 through B4.
2. Move the cursor to cell C2, and input the formula for A2 × B2.
!.(=)av(A)c*al(B)cw
3. Copy the formula in cell C2 and copy it into cells C3 and C4. Move the cell cursor to cell C2
and then perform the following operation.
2(EDIT)2(COPY)c1(PASTE)c1(PASTE)J
• For details about the copy and paste operations, see
“Copying and Pasting Cell Contents” (page 9-14).

k Inputting a Cell Reference Name
Each cell on a spreadsheet has what is called a “reference name”, which is derived by
combining its column name (A through Z) with its row name (1 through 999). A cell reference
name can be used inside of a formula, which makes the value of the called cell part of the
formula. See “Inputting a Formula into a Cell” above for more information. There are two
methods you can use to input a cell reference name: direct input of the name and input using
the GRAB command. The following illustrates how you would use each of these methods to
input =A1+5 into cell B1.

u To input a cell reference name using direct input
Move the cell cursor to cell B1 and then perform the following operation.
!.(=)av(A)b+fw

9-11

u To input a cell reference name using the GRAB command
Move the cell cursor to cell B1 and then perform the following operation.
!.(=)1(GRAB)d1(SET)+fw
• Commands 2(GO) through 6(BTM→) on the submenu that appears when you press
1(GRAB) are identical to commands 1(GO) through 5(BTM→) of the JUMP command
submenu. See “Using the JUMP Command to Move the Cell Cursor” on page 9-7 about
these commands.

k Relative and Absolute Cell Reference Names
There are two types of cell reference names: relative and absolute. Normally, cell reference
names are treated as being relative.
Relative Cell Reference Names
In the formula =A1+5, the cell reference name A1 indicates a relative cell reference. It is
“relative” because copying the formula and pasting in a different cell will cause the cell
reference name to change in accordance with the location of cell where it is pasted. If the
formula =A1+5 is originally located in cell B1, for example, copying at pasting in cell C3 will
result in =B3+5 in cell C3. Moving from column B to column C (one column) causes A to
change to B, while moving from row 1 to row 3 changes (two rows) changes the 1 to 3.
Important! If the result of a copy and paste operation causes a relative cell reference name
to change to something that is outside the range of the spreadsheet cells, the applicable
column letter and/or row number will be replaced by a question mark (?), and “ERROR” will be
displayed as the cell’s data.
Absolute Reference Names
If you want the row or the column, or both the row and the column parts of a cell reference
name to remain the same to matter where you paste them, you need to create an absolute cell
reference name. You do this by affixing a dollar sign ($) in front of the part of the cell reference
name you want to remain unchanged. You have three options when using the dollar sign ($)
to create an absolute cell reference name: absolute column with relative row ($A1), relative
column with absolute row (A$1), and absolute row and column ($A$1).

u To input the absolute cell reference name symbol ($)
When inputting a cell reference into a spreadsheet cell, press 2($).
For example, the following key operation inputs the absolute cell reference name = $B$1.
!.(=)2($)al(B)2($)b

9-12

k Specifying Cell Formatting
For each cell, you can specify the text color, cell color, and cell color lightness (Normal or
Lighter).

u To specify cell formatting
1. Select the range of cells whose formatting you want to specify.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the FORMAT dialog
box.

3. Configure the above dialog box with the following settings.
To specify this:

Perform this operation:

Specify the text color

Press b(Char Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.

Specify the cell color

Press c(Area Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.

Specify the lightness of the
cell color

Press d(Paint Style) and then press b(Normal) or
c(Lighter).

4. To apply the settings you configure, return to the
FORMAT dialog box and then press J.

9-13

k Copying and Pasting Cell Contents
You can copy the contents of one or more cells and paste them into another location. Once
you perform the copy operation, you can copy the contents to multiple locations, if you want.

u To copy and paste spreadsheet data
1. Select the cell(s) you want to copy.
• See “To select cells” (page 9-6) for more information.
2. Press 2(EDIT)2(COPY).
• This will go into paste standby for the selected data, indicated by the 1 menu item
changing to (PASTE).
• You can exit the paste standby at any time before you perform step 4 below by pressing
J.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to location where you want to paste the data.
• If you selected a range of cells in step 1, the cell you select with the cell cursor will be the
upper left cell of the paste range.
• If the location you select is within the range that you copied, performing step below will
cause the exiting data to be overwritten with the pasted data.
4. Press 1(PASTE).
• This will paste the copied data.
• To paste the same data in other locations, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. After you are finish pasting the data, press J to exit paste standby.

k Cutting and Pasting Cell Contents
You can use cut and paste to move the contents of one or more cells to another location. Cell
contents (regardless of whether it includes relative or absolute cell name references) generally
are unchanged by a cut and paste operation.

→

Cutting the formula =A1+5 in cell B1 and pasting it into cell B2. The A1 reference name is
unchanged.

9-14

When you are cut and paste a range cells, reference names that affect relationships within
the range are changed accordingly when the range is pasted in order to maintain the correct
relationship, regardless of whether they are relative or absolute reference names.

→

Cutting the B1:C1 range of cells that includes the formula =B1+5 and pasting it into B2:C2.
The formula pasted into C2 is changed to =B2+5 in order to maintain the relationship with
the cell to the left, which was also part of the pasted range.

u To cut and paste spreadsheet data
1. Select the cell(s) you want to cut.
• See “To select cells” (page 9-6) for more information.
2. Press 2(EDIT)1(CUT).
• This will go into paste standby for the selected data, indicated by the 1 menu item
changing to (PASTE).
• You can exit the paste standby at any time before you perform step 4 below by pressing
J.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to location where you want to paste the data.
• If you selected a range of cells in step 1, the cell you select with the cell cursor will be the
upper left cell of the paste range.
• If the location you select is within the range that you cut, performing step below will cause
the exiting data to be overwritten with the pasted data.
4. Press 1(PASTE).
• This will paste the data from the cell(s) you selected in step 1 and paste it into the location
you selected in step 3.
• Regardless of whether Auto Calc is enabled or disabled (page 9-5), pasting cut data will
cause all of the formulas in the spreadsheet to be recalculated.

9-15

k Inputting the Same Formula into a Range of Cells
Use the Fill command when you want to input the same formula into a specified range of cells.
The rules governing relative and absolute cell name references are the same as those for copy
and paste.
When you need to input the same formula into cells B1, B2, and B3, for example, the Fill
command lets you do so by inputting the formula once, into cell B1. Note the following about
how the Fill command handles cell name references in this case.
When cell B1 contains this:

The Fill command will do this:

=A1×2

A

B

1

=A1×2

2

=A2×2

3

=A3×2

=$A$2×2

A

B

1

=$A$2×2

2

=$A$2×2

3

=$A$2×2

* Note that in actual practice
cells B1, B2, and B3
will show the calculation
results, not the formulas as
shown here.

u To input the same formula into a range of cells
1. Select the range of cells into which you want to input the same formula.
• In this example we will assume the B1:B3 is selected. See “To select a range of cells”
(page 9-7).
2. Press 2(EDIT)6(g)1(FILL).
3. On the Fill screen that appears, enter the formula you want to input.
You can input data for the item that is
highlighted on the screen.

This is the range of cells you selected in step 1.
• In the “Formula” line, input =A1×2 (!.(=)av(A)b*cw). Pressing w will
cause the cell cursor to move to the “Cell Range” line.
• If any cell within the cell range already contains data, performing the next step will cause
the existing data to be overwritten with the new fill data (formula).
4. Press 6(EXE) or the w key.
• This will input the formula into the range of cells you specified.

9-16

k Sorting Constant Data
Note that only constant data can be sorted. You can select multiple columns within a single line
or multiple lines within a single column for sorting.

u To sort constant data
1. Select a range of column cells in a single row or a range of row cells in a single column.
• See “To select a range of cells” (page 9-7).
• A Syntax ERROR message will appear if any of the cells in the range you select contain
data other than constant data.
2. Depending on the type of sort you want to perform, perform either one of the following
operations.
To sort ascending: 2(EDIT)6(g)2(SORTASC)
To sort descending: 2(EDIT)6(g)3(SORTDES)

k Deleting and Inserting Cells
u To delete an entire line or column of cells
Select the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete and then press 3(DELETE). This will
delete the selected row(s) or column(s) immediately, without displaying a confirmation
message.
You also can perform the following steps to delete a row or column.
1. Select one or more cells inside the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete.
• If you want to delete lines 2 through 4, for example, you could select A2:B4, C2:C4, or any
other range of cells that includes the lines to be deleted.
• If you want to delete columns A and B, for example, you could select A1:B1, A2:B4, etc.
2. Press 3(DELETE).
• This enters delete standby. If you decide you want to cancel the delete operation at this
time, press J.
3. To delete the entire line(s) that include the cells you selected in step 1, press 1(ROW). To
delete the entire column, press 2(COLUMN).

u To delete the contents of all the cells in a spreadsheet
1. Press 3(DELETE)3(ALL).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the data or
6(No) to cancel without deleting anything.

9-17

u To insert a row or column of blank cells
1. Perform one of the following operations to specify the location of the insert and the number
of rows or columns to be inserted.
• To insert rows
Starting with the row immediately below of the row where you want the insert to be
performed, select the same number of rows that you want to insert.
Example: To insert three rows above row 2, you could select A2:A4, B2:C4, etc.
• To insert columns
Starting with the column immediately to the right of the column where you want the insert
to be performed, select the same number of columns that you want to insert.
Example: To insert three columns to the left of column B, you could select B2:D4,
B10:D20, etc.
2. Press 4(INSERT).
• This will enter insert standby. If you decide you want to cancel the insert operation at this
time, press J.
3. Press 1(ROW) to insert the applicable number of rows or 2(COLUMN) to insert
columns.
• A Range ERROR occurs if an insert operation causes existing cells that contain data to
move outside the range of A1:Z999.

k Clearing Cell Contents and Formatting
You can clear cell contents only, formatting only, or both contents and formatting.
• Content clear: Clears values, formulas, and other cell data.
• Format clear: Returns the character color, area color, and paint style settings of the cells to
their initial default settings. This operation also clears conditional formatting (page 9-21).

u To clear cell contents and formatting
1. Select the cell or range of cells you want to clear.
2. Perform the operations below to specify the cells you want to clear.
To clear this:

Perform this key operation:

Cell contents only

5(CLEAR)1(CONTENT)

Cell formatting only

5(CLEAR)2(FORMAT)

Cell contents and formatting

5(CLEAR)3(ALL)

9-18

3. Using Special Spreadsheet Mode Commands
The Spreadsheet mode has a number of special commands like CellSum(, which returns
the sum of a range of cells, and CellIf(, which specifies branching conditions. These special
commands can be used inside of formulas.

k Special Spreadsheet Mode Command List
“Input Key Operation” operations can be performed during cell input only.
You can omit anything enclosed in brackets ([ ]) in the Syntax of each command.
Command

Description

CellIf(
(Branch Condition)

Returns Expression 1 when the equality or inequality provided as
the branch condition is true, and Expression 2 when it is false.
Input Key Operation: 4(If)
Syntax: CellIf(equality, expression 1, expression 2[)] or
CellIf(inequality, expression 1, expression 2[)]
Example: =CellIf(A1>B1, A1, B1)
Returns the value of A1 when {Cell A1 value} > {Cell B1 value}.
Otherwise, returns the value of B1.

CellMin(
(Cell Minimum Value)

Returns the minimum value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL)1(Min)
Syntax: CellMin(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMin(A3:C5)
Returns the minimum value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellMax(
(Cell Maximum Value)

Returns the maximum value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL)2(Max)
Syntax: CellMax(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMax(A3:C5)
Returns the maximum value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellMean(
(Mean of Cells)

Returns the mean value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL)3(Mean)
Syntax: CellMean(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMean(A3:C5)
Returns the mean value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

9-19

Command

Description

CellMedian(
(Median of Cells)

Returns the median value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL)4(Med)
Syntax: CellMedian(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMedian(A3:C5)
Returns the median value of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellSum(
(Sum of Cells)

Returns the sum of the data in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL)5(Sum)
Syntax: CellSum(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellSum(A3:C5)
Returns the sum of the data in cell range A3:C5.

CellProd(
(Product of Cells)

Returns the product of the data in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL)6(Prod)
Syntax: CellProd(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellProd(B3:B5)
Returns the product of the data in cell range B3:B5.

k Spreadsheet Mode Command Example
This example inputs the special Spreadsheet mode formula CellSum( into cell C1 in order to
calculate the sum of all the data in cell range A1:B5. It is assumed that there is already data in
the cell range A1:B5.
1. Move the cell cursor to cell C1 and then perform the following operation.
!.(=)5(CELL)5(Sum)
Jav(A)b3(:)al(b)f)
• You can perform the following operation, which uses the
GRAB function (page 9-12) and CLIP function (page
9-7) in place of the underlined part in the above
operation.
J1(GRAB)4(TOP←)

(Enters the GRAB mode and moves the cursor to A1.)

!i(CLIP)ecccc

(Specifies the selection range for the CLIP function.)

w)
2. Press w to finalize input of the formula.

9-20

4. Conditional Formatting
The conditional formatting function can be used to define conditional expressions (such as
A1<0) that determine the formatting (text color, area color, paint style) of a cell.

k Conditional Formatting Overview
You can specify up to two conditions for each cell.
Pressing 6(g)5(CONDIT) displays the Condition screen.

To select a particular condition, move the highlighting to the “Condition” line and then press
1(COND1) for Condition1 or 2(COND2) for Condition2.

u Condition Priority Sequence
When you have multiple conditions defined for a cell, they are applied starting from the lower
numbered condition first. If Condition1 is 0≤A1≤10 and Condition2 is 10≤A1≤20, for example,
both conditions are satisfied when A1=10 and the formatting specified by Condition1 is
applied.
If a cell is configured directly using the procedure under “To specify cell formatting” (page 9-13)
and with conditional formatting, application of the conditional formatting is given priority over
the direct settings.

u Condition Types
There are two different condition types: Value Of Cell and Expression.

• Type: Value Of Cell
Use this condition type to define a condition based on a formula (such as A1<0) that
references a value input into the cell. For example you could configure cell A1 so its text is red
when A1<0, and blue when 1100, A1 text is blue.
• When CellSum(B1:B30)≤A1, A1 text is blue, and when A1, etc.).  stands for a single cell
reference (such as A1).
=ERROR, =BLANK, ≠ERROR, ≠BLANK, =,
≠

u To delete conditional formatting settings
1. Select the cell or range of cells whose conditional formatting you want to delete.
• Performing step 2 below will immediately clear, without any confirmation message, both
the conditional formatting as well as any character color, area color, and paint style
settings configured for the selected cell(s).
2. Press 5(CLEAR)2(FORMAT).

k Conditional Formatting Setting Example
In this example we will show how to configure the range of cells B3:C4 with the conditional
formatting shown below. This procedure assumes that the cells already contain values.

Condition

This formatting is applied:

When the value input in
the cell (=C) satisfies this
condition:

Character
Color

Area Color

Paint Style

1

C<0

Red

Yellow

Normal

2

0≤C≤100

Blue

Magenta

Lighter

9-25

u Procedure
1. Select the range of cells B3:C4.

2. Press 6(g)5(CONDIT) to display the Condition screen.
• Condition1 appears first, so configure the first condition here.
3. Use c to move the highlighting to “Expre” (Expression) and then press 6(g)1(C<䊐).
• Initially, “Cell < Value” is displayed in the Expre line.
4. Use c to move the highlighting to “Value” and then press aw to input 0.
5. Use c to move the highlighting to “Format” and then press 1(SETFORM).
• On the FORMAT dialog box that appears, configure the following settings:
Character Color: Red, Area Color: Yellow, Paint Style: Normal.
6. Use f to move the highlighting to “Condition1” and then press 2(COND2) to display
Condition2.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 5 above to configure the Condition2 settings.
• Input 1(䊐≤C≤䉭) in the “Expre” line, aw in the “V1” line, and baaw in the
“V2” line.
• In the “Format” line, press 1(SETFORM) and then configure the following settings:
Character Color: Blue, Area Color: Magenta, Paint Style: Lighter.
8 Press J.
• This returns to the screen in step 1 of this procedure
and applies the formatting you configured to each cell.

Note
• It may take some time to display calculation results when a large number of cells containing
conditional formatting are selected.
• Cell modification and recalculation may take some time to complete when there is a large
amount of conditional formatting.

9-26

5. Drawing Statistical Graphs, and Performing
Statistical and Regression Calculations
When you want to check the correlation between two sets of data (such as temperature and
the price of some product), trends become easier to spot if you draw a graph that uses one set
of data as the x-axis and the other set of data as the y-axis.
With the spreadsheet you can input the values for each set of data and draw a scatter plot or
other types of graphs. Performing regression calculations on the data will produce a regression
formula and correlation coefficient, and you can overlay a regression graph over the scatter
plot.
Spreadsheet mode graphing, statistical calculations, and regression calculations use the
same functions as the Statistics mode. The following shows an operation example that is
unique to the Spreadsheet mode.

k Example of Statistical Graph Operations (GRAPH Menu)
Input the following data and draw a statistical graph (scatter plot in this example).
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2

(x-axis data)

–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4

(y-axis data)

u To input data and draw a statistical graph (scatter plot)
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet.
• Here we will input the x-axis data into column A, and the y-axis data into column B.
2. Select the range of cells you want to graph (A1:B5).

3. Press 6(g)1(GRAPH) to display the GRAPH menu, and then press 1(GRAPH1).
• This will produce a scatter plot of the data in the range
of cells you selected in step 2 of this procedure.
• The graph shown here is what is produced under initial
default Spreadsheet mode settings. You can change
the configuration of graph settings on the screen that
appears when you press 6(SET) on the GRAPH
menu. For details see “General Graph Settings Screen
Operations” below.

9-27

k General Graph Settings Screen Operations
You can use the general graph setting screen to specify the range of data to be used for
graphing, and to select the type of graph to be drawn.

u To configure statistical graph settings
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet and then select the range of cells
you want to graph.
• Actually, the above step is not necessary at this point. You also could configure settings
first before inputting data and selecting the range of cells to be graphed.
2. Press 6(g)1(GRAPH)6(SET).
• This will display the general graph settings screen (StatGraph1 in this example).
You can configure the setting for the item that is
highlighted on the screen.

A function menu will appear when certain
setting items are selected.
• The number of columns you select in step 1 will determine what information is input
automatically on the general graph settings screen.
If you select this
number of columns:

This information will be input automatically:

1

XCellRange

2

XCellRange, YCellRange

3

XCellRange, YCellRange, Frequency

• The following describes each of the setting items for this screen.
Item

Description

StatGraph1

Select the name of the setup you want. You can have up to three
different setups registered, named StatGraph 1, 2, or 3.

Graph Type

Select the graph type. The initial default setting is Scatter (scatter plot).

XCellRange

Specifies the cell range assigned to the graph x-axis (XCellRange).
Only XCellRange is displayed for some Graph Types.

YCellRange

Specifies the cell range assigned to the graph y-axis (YCellRange).
The YCellRange is not displayed for some Graph Types.

9-28

Item

Description

Frequency

Specifies the range cells that contain values indicating the frequency
of each graph data item. Select 1(1) if you do not want to use
frequency values.

Mark Type

Specify the type of mark (,
scatter plot.

, or ) to use as the mark on the

3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the setting item you want to change. On the
function menu that appears, select the setting you want.
• For details about the StatGraph1, Graph Type, and Mark Type settings, see “To display the
general graph settings screen” (page 6-3).
• If you want to change the XCellRange, YCellRange, or Frequency setting, move the
highlighting to the item you want to change and then input the cell range directly, or select
1(CELL) (2(CELL) for Frequency) and then edit the currently input range. When
inputting a cell range manually, use 1(:) to enter a colon (:) between two cells that define
the range.
4. After configuring the required settings, press J or w.

k Example of Statistical Calculation Operation (CALC Menu)
This example uses the data from the “Drawing a Scatter Diagram and xy Line Graph” (page
6-14) to perform paired-variable statistical calculations.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2

(x-data)

–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4

(y-data)

u To perform paired-variable statistical calculations and regression
calculations
1. Input the above x-data into cells A1:A5 of the
spreadsheet and the y-data into cells B1:B5, and then
select the range of the cells where you input the data (A1:
B5).

2. Press 6(g)2(CALC) to display the CALC menu, and
then press 2(2-VAR).
• This will display a screen of paired variable calculation
results based on the data you selected in step 1. Use
c and f to scroll the result screen. To close the
screen, press J.
• For information about the meaning of each of the values on the result screen, see
“Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph” on page 6-21.
3. To return to the spreadsheet screen, press J.

9-29

k Using the Statistical Calculation Data Range Specification Screen
You can use a special setting screen to specify the range of data to be used for statistical
calculation.

u To specify the data range for statistical calculation
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet and then select its range of cells.
2. Press 6(g)2(CALC)6(SET).
• This will display a setting screen like the one shown to
the right.

• The number of columns you select in step 1 will determine what information is input
automatically on the statistical calculation data range specification screen.
If you select this
number of columns:

This information will be input automatically:

1

1Var XCell and 2Var XCell

2

1Var Freq and 2Var YCell

3

2Var Freq

• The following describes each of the setting items for this screen.
Item

Description

1Var XCell
1Var Freq

The cell range data specified here is used for variable x and
Frequency values when performing single-variable statistical
calculations.

2Var XCell
2Var YCell
2Var Freq

The cell range data specified here is used for variable x, variable y,
and Frequency values when performing paired-variable statistical
calculations.

3. If you want to change the cell range, use f and c to move the highlighting to the item
you want to change and the input the new cell range.
• To input the colon (:), press 1(:).
• To edit the currently input cell range, press 1(CELL) (in the case of 1Var XCell, 2Var
XCell, and 2Var YCell) or 2(CELL) (in the case of 1Var Freq and 2Var Freq).
4. After configuring the required settings, press J or w.

9-30

k Statistics Mode and Spreadsheet Mode Function Menu
Correspondence Table
In both the Statistics mode and the Spreadsheet mode, statistical graph functions are on
the GRAPH function menu and statistical/regression calculation functions are on the CALC
function menu. The structures of these menus and their submenus are the same in the
Statistics mode and the Spreadsheet mode. For details about each menu item, refer to the
pages referenced in the table below.
For information about
this menu item:

Refer to:

{GRAPH} - {GRAPH1}

“Statistical Graph Parameters” (page 6-1)

{GRAPH} - {GRAPH2}
{GRAPH} - {GRAPH3}
{GRAPH} - {SELECT}

“Graph Draw/Non-draw Status” (page 6-7)

{GRAPH} - {SET}

“Statistical Graph Parameters” (page 6-1)
“General Graph Settings”(page 6-2)
“To display the general graph settings screen”(page 6-3)
“General Graph Settings Screen Operations” (page 9-28)

{CALC} - {1-VAR}

“Single-Variable Statistical Calculations” (page 6-22)

{CALC} - {2-VAR}

“Paired-Variable Statistical Calculations” (page 6-23)

{CALC} - {REG}

“Regression Calculation” (page 6-23)

{CALC} - {SET}

“Using the Statistical Calculation Data Range Specification
Screen” (page 9-30)

9-31

When drawing a pie chart or bar graph, only the Color Link settings (page 6-3) are different
from the settings in the Statistics mode and Spreadsheet mode.
For this
graph
type:

Selecting
this for
Color Link:

Pie

Category

Of the data being used to draw the graph, the text color of the
cells in the range specified by the StatGraph screen “Category”
setting is reflected in the graph.

Data

Of the data being used to draw the graph, the text color of the
cells in the range specified by the StatGraph screen “Data” setting
is reflected in the graph.

Off

The text color of the data being used to draw the graph is ignored.

Category

Same as the pie chart, above.

Data

Of the data being used to draw the graph, the text colors of the
cells in the range specified by the StatGraph screen “Data1”,
“Data2”, and “Data3” settings are reflected in the graph.

Off

Same as the pie chart, above.

Bar

Causes this to happen:

• When “Pie” is selected as the Graph Type, the “Pie Area” setting is always “Link” whenever
anything other than “Off” is selected for the “Color Link” setting.
• When “Bar” is selected as the Graph Type, the “Data1 Area”, “Data1 Border”, “Data2 Area”,
“Data2 Border”, “Data3 Area”, and “Data3 Border” settings are always “Link” whenever
anything other than “Off” is selected for the “Color Link” setting.

u Graphing examples using Color Link
Example:

To input the data below into a spreadsheet and then draw a pie chart
with “Category” selected as the Color Link setting

1. Input the data shown nearby, with the text color of cells from A1 through A5 as shown.
• For information about specifying the text color, see “Specifying Cell Formatting” (page
9-13).
2. Select the cells in the range A1:B5.
• For information about selecting cells, see “To select a range of cells” (page 9-7).

9-32

3. Perform the following operation to display the general graph settings screen: 6(g)
1(GRAPH)6(SET).
• The “Category” and “Data” settings are configured automatically. Check to make sure that
A1:A5 is shown for “Category” and B1:B5 is shown for “Data”.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Graph Type” and then press 4(Pie).
5. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Color Link”
and then press 1(Cat).

6. Press J to exit the general graph settings screen.
7. Press 1(GRAPH1).
• The graph will reflect the text colors in the “Category”
cell range (A1:A5).

• This completes graphing with Color Link. Next, let’s change the colors on the graph
screen.
8. Press !1(TRACE).
• This will highlight label A and display a pointer in area A of the graph.
9. Use f and c to move the pointer to area D and then pres !f(FORMAT).
10. On the color selection dialog box that appears, press c(Blue).
• This will close the dialog box and change the color of
area D to blue.

11. Press J to close the graph screen.
• The color you change to on the graph screen will be
reflected as the text color in the applicable cell of the
“Category” cell range.

9-33

6. Spreadsheet Mode Memory
You can use the calculator’s different types of memory (variables, list memory, file memory,
matrix memory) to store data, and recall data from a memory into the spreadsheet.

k Saving Spreadsheet Data to a Memory
The following table shows an overview of the store operations for each type of memory. For
details about each operation, see the example operations following the table.
Memory Type

Store Operation

Variables
(A ~ Z, r, θ)

You can assign the content of a single cell to a variable.
While a single cell is selected, press 6(g)3(STORE)1(VAR),
and then specify the variable name on the screen that appears.

List Memory
(List 1 ~ List 26)

You can store data in a range of cells in a single row or a single
column in list memory.
While a range of cells in a single row or single column is selected,
press 6(g)3(STORE)2(LIST), and then specify the list
number on the screen that appears.

File Memory
(File 1 ~ File 6)

You can store data in a range of cells that spans a multiple rows
and columns in file memory. While a range of cells is selected, press
6(g)3(STORE)3(FILE), and then specify the file number on
the screen that appears.
The first column of the selected range is stored in the specified file
as List 1, the second column is saved as List 2, and so on.

Matrix Memory
(Mat A ~ Mat Z)

You can store data in a range of cells that spans a multiple rows and
columns in matrix memory. While a range of cells is selected, press
6(g)3(STORE)4(MAT), and then specify the matrix name on
the screen that appears.
The first column of the selected range is stored in the specified
matrix as List 1, the second column is saved as List 2, and so on.

Note
When spreadsheet data is saved to list memory or file memory, the text color information
of each cell is inherited by the destination memory. Text color information is ignored when
spreadsheet data is saved to a variable or to matrix memory.

Important!
The following describes what happens if you try to store data in memory when a cell does not
contain any data, when a cell contains text, or when ERROR is displayed for a cell.
• If you are assigning data to a variable, an error occurs.
• If you are storing data in list memory, file memory, or matrix memory, 0 is written into the
applicable cell(s).

9-34

u Example: To store column data in list memory
1. In a single column, select the range of cells you want to store in list memory.
• For example, you could select A1:A10.
2. Press 6(g)3(STORE)2(LIST).
• This will display a screen like the one shown to the right.
The “Cell Range” setting will show the range of cells you
selected in step 1.
3. Press c to move the highlighting to “List[1~26]”.
4. Input the List number (1 to 26) of the list memory where you want to store the data and then
press w.
• Performing the next step will overwrite any data currently stored under the list memory
number you specified here with the data in the range of cells specified by “CellRange”.
5. Press 6(EXE) or the w key to store the data.

k Recalling Data from Memory to a Spreadsheet
The following table shows an overview of the recall operations for each type of memory. For
details about each operation, see the example operations following the table.
Memory Type

Recall Operation

List Memory
(List 1 ~ List 26)

You can recall data from a specified list memory to a range of
cells in a single row or a single column. While the first cell of
the range in a single row or single column is selected, press
6(g)4(RECALL)1(LIST), and then specify the list number on
the screen that appears.
Whether the data is recalled in a column direction or row direction
depends on the Setup screen’s “Move” setting (page 1-35).

File Memory
(File 1 ~ File 6)

You can recall data from a specified file memory to the spreadsheet.
Select the cell you want to be the upper left corner of the recalled
data and then press 6(g)4(RECALL)2(FILE). Next, specify
the file memory number on the screen that appears.

Matrix Memory
(Mat A ~ Mat Z)

You can recall data from a specified matrix memory to the
spreadsheet. Select the cell you want to be the upper left corner
of the recalled data and then press 6(g)4(RECALL)3(MAT).
Next, specify the matrix name on the screen that appears.

9-35

Note
• When data is recalled to a spreadsheet from list memory or file memory, the text color
information of each element is inherited by the spreadsheet cells. The area color and paint
style colors of the destination cells are set to their initial defaults of the destination cells.
• When data is recalled to a spreadsheet from matrix memory, the text color, area color, and
paint style are set to the initial defaults of the destination cells.

u Example: To recall data from a matrix memory to a spreadsheet
1. On the spreadsheet, select the upper left cell of the range where you want the recalled data
to be input.
2. Press 6(g)4(RECALL)3(MAT).
• This will display a screen like the one shown to the right.
The “1st Cell” setting will show the name of the cell you
selected in step 1.
3. Input the name (A to Z) of the matrix memory whose data you want to recall and then press
w.
4. Press 6(EXE) or w to recall the data.

Important!
When recalling list memory, file memory, or matrix memory data, an error will occur if the
recalled data runs outside the allowable range of the spreadsheet (A1:Z999).

9-36

Chapter 10 eActivity
You can use the eActivity mode to input data into an eActivity file. You can input text, numeric
expressions and pictures, and also paste data (like graphs, tables, etc.) from the calculator’s
built-in applications as “strips”.

eActivity files can be used by a teacher, for example, to create math problems or exercises that
provide hints to solutions, for distribution to students. Students can use eActivity files to keep
classroom notes, memos of problems and their solutions, etc.

1. eActivity Overview
The first thing that appears when you select the eActivity mode on the Main Menu is the file
menu.

No eActivity mode files in memory

At least one folder or an eActivity mode
file in memory

Opening a file in the eActivity mode will display a workspace screen that you can use for
inputting and editing text, calculation expressions, and other data.
Scroll bar

Text lines
Strip

Calculator’s
display area

Picture line

Math lines
Stop line

10-1

10

The following explains the type of data you can input and edit in an eActivity file.
Text line .................A text line can be used to input characters, numbers, and expressions as
text.
Calculation line......Use the calculation line to enter an executable calculation formula. The
result will appear in the following line. Calculations are performed the same
way as they are performed in the Run-Matrix mode, while the Math input/
output mode is selected.
Stop line ................A stop line can be used to stop calculation at a particular point.
Picture line ............A picture line can be used to insert an image.
Strip ......................A strip can be used to embed data into an eActivity from the Graph, Conic
Graphs, Spreadsheet, or other built-in applications.

2. eActivity Function Menus
k File List Function Menu
• {OPEN} ... Opens an eActivity file or folder.
• {NEW} ... Creates a new eActivity file.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes an eActivity file.
• {SEARCH} ... Searches for an eActivity file.
• {MEMO} ... Displays a list of memos included in the eActivity file currently selected in the file
list.
• {JUMP} ... Opens the eActivity file and jumps to the eActivity line where the memo selected
in the list is located.
• {EDIT} ... Displays a screen for editing the memo selected in the list.
• {DETAIL} ... Opens a details screen for the memo selected in the list.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes the memo selected in the list.
• {DEL-ALL} ... Deletes all memos in the eActivity file.
• At least 128 kbytes of memory area is required when the eActivity mode is used for the first
time. A Memory Full error will appear if there is not enough memory available.

10-2

k Workspace Screen Function Menu
Part of the content of the workspace function menu depends on the line (or strip) that is
currently selected.
• Workspace Screen Common Menu Items
Only the menu items marked with an asterisk (*) below are supported while a picture line is
selected.
• {FILE}* ... Displays the following file operation submenu.
• {SAVE} ... Saves the file currently being edited.
• {SAVE • AS} ... Saves the file currently being edited under another name.
• {OPT} ... See “Optimizing Storage Memory” on page 11-13.
• {CAPACITY} ... Displays a screen showing the data size of the file being edited and how
much memory capacity remains.
• {STRIP}* ... Inserts a strip.
• {JUMP}* ... Displays the following submenu to control cursor movement.
• {TOP}/{BOTTOM}/{PageUp}/{PageDown} ... See page 10-6.
• {DEL-LINE}/{DELETE}* ... Deletes the line that is currently selected or where the cursor is
located.
• {INSERT}* ... Displays the following insert submenu, for inserting a new line above the line
that is currently selected or where the cursor is located.
• {TEXT} ... Inserts a text line.
• {CALC} ... Inserts a calculation line.
• {STOP} ... Inserts a calculation stop line.
• {PICTURE} ... Inserts a picture line.
• {'MAT} ... Displays the Matrix Editor (page 10-9).
• {'LIST} ... Displays the List Editor (page 10-9).
• Menu when a Text Line is Selected
• {TEXT} ... Changes the current line from a text line to a calculation line.
• {CHAR} ... Displays a menu for inputting math symbols, special symbols, and characters of
various languages.
• {A⇔a} ... Toggles between uppercase and lowercase input while alpha character input is
enabled (by pressing the a key).
• {MATH} ... Displays the MATH menu (page 1-14).

10-3

• {COLOR} ... Displays the following COLOR submenu.
• {MARKER} ... Enters the marker mode for highlighting text (page 10-10).
• {CHAR} ... Enters the color mode for coloring text (page 10-11).
• {MEMO} ... Displays the following MEMO submenu.
• {INSERT} ... Appends a memo at the current cursor position.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes the memo at the current cursor position.
• {Catalog} ... Displays a list of memos included in a file.
• {VIEW} ... Displays the memo at the current cursor position.
• Menu when a Calculation Line or Stop Line is Selected
Only the menu items marked with an asterisk (*) below are supported while a stop line is
selected.
• {CALC}* ... Changes the current line from a calculation line to a text line.
• {MATH}* ... Same as {MATH} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• {COLOR} ... Same as {COLOR} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• {MEMO} ... Same as {MEMO} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• Menu when a Strip is Selected
• {FILE} ... Displays the following file operation submenu.
• {SAVE}/{SAVE • AS}/{OPT}/{CAPACITY} ... Same as the {FILE} submenus under
“Workspace Screen Common Menu Items”.
• {SIZE} ... Displays the size of the strip at the current cursor position.
• {CHAR} ... Same as {CHAR} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• {A⇔a} ... Same as {A⇔a} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.

3. eActivity File Operations
This section explains the different file operations you can perform from the eActivity file menu
screen. All of the operations in this section can be performed while the file menu is displayed.
• For information about the 5(MEMO) function menu displayed for an eActivity file menu, see
“Appending a Memo to a Text Line or Calculation Line” (page 10-11).
• This section does not cover folder operations. For details about folders, see “Chapter 11
Memory Manager”.

u To create a new file
1. While the file menu is displayed, press 2(NEW).
• This will display a file name input screen.

10-4

2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• This displays a blank workspace screen.

Cursor

• The following are the characters allowed in a file name.
A to Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 to 9

u To open a file
Use f and c to highlight the file you want to open, and then press 1(OPEN) or w*.
* If an error occurs, delete capture memory and clipboard data, or transfer the data to your
computer.

u To delete a file
1. Use f and c to highlight the file you want to delete, and then press 3(DELETE).
• This will display a “Delete eActivity?” confirmation message.
2. Press 1(Yes) to delete the file or 6(No) to cancel without deleting anything.

u To search for a file
1. While the file menu is displayed, press 4(SEARCH).
• This will display a file search screen.
2. Enter part or the entire name of the file you want to find.
• File name characters are searched from left to right. Entering “IT” will count names like
ITXX, ITABC, IT123 as hits, but not names like XXIT or ABITC.
3. Press w.
• If a name matches the text you input in step 2, it will be
selected on the file menu.

• The message “Not Found” will appear if a match cannot be found. Press the J key to
close the message dialog box.

10-5

4. Inputting and Editing Data
All of the operations in this section are performed on the eActivity workspace screen. Use the
procedures under “eActivity File Operations” (page 10-4) to create a new file or to open an
existing file.

k Cursor Movement and Scroll Operations
When you want to do this:

Use this key operation:

Move the cursor forward and back

f or c

Scroll one screen back

!f or
6(g)1(JUMP)3(PageUp)

Scroll one screen forward

!c or
6(g)1(JUMP)4(PageDown)

Move the cursor to the beginning of the workspace
screen

6(g)1(JUMP)1(TOP)

Move the cursor to the end of the workspace screen

6(g)1(JUMP)2(BOTTOM)

k Inputting into a Text Line
Use a text line to input alphanumeric characters, expressions, etc.

u Inputting characters and expressions as text
1. Move the cursor to a text line.
• While the cursor is in a text line, “TEXT” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item.
This indicates that text input is enabled.

Text line cursor

3 key menu becomes “TEXT”.

10-6

• “CALC” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item if the cursor is located in a
calculation line. Pressing 3(CALC) will change the calculation line to a text line.
• If the cursor is located in a strip, use f and c to move to the cursor to a text line.
• On the function menu, selecting {INSERT} and then {TEXT} will insert a new text line
above the line where the cursor is currently located.
2. Input the text or expression you want into the text strip.
• See “Text Line Input and Editing Operations” described below.

u Text Line Input and Editing Operations
• You can input up to 255 bytes of text into a single text line. Text in the text line wraps
automatically to fit inside the display area (Word Wrap Function). Note, however, that
numeric expressions and commands do not wrap.*1 Scroll arrows (]') will appear on the
left and right sides of the calculation line to let you know some of the calculation does not fit
within the calculation line display area. In this case, you can use the left and right cursor keys
to scroll the calculation.
• The 5(A⇔a) function key toggles between upper-case and lower-case input. This function
is available only while alpha text input is enabled. See page 2-8 for details. When upper-case
input is selected,
is displayed in the status bar, and
is displayed while lower-case input
is selected.
• Press w to input a carriage return into text. No symbol will be displayed for a carriage
return.
• If the text is wrapped into multiple lines, pressing the A key will delete the line where the
cursor is currently located only. The part of the text that is wrapped to other lines will not be
deleted.
• Always use the Math input/output mode (page 1-13) to input an expression into a text line.
*1 Also, any word that includes the symbol “ ’ ”, “ { ” or “
”, which are input using the menu
that appears when you press 4(CHAR), does not wrap.

k Inputting into a Calculation Line
Inputting a calculation expression into an eActivity calculation line and pressing w will display
the calculation result in the following line. Such a calculation line can be used in the same way
as the Run-Matrix mode (page 1-3). A calculation line and its result make up one set.
• Note that the word wrap function does not apply in the case of math lines. Scroll arrows
(]') will appear on the left and right sides of the calculation line to let you know some of
the calculation does not fit within the calculation line display area. In this case, you can use
the left and right cursor keys to scroll the calculation.

10-7

u To input a calculation formula into an eActivity
1. Move the cursor to a calculation line.
• While the cursor is in a calculation line, “CALC” will be displayed for the F3 function menu
item. This indicates that calculation expression input is enabled.

Math line cursor

This will cause the 3 key menu to change to
“CALC”.
• “TEXT” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item if the cursor is located in a text line.
Pressing 3(CALC) will change the calculation line to a text line.
• If the cursor is located in a strip, use f and c to move to the cursor to a calculation
line.
• On the function menu, selecting {INSERT} and then {CALC} will insert a new calculation
line above the line where the cursor is currently located.
2. Input a calculation expression (Example: s$!E(π)cg).
• Calculation line input and editing operations are the
same as those in the Run-Matrix mode while the Math
input/output mode is selected.

3. To obtain the result of the calculation, press w.

10-8

u Matrix Calculations Using the Matrix Editor
Selecting {'MAT} on the function menu displays the Matrix Editor.
Matrix Editor operations and matrix calculations in the eActivity mode are the fundamentally
identical to those in the Run-Matrix mode. For details about the Matrix Editor and matrix
calculation operations, see “Matrix Calculations” (page 2-41). Note, however, that eActivity
mode Matrix Editor operations and matrix calculations differ from those in the Run-Matrix
mode as described below.
• eActivity mode matrix memory is saved separately for each file. Matrix memory will be
different from those produced when called from a non-eActivity mode.

u List Calculations Using the List Editor
Selecting {'LIST} on the function menu displays the List Editor.
List Editor operations in the eActivity mode are identical to those in the Statistics mode
(“Inputting and Editing a List”, page 3-1). This processing and calculations are fundamentally
the identical to those in the Run-Matrix mode (“Manipulating List Data” on page 3-7,
“Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists” on page 3-13). Note, however, that eActivity mode List
Editor operations and list calculations differ from those in other modes as described below.
• The eActivity mode List Editor function menu provides only screen two of the Statistics
mode List Editor function menu.
• To return to the workspace screen from the List Editor in the eActivity mode, press J.
• In the eActivity mode, values for list memory is saved separately for each file. List memory
will be different from those produced when called from a non-eActivity mode.

k Inserting a Calculation Stop Line
Pressing w after you edit a calculation line on a workspace screen that contains multiple
calculation lines will cause all of the calculations following the edited line to be re-calculated.
Re-calculation can take quite a bit of time if there are a large number of calculation lines or
if some of the calculations are complex. Inserting a calculation stop line will stop the recalculation process at the point where the line is located.

u To insert a stop line
On the function menu, select {INSERT} and then {STOP} to insert a stop line above the
currently selected line or strip.

10-9

k Highlighting and Changing the Color of Text
You can highlight or change the color of text line or calculation line text in order to add
emphasis.
• You cannot mark or change the color of the text of a calculation line result.

u To highlight text
1. Move the cursor to the beginning (or end) of the text you
want to highlight.

2. Press 6(g)5(COLOR)1(MARKER).

3. On the dialog box that appears, press the number key that corresponds to the highlighting
color (magenta, green, cyan, yellow) you want to use.
• This closes the dialog box. The cursor will now be the
color you selected.

4. Use e and d to move the cursor in the direction of the text you want to highlight.
• The text the cursor passed over will become highlighted.
• You also can highlight across multiple lines by using f
and c to change lines before moving the cursor left
and right.
5. To apply the highlighting, press 1(SET).
• To cancel highlighting, press J.

u To unhighlight text
Perform the same operation you used to highlight text under “To highlight text” to unhighlight it.
In step 3, press v(Clear) instead of selecting a highlight color.

10-10

u To change the text color
1. Move the cursor to the beginning (or end) of the text whose color you want to change.
2. Press 6(g)5(COLOR)2(CHAR).
3. On the dialog box that appears, press the number key that corresponds to the color you
want to use.
• This closes the dialog box. The cursor will now be the color you selected.
4. Use e and d to move the cursor in the direction of the text whose color you want to
change.
• You also can change text color across multiple lines by using f and c to change lines
before moving the cursor left and right.
5. To register the character color change, press 1(SET).
• To cancel the character color change, press J.

k Appending a Memo to a Text Line or Calculation Line
After you append a memo to a text line or calculation line in an eActivity file, you can jump to
that line from the memo list.
Memo icon

→

Memo list

Jumping to the line where
the memo is located

• You can append one memo per line.* The memo icon will appear in the upper right corner of
the screen if there is a memo appended to the line where the cursor is currently located.
* Note that a line of text runs from the beginning of the line up to the next new line operation
(which is not displayed) and may span multiple display lines.
• In addition to being able to display the memory list while an eActivity file is open, you also
can open it by pressing 5(MEMO) in the file menu before opening the eActivity file.
• A memo can be appended to a text line or calculation line only.
• You cannot append a memo to a calculation line result.

10-11

u To append a memo to a line
1. Move the cursor to the text line or calculation line where you want to append a memo.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)1(INSERT). If it is at a
calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)1(INSERT).
• This displays a memo color selection dialog box.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the color you want to select and then press
w. Or you can use the number keys to enter the number next to the color you want to
select.
• A memo window appears in the center of the screen, ready for text input.

Memo Window

4. Enter the text you want. You can enter an explanation of the line, some symbol, etc.
• You can enter up to 255 bytes of text.
5. Press w.
• This closes the memo window. At this time the memo icon will appear in the upper right
corner of the screen because there is now a memo appended to the line where the cursor
is located.

u To jump to a line that has a memo appended
1. If the cursor is currently located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)3(Catalog).
If it is at a calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)3(Catalog).
• This displays a list of memos contained in the file.
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the memo for your jump destination and then
press w.
• This jumps to the line where the selected memo is located, with the cursor at the first
character of the line.

10-12

u To edit the text of an existing memo
1. Move the cursor to the line where the memo you want to edit is appended.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)4(VIEW). If it is at a
calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)4(VIEW).
• This will display the memo window as shown in the screen shot on the left, below. Pressing
3(DETAIL) here will display a memo detail editing screen like the screen shot on the
right. You can use either of these screens to edit memo text. The detail editing screen is
best when the memo contains a lot of text.

→

3. Edit the text and then press w.
• This returns to step 1 of this procedure.

u To remove a memo
1. Move the cursor to the line where the memo you want to remove is appended.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)2(DELETE). If it is at
a calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)2(DELETE).
3. In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the memo or
6(No) to cancel the delete operation.

10-13

k Inserting an Image (Picture)
The following table shows the image file sizes that are supported for insertion into an eActivity
file.
Width × Height
(dots)

Size

(a) 384 × 216

This is the overall screen size for this
model. The graphic images stored
in picture memory (page 5-21) are
this size. The 48 vertical dots that are
outside of the eActivity display range
can be displayed by scrolling.

(b) 384 × 192

This is the screen size when a graph
screen is saved to picture memory
(page 5-21).

Example Screen

• The line on the eActivity workspace screen where an image is inserted is called a “picture
line”. You can insert only one image per picture line, and you cannot enter text or numbers
into the same line where a picture line is inserted.
• You can insert a 16-bit g3p format file or a screen image (3-bit g3p format file) saved to
capture memory (page 1-36).

10-14

u To insert an image
1. Use f and c to move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the image.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)3(INSERT)4(PICTURE). If it is at a
calculation line, press 5(INSERT)4(PICTURE).
• This displays a list of g3p files stored in the PICT folder in storage memory.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the image you want to insert and then press
w.
• This inserts the image with a red boundary around it. The red boundary means that the
image is selected.

u To select an image
You can use f and c to move the cursor between lines and select images. The following
shows how images appear on the display when they are selected.
Selecting an image that does not have a boundary causes a red boundary to appear around it.

→

Selecting an image that has a boundary causes the boundary to change color, indicating it is
highlighted.

→

10-15

u To add a boundary line around an image
1. Use f and c to select the image to which you want to add a boundary line.
2. Press !f(FORMAT).
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the style and color of the boundary line.
3. Specify the boundary line style and color.
• Use f and c to move the highlighting to Line Style or Line Color and then press w.
On the option dialog box that appears, highlight the option you want to select and then
press w.
• The following are the settings that are available for Line Style and Line Color.
Line Style: 1.Normal, 2.Thick, 3.Thin
Line Color: 1.Black, 2.Blue, 3.Red, 4.Magenta, 5.Green, 6.Cyan, 7.Yellow, 8.White
4. After the settings are the way you want, press J.

u To remove a boundary line from around an image
1. Use f and c to select the image whose boundary line you want to remove.
2. Press !f(FORMAT)c(Line Color)j(Clear)w.
3. Press J.

u To delete an image
1. Use f and c to select the image you want to delete.
2. Press 6(g)2(DELETE).
3. In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the image or
6(No) to cancel the delete operation.

k Using Strips
Strips are tools that let you embed built-in application data into an eActivity file. Only one
built-in application screen can be associated with each strip, and the strip can store the data
(graphs, etc.) produced by the screen.
The table below shows the built-in application screens that can be inserted into strips. The
“Strip Name” column shows the names included on the dialog box that appears when you
press 2(STRIP).

10-16

Strip Data Type Table
Data Type

Strip Name

Run-Matrix mode calculation data (When the Run-Matrix mode is
called from an eActivity, it starts up in the Math input/output mode.)

RUN

Graph mode graph screen data

Graph

Graph mode graph relation list screen data

Graph Editor

Table mode table relation list screen data

Table Editor

Conic Graphs mode graph screen data

Conics Graph

Conic Graphs mode function list screen data

Conics Editor

Statistics mode statistical graph screen data

Stat Graph

Statistics mode List Editor data

List Editor

Equation mode calculation solution screen data

Solver

Recursion mode recursion type selection screen

Recur Editor

Notes screen data (Notes is a special eActivity application. See “Notes
Strips” on page 10-19 for more information.)

Notes

Run-Matrix mode Matrix Editor data

Matrix Editor

Equation mode simultaneous equation solution screen data

Simul Equation

Equation mode high-order equation solution screen data

Poly Equation

Dyna Graph mode graph screen data

Dynamic Graph

Financial mode calculation solution screen data

Financial

Spreadsheet mode spreadsheet screen data

SpreadSheet

E-Con2 mode setup wizard data

Econ SetupWizard

E-Con2 mode advanced setup data

Econ AdvancSetup

E-Con2 mode advanced setup data
(Executing this strip starts sampling immediately based on the setup
information that is recorded to the strip the first time the strip is
executed.)

Econ Sampling

E-Con2 mode advanced setup data
(Executing this strip graphs sampled data that is recorded to the strip
the first time the strip is executed.)

Econ Graph

Geometry mode screen data

Geometry

Picture Plot mode screen data

Picture Plot

10-17

u To insert a strip
1. Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert
the strip.

2. Press 2(STRIP).
• This will display a dialog box with a list of insertable
strips. For information about the display names and
data types that appear on this dialog box, see the “Strip
Data Type Table” (page 10-17).

3. Use c and f to select the strip that corresponds to the type of data you want to insert.
• In this example we will select “Graph” (Graph mode graph screen data).
4. Press w.
• This will insert the type of strip you selected (Graph strip in this example) one line above
the line where you located the cursor in step 1 of this procedure.
5. Input up to 16 characters for the strip title, and then press
w.

6. Press w again to start creating strip data.
• This will start up the built in application for the selected
strip type (Graph mode in this example), and display
the graph screen. At this point, a blank graph screen
appears because there is no data yet.

7. Press J to display the graph relation list screen.

10-18

8. Enter the function you want to graph.
1
(Example: Y = x2 – 1)
2

9. Press 6(DRAW).
• This will graph the function you entered.

10. To return to the eActivity workspace screen, press !a(').
• The data that is graphed in step 8 will be saved in the Graph strip.
• The saved graph data is linked to this Graph strip only. It is independent of data for
modes that are entered from the Main Menu.
11. Pressing w here again will display the graph screen, and draw the graph based on the
data saved by the strip.

u Notes Strips
“Notes” is a special eActivity text editor that comes in handy when you want to write long text
explanations on the workspace screen. You can call up the Notes screen from a Notes strip on
the workspace screen. Input and editing operations on the Notes screen are identical to those
you use for an eActivity text line.

10-19

The following describes the Notes screen function menu items.
• {JUMP}... Displays a JUMP menu that you can use to jump to the top (1(TOP)) of the data,
the bottom (2(BOTTOM)) of the data, the previous page (3(PageUp)), or the next
page (4(PageDown)).
• {DEL-LINE} ... Deletes the line that is currently selected or where the cursor is located.
• {INSERT} ... Inserts one new line above the line where the cursor is currently located.
• {MATH} ... Displays the MATH menu (page 1-14).
• {CHAR} ... Displays a menu for inputting math symbols, special symbols, and characters of
various languages.
• {A⇔a} ... Toggles between uppercase and lowercase input while alpha character input is
enabled (by pressing the a key).

u To change the title of a strip
1. Use c and f to select the strip whose title you want to change.
2. Input up to 16 characters for the strip title, and then press w.
• The remainder of the existing title will disappear as soon as you input the first character.
Input the new title in its entirety. If you want to partially edit the existing title, press d or
e first to move the cursor.
• Pressing J instead of w will exit trip title editing without changing anything.

u To call an application from a strip
Use c and f to select the strip whose application you want to call and then press w.
• This will display the application screen that corresponds to the selected strip. If the strip
already contains data, the application is called using the data that was last saved.
• The background color of the status bar changes from its normal white to light cyan to indicate
that the displayed application screen was called from a strip.
• If you select a Conics Graph strip and press w without inputting any graph data, the Conics
Editor screen appears in place of the Conics Graph screen.

10-20

u To toggle between the eActivity workspace screen and an application
screen called from a strip
Press !a(').
Each press of !a(') toggles between the eActivity workspace screen and the
application screen called from the strip.

u To switch from an application screen called up from a strip to another
application screen
Press !,(,). On the dialog box that appears, use c and f to select the name of
an application and then press w.

u To display the strip memory usage screen
1. Use c and f to select the strip whose memory usage screen you want to view.
2. Press 1(FILE)5(SIZE).
• This will display the memory usage screen of the
currently selected strip.

3. To exit the memory usage screen, press J.

u To delete a line or strip
1. Move the cursor to the line or strip you want to delete.
• If you move the cursor to a calculation line, note that both the calculation and the result will
be deleted.
2. Press 6(g)2(DEL-LINE).
• This causes a confirmation message to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete, or 6(No) to cancel without deleting anything.

10-21

k Saving a File
Use the procedures in this section to save a file after inputting or editing it on the workspace
screen.
An eActivity file for the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 may have a file name extension of “g3e”. Performing
either of the following operations on the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 to save an eActivity file always will
cause the extension “g3e” to be appended to the file name.
• Saving a newly created file
• Saving an existing file using the “save as” operation (1(FILE)2(SAVE • AS))
If you save an eActivity file using the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 to save a file with a file name extension
“g2e” (a file transferred from an older version calculator), the file name extension will be
determined according to the following rules.
• The “g3e” extension is used for an eActivity file that includes data for new features added by
the fx-CG10/fx-CG20.
Here, the expression “data for new features added by the fx-CG10/fx-CG20” means, for
example, colored text data, memo data appended to a line, picture line data, etc.
• The “g2e” extension is used for eActivity files other than those described above.

u To replace the existing file with the new version
Press 1(FILE)1(SAVE) to save the currently open file.

u To save a file under a new name
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, press 1(FILE)2(SAVE • AS).
• This will display a file name input screen.
2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• If a file already exists with the same file name you enter in step 2, a message will appear
asking if you want to replace the existing file with the new one. Press 1(Yes) to replace
the existing file, or 6(No) to cancel the save operation and return to the file name input
dialog box in step 2.

Important!
• An eActivity file with the g3e file name extension cannot be opened by any CASIO calculator
model older than the fx-CG10/fx-CG20.
• Using the fx-CG10 or fx-CG20 to open an eActivity file with a file name extension of g1e
or g2e, which was created on an older model CASIO calculator (fx-9860G, fx-9860GII, fx9860G AU, fx-9860G AU PLUS, GRAPH 85/85 SD, GRAPH 95/75), will cause any G-MEM
(Graph memory) or DYNA MEM (Dynamic Graph memory) instances in the eActivity strips to
be deleted.

10-22

k Displaying the eActivity Memory Usage Screen
The maximum size of an eActivity file is approximately 29,000 bytes.* You can use the
eActivity file memory usage screen to check how much memory capacity remains for the file
you are currently working on.
* Actual maximum file size depends on capture memory and clipboard memory usage, and
may be less than 29,000 bytes.

u To display the eActivity memory usage screen
On the workspace screen, press 1(FILE)4(CAPACITY).

File usage
Remaining file memory capacity

To exit the memory usage screen, press J.

u To return to the file list from the workspace screen
Press J.
If a confirmation message appears asking if you want to save the current file appears, perform
one of the operations described below.
To do this:

Press this key:

Overwrite the existing eActivity file with the edited version and return
to the file list

1(Yes)

Return to the file list without saving the file you are currently editing

6(No)

Return to the eActivity workspace screen

A

10-23

Chapter 11 Memory Manager
This calculator includes main memory and storage memory for data storage.
The main memory is a work area where you can input data, perform calculations, and run
programs. Data in the main memory can be deleted by batteries going dead or when you
perform a reset.
Storage memory is an area for storing eActivity files, picture data (g3p files), and other
relatively large-volume data. The storage memory uses “flash memory,” so data is safe even
when power is interrupted. Normally, you should use the storage memory for data you need to
store securely for long periods, loading data into the main memory only when you need it.

1. Using the Memory Manager
From the Main Menu, enter the Memory mode.
• {MAIN} ... {displays main memory information}
• {STRGMEM} ... {displays storage memory information}
• {BACKUP} ... {main memory backup}
• {OPT} ... {storage memory optimization}

k Memory Information Screen
The memory information screen shows information about one memory at a time: the
calculator’s main memory or storage memory.
To display this memory information screen:

Press this key:

Main memory

1(MAIN)

Storage memory

2(STRGMEM)

11-1

11

• Use the cursor f and c keys to move the highlighting and check the number of bytes
used by each type of data.
• The status bar shows the remaining capacity of the currently displayed memory area (main
or storage).
• If the name of a file transferred to storage memory from your computer or other source
has a file name that is more than eight characters long, its name will abbreviated to
eight characters when displayed on the storage memory information screen (Example:
AAAABBBBCC.txt > AAAABB~1.txt). Also, if a file name extension has more than three
characters, everything after the third character of the file name extension will be trimmed off.
• Up to 300 files per folder can be displayed on the main memory information screen. If a
folder has more than 300 files and you need to display them all, divide them among multiple
folders so the total number of files in a single folder is not greater than 300.
• Up to 200 files per folder can be displayed on the storage memory information screen. If a
folder has more than 200 files and you need to display them all, divide them among multiple
folders so the total number of files in a single folder is not greater than 200.
• Though you can create folders on your computer nested to more than three levels in storage
memory, this calculator will display only up to the third level.
• Moving the highlighting to a data group or folder and pressing w will display the data group
or folder contents. Pressing J will return to the previous screen.
• While storage memory folder contents are displayed, the top line of the screen shows the file
path to the current directory level. “SMEM” stands for “Storage Memory”.
• The following are characters that can be used in file names and folder names.
A-Z, a-z, 0-9, !, #, $, %, ', ,(comma), (, ), +, –, ., ;, =, @, [, ], ^, _, `, ~, space

11-2

The following data can be checked.
Main Memory

Note
For information about the “Overwrite Check” column in the table below, see “To execute a
send operation” (page 13-12) and “Error Checks During Data Copy” (page 11-9).
Icon/Data Name

Contents

Overwrite
Check

ALPHA MEM

Alpha letter variables

No

CONICS

Conics setting data

No

DYNA MEM

Dynamic Graph memory

Yes

E-CON2

E-Con2 group

—

ECON2

E-Con2 mode current data

Yes

SUnnn

E-Con2 mode setup data

Yes

EQUATION

Equation data

No

F-MEM

Function memory group

—

F-MEM n (n = 1 to 20)

Function memory

No

G-MEM

Graph memory group

—

G-MEM n (n = 1 to 20)

Graph memory

Yes

@GEOM

Geometry group

—

@IMAGE

Geometry mode current data

Yes

Each Geometry file name

Geometry data

Yes

LISTFILE

List file group

—

LIST n (n = 1 to 26, and Ans)

List memory contents

Yes

LISTFILE n (n = 1 to 6)

List file

Yes

MATRIX

Matrix group

—

MAT n (n = A to Z, and Ans)

Matrix

Yes

@PICTPLT

Picture Plot group

—

PICTPLOT

Picture Plot data

Yes

PROGRAM

Program group

—

Each program name

Programs

Yes

RECURSION

Recursion data

No

S-SHEET

Spreadsheet group

—

11-3

Icon/Data Name

Contents

Overwrite
Check

_SETTING

Spreadsheet mode setting data

No

Each spreadsheet name

Spreadsheet data

Yes

SETUP

Setup data

No

STAT

Stat result data

No

STRING

String memory group

—

STRING n (n = 1 to 20)

String memory

No

SYSTEM

OS and data shared by applications
(clipboard, replay, history, etc.)

No

TABLE

Table data

No

FINANCE

Financial mode data

No

V-WIN

V-Window memory group

—

V-WIN n (n = 1 to 6)

V-Window memory

No

Y=DATA

Graph expression

No

Each add-in application name

Application-specific data

Yes

Storage Memory*1
Icon

File Extension

Description

.g1m, .g2m, .g3m,
.g1r, or .g2r

Data items listed in the main memory information
screen that has been copied to storage memory.

.g1e, .g2e, or .g3e

eActivity files

.g3a, .g3l

.g3a: Add-in applications
.g3l: Add-in languages and add-in menus

.g3p

Picture files

.g3b

Flipbook files

.bmp

Bitmap files

.txt

Text files

.csv

CSV files

Other file name
extensions

These files are not supported by this calculator.

*1 “No Data” is displayed when there is no data in storage memory.

11-4

k Creating a Folder in Storage Memory
u To create a new folder
1. While storage memory data is on the display, press 4(FOLDER)1(MKEFLDR) to display
the folder name input screen.
2. Input up to eight characters for the name you want to give
to the folder.
• Only the following characters are supported: A through
Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 through 9
• An “Invalid Name” error occurs if the name you input is
already being used by an existing file.
• To cancel folder creation, press J.
3. Press w to create the folder and return to the storage
memory information screen.

• This calculator supports nesting of folders up to three levels only.
• Though you can create folders on your computer nested to more than three levels in storage
memory, this calculator will display only up to the third level. In this case you will be able to
see folders stored in a level three folder, but you will not be able to open them.
• Selecting a folder stored in a level three folder and then performing the delete operation
(page 11-10) will delete the selected (level 4) folder and everything inside it.

u To rename a folder
1. On the storage memory information screen, select the folder you want to rename.
2. Press 4(FOLDER)2(RENFLDR) to display the rename folder screen.
• The remaining steps of this procedure are the same as those starting with step 2 under
“To create a new folder” above.

11-5

k Viewing Detailed Information about a File in Storage Memory
On the storage memory information screen, you can highlight a file and then press
5(DETAIL) or e to display its DETAIL screen. If you select a g3p or g3b file, these
operations will display a preview of the file’s image.
Non g3p/g3b File
5(DETAIL)
or e
→
←
J or d
g3p/g3b File
5(DETAIL)
or e
→
←
J or d

e
→
←
d

• You can use e and d to move between the storage memory information screen, file
DETAIL screen, and image preview screen (g3p or g3b file only) as shown above.
• Pressing f or c while a file DETAIL screen or image preview screen is displayed will
scroll either up or down to the DETAIL screen or image preview screen of the next file in the
sequence that the files are listed on the storage memory information screen.
• Pressing f or c while a file DETAIL screen is displayed will scroll to the DETAIL screen
of the next file in the sequence that the files are listed on the storage memory information
screen.

11-6

k Selecting Data
• Press 1(SELECT) to select the currently highlighted item, which is indicated by the
selection pointer ( ) appearing next to it. Pressing 1(SELECT) again will deselect the item,
causing the selection pointer to disappear.
• You can select multiple files, if you want.

→
1(SELECT)
←

• Selecting a group or folder also selects everything inside of it. Deselecting a group or folder
deselects all of its contents.

w
→

• If you select one or more individual items inside of a data group or folder, the selection
pointer ( ) appears next to each item, while a selection pointer ( ) appears next to the
group or folder name.

J
→

• Returning to the Memory mode initial screen deselects all currently selected items.

11-7

k Copying Data
u To copy from main memory to storage memory
The following procedure saves the selected data into a single file. You assign a name to the
file, which is stored in storage memory.
1. On the main memory information screen, select the data you want to copy.
2. Press 2(COPY).
• This displays the folder selection screen. “ROOT” is the
storage memory root directory.

3. Specify the folder you want.
• Highlight ROOT to copy the data to the root directory.
• To copy the data to a specific folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
desired folder and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
• This displays the file name input screen.

5. Input the file name you want to give to the file.
• To cancel the copy operation, press J.
6. Press 5(g3m) or 6(g2m) as required to specify the file format.
• g3m is the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 file type. g2m is the file format used to transfer data to the
fx-9860GII and other older model calculators via Program-Link Software (FA-124).
7. Press w to copy the data.
• The message “Complete!” appears when the copy operation is complete.

11-8

u To copy from storage memory to main memory
1. On the storage memory information screen, select the file you want to copy.
• The only files that can be copied to main memory are those with one of the following
file name extensions: g1m, g2m, g3m, g1r, g2r. Selecting a file of any other format and
performing the following step will cause an “Invalid Type” error.
• Performing the following step causes the files stored in storage memory to be expanded
into individual component data (SETUP, STAT, and other data described on page 11-3),
and copy the data to main memory.
2. Press 2(COPY) to copy the data.
• Depending on the data type, an overwrite confirmation message will appear if there
is always data with the same name in main memory as the data being copied. For
information about which types of data cause a confirmation message to appear, see the
“Overwrite Check” column in the data table on page 11-3. “Yes” means that a confirmation
message is displayed, while “No” indicates that the copy operation is performed without
any confirmation message.
• The message “Complete!” appears when the copy operation is complete.

u Error Checks During Data Copy
The following error checks are performed while a data copy operation is being executed.
Low battery check
The calculator performs low battery check before starting the data copy operation. If the
battery is at Level 1, a low battery error occurs and the copy operation is not performed.
Available memory check
The calculator checks to see if there is enough free memory available to store the copied data.
A “Memory Full” error occurs if there is not enough memory available.
A “Too Many Data” error occurs when the number of data items is too great.
Overwrite check
The calculator checks to see if there is any existing data at the copy destination with the same
name as the data being copied.
An overwrite confirmation message appears if there is data
with the same name.
• 1(Yes) ... overwrites the existing data with the new
data
• 6(No) ... advances to the next data item without
copying the data with the same name
• Pressing A will cancel the copy operation.

11-9

Type mismatch error check
Only files whose names have the extension .g1m, .g2m, .g3m, .g1r, or .g2r can be copied from
storage memory to main memory. Any other type of error will cause a type mismatch error.

k Other File Operations
u To delete a file or folder
1. Display the main memory information screen or the storage memory information screen.
2. Select all of the files and folders you want to delete.
• For details about selecting files and folders, see “Selecting Data” (page 11-7).
3. Press 6(DELETE).

4. In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete or 6(No) to
cancel the delete operation.

u To search for a file
Example

To search for all files in the main memory (or storage memory) whose
names begin with the letter “R”

1. Display the main memory (or storage memory) information screen.
2. Press 3(SEARCH).
• Input the letter “R” for the keyword.

• The first file name that begins with the letter “R” appears
highlighted on display.

• You can input up to eight characters for the keyword.
• The message “Not Found” appears if there are no file names that match your keyword.

11-10

k Backing Up Main Memory Data
u To back up main memory data
1. On the initial Memory mode screen press 4(BACKUP).

2. Press 1(SAVE).
• This displays a folder selection screen.

3. Use f and c to select the folder where you want to save the data.
4. Press w to start the backup.
• A “Memory Full” occurs when there is not enough space available in the storage memory
to complete the backup operation.
• The following message appears if there is already
backup data in the storage memory.

Press 1(Yes) to back up the data, or 6(No) to cancel the backup operation.
The message “Complete!” appears when the backup operation is finished.
• Backup data is saved in a file named BACKUP.g3m.
5. Press J to return to the screen displayed in step 1.

11-11

u To restore backup data to the main memory
1. On the initial Memory mode screen press 4(BACKUP).
• On the screen that appears, you can confirm whether or not there is backup data in the
storage memory.
2. Press 2(LOAD).
• This displays the folder selection screen.

3. Use f and c to select a folder.
4. Press w.*1
• A message appears to confirm whether or not you really
want to restore the backed up data.
*1 The message “No Data” will appear if there is no
backup data stored in the selected folder. Pressing J
will return the screen in step 1.
Press 1(Yes) to restore the data and delete any data currently in the area.
Press 6(No) to cancel the data backup operation.
The message “Complete!” appears when the restore operation is finished.
Press J to return to the screen displayed in step 1.

11-12

k Optimizing Storage Memory
Storage memory can become fragmented after many store and load operations, causing
entire blocks of memory to become unavailable for data storage. Because of this, you should
periodically perform the storage memory optimization procedure, which rearranges the data in
the storage memory and makes memory usage more economical.
• Note that the calculator performs storage memory optimization automatically whenever you
perform a save operation and the calculator discovers storage memory is running low.

u To optimize the storage memory
On the initial Memory mode screen, press 5(OPT) to optimize the storage memory.

The message “Complete!” appears when the optimize operation is complete.
Press J to return to the initial Memory mode screen.
• In some cases, the amount of free memory capacity may be unchanged when you check
it after performing the optimization procedure. This does not indicate any problem with the
calculator.

11-13

Chapter 12 System Manager
Use the System Manager to view system information and make system settings.

1. Using the System Manager
From the Main Menu, enter the System mode and display the following menu items.
• 1(DISPLAY) ... {display brightness adjustment}
• 2(PWRProp) ... {power properties settings}
• 3(LANGUAGE) ... {system language}
• 4(VERSION) ... {version}
• 5(RESET) ... {system reset operations}
• 6(g)1(BattSet) ... {battery settings}
• 6(g)2(UserName) ... {user name registration}
• 6(g)5(OS Update) ... {OS update}

2. System Settings
k Display Brightness Adjustment
While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 1(DISPLAY) to display the
brightness adjustment screen.
• The e cursor key makes display brightness lighter.
• The d cursor key makes display brightness darker.
• 1(INITIAL) returns display brightness to its initial default.
Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.

12-1

12

k Power Properties Settings
u To specify the Auto Power Off trigger time
While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 2(PWRProp) to display the Power
Properties setting screen.

• 1(10Min) ... {10 minutes} (initial default setting)
• 2(60Min) ... {60 minutes}
Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.

u To specify the backlight duration
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 2(PWRProp) to display the
Power Properties setting screen.
2. Use f and c to select “Backlight Duration”.

• 1(30Sec) ... {turns off the backlight 30 seconds after the last key operation is performed}
(initial default setting)
• 2(1Min) ... {turns off the backlight one minute after the last key operation is performed}
• 3(3Min) ... {turns off the backlight three minutes after the last key operation is performed}
3. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.

12-2

k System Language Setting
Use LANGUAGE to specify the display language for built-in applications.

u To select the message language
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 3(LANGUAGE) to display the
Message Language selection screen.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to select the language you want, and then press
1(SELECT).
3. The pop up window appears using the language you selected. Check the contents and then
press J.
4. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.

u To select the menu language
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 3(LANGUAGE) to display the
Message Language selection screen.
2. Press 6(MENU).
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to select the language you want, and then press
1(SELECT).
4. The pop up window appears using the language you selected. Check the contents and then
press J.
• Press 6(MESSAGE) to return to the Message Language selection screen.
5. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.

12-3

k Version List
Use VERSION to display the operating system version.

u To display version information
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 4(VERSION) to display the
Version list.
2. Use f and c to scroll the screen. The contents of the list are shown below.
- Operating system version
- Add-in application names and versions (only installed add-ins are displayed)
- Message languages and versions
- Menu languages and versions
3. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.

k Reset
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 5(RESET) to display the Reset
Screen 1.
• 1(SETUP) ... {setup initialization}
• 2(MAIN) ... {main memory data clear}
• 3(ADD-IN) ... {add-in application clear}
• 4(STRGMEM) ... {storage memory data clear}
• 5(A&S) ... {add-in application and storage memory
data clear}
Pressing 6(g) on the above screen displays the Reset Screen 2 shown below.
• 1(M&S) ... {main memory data and storage memory
data clear}
• 2(ALL) ... {all memory clear}
• 3(LANGUAGE) ... {add-in language clear}

12-4

The following table shows the functions of the function keys. You can use the function keys
to delete the specific data you want.
Function Key Functions
Delete Storage
Initialize
Delete Main
Delete
Delete
Memory Data
Setup
Memory
Add-in
Add-in
(Excluding Add-in
Information
Data
Applications Languages Applications and
Languages)
1(SETUP)



2(MAIN)






3(ADD-IN)



4(STRGMEM)



5(A&S)
6(g)1(M&S)





6(g)2(ALL)





6(g)
3(LANGUAGE)






*1





*1 If an add-in language is selected for the System Language Setting (page 12-3), the add-in
language file (g3l) is not deleted.
2. Press the function key that corresponds to the reset operation you want to perform.
3. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to perform the reset
operation you specified, or 6(No) to cancel.
4. A message appears to let you know when the reset operation is complete.

→

Screen produced when
2(MAIN) is pressed in step 2.

Screen produced when
1(Yes) is pressed in step 3.

Important!
Note that deleting add-in language data causes the language setting to switch automatically to
English. The deleted language will no longer be available for display.

12-5

Note
After pressing 6(g)2(ALL) to execute initialize all you will need to configure a number of
initial settings, the same way you do the first time you turn on the calculator after purchasing
it. The following screens will appear automatically in sequence. Use each one to configure the
required settings.
• Message Language selection screen (page 12-3)
• Display Settings screen (page 12-1)
• Power Properties screen (page 12-2)
• Battery Settings screen (shown below)

k Battery Settings
Important!
Whenever you replace batteries, be sure to perform the operation below to specify the type of
batteries you are loading.

u To change the battery type
1. From the initial System mode screen, press
6(g)1(BattSet).

2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the battery
type that matches the batteries you are using and then
press 1(SELECT).

3. Press 1(Yes) to change the setting, or 6(No) to cancel without changing anything.

12-6

k User Name
Use the procedure in this section to identify yourself as the user of the calculator by registering
your name and organization.

Important!
• In order to protect against misuse of your calculator, be sure to also register a password
when you register your name and organization. You will need to enter the correct password
whenever you want to change or delete the registered user name and/or organization. Take
care that you do not forget the password.
If you do, you will need to contact your original retailer or nearest CASIO authorized service
center when you want to change the user name and/or organization.
• Do not remove batteries or press the RESTART button while the operation below is in
progress. Doing so can corrupt data.

u To register or edit a user name and organization
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press
6(g)2(UserName) to display the user name screen.

2. Press 1(EDIT).
• If nothing is registered yet, the cursor will appear in the “User Name” field.
• If there is already data registered, the cursor will appear in the “Password” field. If this
happens, enter the correct password and then press w. If the password matches the one
that is registered, the cursor will move to the “User Name” field. If the password does not
match, the cursor will remain in the “Password” field.
3. Input information in the sequence shown below.
(1) Input a User Name (up to 19 characters) and then press c or w.
(2) Input your Organization (up to 19 characters) and then press c or w.
(3) Input a Password (up to eight characters) and then press w.
• Inputting a password and pressing w will display a registration confirmation dialog box to
appear.
4. Press 1(Yes) to register the information or 6(No) to cancel the registration operation.

12-7

u To delete the user name and organization name
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 6(g)2(UserName) to display
the user name screen.
2. Press 2(DELETE).
• This will display the cursor in the “Password” field.
3. Enter the correct password and then press w.
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
4. Press 1(Yes) to delete or 6(No) to cancel the delete operation.

k OS Update
You can update the operating system by connecting the calculator to a computer. For details,
see the text of releases that are issued when a new operating system version is released.

12-8

Chapter 13 Data Communication
This chapter explains how to transfer data between a calculator and a computer, or between
two calculators. Data communication operations are performed in the Link mode.
From the Main Menu, enter the Link mode. The following data communication main menu
appears on the display.
• {TRANSMIT} ... {displays the data send screen}
• {RECV} ... {displays the data receive screen}
• {CABLE} ... {displays the cable type selection screen}
• {WAKEUP} ... {displays the wakeup setting screen}
• {CAPTURE} ... {displays the screen image capture setting
screen}
Communication parameters are fixed at the following settings.
• 3-pin serial port
• Speed (BPS): 9600 bps max. (Connected with CFX-9850G series or fx-7400G series
calculator)
115200 bps max. (Connected with another fx-CG10, fx-CG20, fx-9860GII
SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII, fx-9860G Slim
(OS 1.11), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00) or fx-9860G AU (OS
2.00) calculator)
• Parity (PARITY): NONE
• USB port
• Communication speed is in accordance with USB standards.

k Configuring the Receiver’s Wakeup Feature
When Wakeup is turned on the receiver, the receiver turns on automatically when data transfer
starts.
• When communicating between two calculators (3PIN selected as the cable type), the
receiver enters the receive mode automatically after it wakes up.
• When communication is with a computer (USB selected as the cable type), connecting the
USB cable to a computer and then to the calculator (while the calculator is turned off) will
cause the calculator to turn on and the “Select Connection Mode” dialog box to appear.
1. On the receiver’s data communication main menu, press
5(WAKEUP).
This displays the Wakeup setting screen.
• {On} ... {turns Wakeup on}
• {Off} ... {turns Wakeup off}
2. Press 1(On).
This turns on Wakeup and returns of the data communication main menu.

13-1

13

3. Turn off the receiver.
4. Connect the receiver to the sender.
5. Starting a send operation on the sender causes the receiver to turn on automatically and
performs the data transfer operation.

k Capture Set Mode
You can specify either g3p format or bmp format for screen images saved by the operation
!h(CAPTURE).
The data communication menu provides the following operations.
6(CAPTURE)1(Memory) ... Saves screen capture images in g3p format.
6(CAPTURE)2(BMP) ... Saves screen capture images in bmp format.
For details about the screen capture operation, see “Using Screen Capture” (page 1-36).

k Select Connection Mode Screen
Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear. The key operation you should perform on this screen depends on the device
currently connected to the calculator.
• 1(USB Flash) ... Mode for connecting the calculator to
a computer for data transfer. See
“To establish a connection between the
calculator and a computer” (page 13-3).
• 2(ScreenRecv) ... Mode for using the Screen Receiver
software on a Windows Vista® or
Windows® 7 computer to display the
calculator screen on the computer. For details, see the separate “Screen
Receiver User’s Guide”.
Wait until the calculator screen appears on the Screen Receiver window
before performing any calculator operation.
• 3(ScreenR(XP)) ... Mode for using the Screen Receiver software on a Windows® XP
computer to display the calculator screen on the computer.
• 4(Projector) ... Mode for connecting the calculator to a projector and projecting the
calculator screen. See “Connecting the Calculator to a Projector” (page
13-16).

Important!
The “Select Connection Mode” dialog box will not appear if you connect the USB cable to the
calculator while the busy indicator is on the display or while a graph, Geometry mode figure,
or other figure is flashing on the display. Wait until the busy indicator disappears, or perform
the required operation to stop the flashing of the graph or figure, and then try connecting the
USB cable again.

13-2

1. Performing Data Communication between the
Calculator and a Personal Computer
Establishing a USB connection between the calculator and a computer will cause the
computer to recognize the calculator’s storage memory as a mass storage drive. Connection
immediately causes main memory contents to be read into storage memory automatically,
so main memory data can be accessed from the computer. After a connection is established,
data can be transferred between the calculator and computer using computer operations only.

k Minimum Computer System Requirements
The following are the minimum requirements for a computer to exchange data with the
calculator.
• USB port
• Running one of the following operating systems.
Windows® XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows® XP Professional (32-bit, SP1 or later)
Windows Vista® (32-bit, SP1 or later)
Windows® 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)
Mac OS® X (10.5.6 or later, 10.6.2 or later)

k Connecting and Disconnecting with a Computer in the Mass Storage
Mode
Use the USB cable that comes with the calculator to connect to your computer.

Important!
Never touch the USB cable plugs and screen while a data communication operation is in
progress. Static electricity from your fingers can cause data communication to be terminated.

u To establish a connection between the calculator and a computer
1. Start up your computer.
2. After starting up your computer, use the USB cable to connect it to the calculator.

• The calculator will turn on automatically and the “Select Connection Mode” screen will
appear.

13-3

3. Press 1(USB Flash).
• The message “Preparing USB” will appear on the
calculator screen. Stand by and do not perform any
operation on the calculator. Establishing a connection
between the calculator and a computer will cause the
screen shown nearby to appear.

4. On your computer, open the calculator drive.
• The calculator drive will appear inside My Computer under Windows XP, and inside
Computer under Windows Vista or Windows 7. Use Windows Explorer to open the
calculator drive.
• Under Mac OS X, the calculator drive icon appears on the Mac desktop. Double-click the
icon to open it.
• The calculator drive represents calculator’s storage memory.
5. Perform the required operation on your computer to transfer the data.
• For details about data transfer operations, see “Transferring Data between the Calculator
and a Personal Computer” (page 13-5).

u To terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer
1. If the calculator is connected to a Windows computer, note the drive letter (E, F, G, etc.)
assigned to the calculator drive.
2. Depending on the type of operating system your computer is running, perform one of the
following operations.
• Windows: Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the toolbar in the lower right corner
of the display. On the menu that appears, select “USB mass storage device” whose letter
matches the calculator drive letter you noted in step 1 above. Check to make sure the
“Safe To Remove Hardware” message is displayed.
• Mac OS: Drag the calculator drive icon to the Eject icon (Trash icon). Check to make sure
that the calculator drive icon is no longer on your desktop.
3. The message “Updating Main Memory” will appear on the calculator screen. Stand by and
do not perform any operation on the calculator. The message “Complete!” will appear after
updating of main memory is complete. To close the message dialog box, press J.
4. Disconnect the USB cable from the calculator.

13-4

k Transferring Data between the Calculator and a Personal Computer
This section explains how to connect the calculator to the computer and open the calculator
drive on the computer to transfer data.

u Main Memory Data during a USB Connection
The contents of the @MainMem folder in the calculator drive correspond to the contents of the
calculator’s main memory. Each time you establish a connection between the calculator and a
computer, the contents of the calculator’s main memory are copied to storage memory.
If there is not enough storage memory capacity to support the copy operation, the message
“Storage Memory Full” will be displayed on the calculator and the copy operation will not be
performed. If this happens, delete files you no longer need from storage memory to increase
capacity, and then try establishing a USB connection again.
Each group in main memory is displayed as a folder in the @MainMem folder. Also, each data
item in main memory is displayed as a file in the @MainMem folder.
Main Memory group names and data item names are displayed in the @MainMem folder as
shown in the table below.
Main Memory @MainMem
Group Name Folder Name
E-CON2

ECON2

F-MEM

FMEM

@GEOM

GEOM

G-MEM

GMEM

LISTFILE

LISTFILE

MATRIX

MATRIX

@PICTPLT

@PICTPLT

Main Memory
Item Name
Econ2
SUxxx
F-MEM xx
@IMAGE

G-MEM xx
LIST xx
LISTFILE x
MAT ANS
MAT x
PICTPLOT

PROGRAM

PROGRAM



S-SHEET
V-WIN

SSHEET
VMEM

ROOT

ROOT


V-WIN x
ALPHA MEM
RECURSION
SETUP
STRING
CONICS

13-5

@MainMem File Name
ECON2.g3m
SUxxx.g3m
FMEMxx.g3m
@IMAGE.g3m
.g3m
GMEMxx.g3m
LISTxx.g3m
FILEx.g3m
MATANS.g3m
MATx.g3m
PICTPLOT.g3m
.g3m
.txt
.g3m
VMEMx.g3m
ALPHAMEM.g3m
RECUR.g3m
SETUP.g3m
STRING.g3m
CONICS.g3m

Main Memory @MainMem
Group Name Folder Name

ROOT

ROOT

Main Memory
Item Name
DYNA MEM
EQUATION
FINANCIAL
STAT
SYSTEM
TABLE
Y=DATA

@MainMem File Name
DYNA MEM.g3m
EQUATION.g3m
FINANCE.g3m
STAT.g3m
SYSTEM.g3m
TABLE.g3m
Y=DATA.g3m

u Main Memory Data Updating upon Termination of a USB Connection
While there is a USB connection between the calculator and a computer, you can use the
computer to edit the @MainMem folder contents by deleting folders and files, editing files,
adding files, etc. When you terminate the USB connection, the calculator’s main memory data
is updated with the current contents of the @MainMem folder. Note the following important
points.
• Deleting the @MainMem folder will cause all data in the calculator’s main memory to be
initialized.
• Updating the @MainMem folder affects up to three levels of folders inside the storage
memory root folder.
SMEM ← Storage memory root folder
@MainMem (Level 1)
Folder (Level 2)
Folder (Level 3) ← Updating affects files up to this
Any folders and files past Level 3 are moved to a folder named “SAVE-F” in storage memory.
• Adding a g3m file to the @MainMem folder while there is a USB connection between
the calculator and a computer will copy the data item(s) included in the g3m file to the
calculator’s main memory. For details about the main memory data item names that
correspond to the g3m file names in the @MainMem folder, see “Main Memory Data during
a USB Connection” (page 13-5). If there is no group in main memory that corresponds to the
data items included in the g3m file, a corresponding group will be created automatically and
the data items will be copied to that group.
• Depending on the data type, an overwrite confirmation message will appear if there is
already data with the same name in calculator’s main memory as the data being copied from
@MainMem folder. For information about which types of data cause a confirmation message
to appear, see the “Overwrite Check” column in the data table on page 11-3. “Yes” means
that a confirmation message is displayed, while “No” indicates that the copy operation is
performed without any confirmation message.

13-6

• If you place a file or folder that is not supported by the calculator into the @MainMem folder,
it will be transferred to a folder named “SAVE-F” in the calculator’s storage memory and will
not be shown in main memory.
• If the size of the data in the @MainMem folder exceeds the available capacity of main
memory, the message “Memory ERROR” will appear on the calculator when you terminate
the USB connection and main memory will not be updated.
• If there is an add-in file (.g3a/.g3l) in the @MainMem folder, that file will be moved to the
storage memory root directory. Note, however, that if there is already and add-in with the
same name in storage memory root directory, the existing add-in will be overwritten with the
new one, without displaying a confirmation message.
• If a text file (.txt) has been added to the @MainMem\PROGRAM folder, it will be
automatically converted to a program with same name as the file and stored in the main
memory PROGRAM group. For details about the rules that govern file names and other
conversion issues, see “Program and Text File Conversion Rules” (page 8-8).

u To transfer data between the calculator and a computer
1. Connect the calculator and computer, and open the calculator drive on the computer.
• See “To establish a connection between the calculator and a computer” (page 13-3).

2. Copy, edit, delete, or add files as desired.
• Use the same file operations that you normally do on your computer.
• For information about the folders and files in the @MainMem folder, see “Main Memory
Data during a USB Connection” (page 13-5) and “Main Memory Data Updating upon
Termination of a USB Connection” (page 13-6).
3. After you finish all the operations you want to perform, terminate the connection between
the calculator and a computer.
• See “To terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer” (page 13-4).

Note
Copying the storage memory folder to a file can cause the connection between the calculator
and computer to be dropped. If this happens, enter the Memory mode and execute an
Optimize operation (page 11-13), and then re-establish a connection between the calculator
and computer.

13-7

u To use your computer to edit a program created on the calculator
1. Use the calculator’s Program mode to create the program. (See “Chapter 8 Programming.”)
2. Connect the calculator and computer, and open the calculator drive on the computer.
3. Display the contents of the @MainMem\PROGRAM folder, and then use a text editor to
open the text file with the same name as the program you want to edit.
• If you are running Windows you could use Notepad, etc. With the Mac OS, you can use
TextEdit, etc.
4. Perform the required edits.
• For information about calculator commands and their corresponding special character
strings, see “CASIO Scientific Function Calculator Special Commands ⇔ Text Conversion
Table” (page 8-59).
5. After you are finished editing, save and close the text file.
• Save the edits under a different file name, as required. If you use Save As to save your
edits, be sure to save the new file in @MainMem\PROGRAM\.
• Be sure to save the file in ASCII or ANSI code txt format.
6. Terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer
• See “To terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer” (page 13-4).

k Installing Add-In Files
Add-in files can be installed on the calculator to give it additional functions. The following are
types of add-in files that are available.
• Add-in applications (.g3a): These files add new applications to the Main Menu.
• Add-in languages (.g3l): These files add languages to those that can be selected with the
“System Language Setting” procedure (page 12-3) for on-screen messages.
• Add-in menus (.g3l): These files add languages to those that can be selected with the
“System Language Setting” procedure (page 12-3) for function menus.

u To install an add-in file
In step 2 of the procedure under “To transfer data between the calculator and a computer”
(page 13-7), copy the add-in file (.g3a/.g3l) you want to install to the calculator drive root
directory.

13-8

k USB Connection Precautions
• Depending on the operating system your computer is running, perform one of the following
operations on the computer to terminate a connection with the calculator.
- Windows: Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the toolbar in the lower left corner of
the display. On the menu that appears, select “USB mass storage device”. Check to make
sure the “Safe To Remove Hardware” message is displayed.
- Mac OS: Drag the calculator drive to Trash. Check to make sure that the calculator drive is
no longer on your desktop.
• Never use a computer operation to format the calculator drive.
Doing so will cause a “File System ERROR” message to appear on the calculator screen
after you terminate the USB connection between the calculator and computer. When this
happens, you will not be able to start up the calculator unless you perform an Initialize All
operation, which deletes all data currently in calculator memory. For details, see “File System
ERROR” (page α-8).
• When copying a file from your computer’s local disk to the calculator drive, it may take
several minutes before copying starts. This is because copying automatically performs
optimization of the calculator’s storage memory. It does not indicate malfunction. For
information about storage memory optimization, see “Optimizing Storage Memory” (page
11-13).
• A USB connection between the calculator and a computer may be terminated automatically if
the computer enters a power save mode, sleep mode, or any other standby state.

13-9

2. Performing Data Communication between Two
Calculators
k Connecting Two Calculators
The following procedure describes how to connect two calculators with the connecting cable
that comes equipped as a standard accessory.

u To connect two calculators
1. Check to make sure that the power of both calculators is off.
2. Connect the two calculators using the cable.
3. Perform the following steps on both calculators to specify 3PIN as the cable type.
(1) From the Main Menu, enter the Link mode.
(2) Press 4(CABLE). This displays the cable type selection screen.
(3) Press 2(3PIN).
Cable

• Models that are supported for this configuration are shown below.
fx-CG10, fx-CG20, fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750GII, fx-7400GII,
fx-9860G Slim (OS 1.11), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS
2.00), CFX-9850G series

13-10

k Performing a Data Transfer Operation
Connect the two calculators and then perform the following procedures.
Receiving calculator
To set up the calculator to receive data, press 2(RECV)
while the data communication main menu is displayed.

The calculator enters a data receive standby mode and waits for data to arrive. Actual data
receive starts as soon as data is sent from the sending calculator.
Sending calculator
To set up the calculator to send data, press 1(TRANSMIT) while the data communication
main menu is displayed.
This displays a screen for specifying the data selection method.
• {SELECT} ... {selects new data}
• {CURRENT} ... {automatically selects previously selected
data*1}

*1 The previously selected data memory is cleared whenever you change to another mode.

u To send selected data items (Example: To send user data)
Press 1(SELECT) or 2(CURRENT) to display a data item selection screen.
• {SELECT} ... {selects data item where cursor is located}
• {ALL} ... {selects all data}
• {TRANSMIT} ... {sends selected data items}

Use the f and c cursor keys to move the cursor to the data item you want to select and
press 1(SELECT) to select it. Currently selected data items are marked with “ ”. Pressing
6(TRANSMIT) sends all the selected data items.
• To deselect a data item, move the cursor to it and press 1(SELECT) again.

13-11

Only items that contain data appear on the data item selection screen. If there are too many
data items to fit on a single screen, the list scrolls when you move the cursor to the bottom line
of the items on the screen.

u To execute a send operation
After selecting the data items to send, press 6(TRANSMIT). A message appears to confirm
that you want to execute the send operation.
• 1(Yes) ... sends data
• 6(No) ... returns to data selection screen

Press 1(Yes) to send the data.

• You can interrupt a data operation at any time by pressing A.
The following shows what the displays of the sending and receiving calculator look like after
the data communication operation is complete.

Press J to return to the data communication main menu.
For information about the types of data items that can be sent, see “Main Memory” (pages
11-3 and 11-4). The following explains the meanings of the “Yes” and “No” indications in the
“Overwrite Check” column on those pages.
Yes: Overwrite check is performed. If the receiving calculator already contains the same type
of data, the message below appears to ask if the existing data should be overwritten with the
new data.
Data item name

13-12

Press 1(Yes) to replace the receiving calculator’s existing data with the new data, or 6(No)
to skip to next data item.
No: Overwrite check is not performed. If the receiving calculator already contains the same
type of data, the existing data is overwritten with the new data.

k Data Communication Precautions
Note the following precautions whenever you perform data communication.
• An error occurs whenever you try to send data to a receiving calculator that is not yet
standing by to receive data. When this happens, press J to clear the error and try again,
after setting up the receiving calculator to receive data.
• An error occurs whenever the receiving calculator does not receive any data approximately
six minutes after it is set up to receive data. When this happens, press J to clear the error.
• An error occurs during data communication if the cable becomes disconnected, if the
parameters of the two calculators do not match, or if any other communication problem
occurs. When this happens, press J to clear the error, then correct the problem before
trying data communication again. If data communication is interrupted by the J key
operation or an error, any data successfully received up to the interruption will be in the
memory of the receiving calculator.
• An error occurs if the receiving calculator memory becomes full during data communication.
When this happens, press J to clear the error and delete unneeded data from the
receiving calculator to make room for the new data, and then try again.
• When sending data from the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 to an older model calculator, folders in
storage memory are not sent. In this case, send individual files (no folders).

k Exchanging Data with another Model Calculator
Though it is possible to exchange data between this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) and the
other CASIO calculator models listed under “To connect two calculators” (page 13-10), there
are certain restrictions that apply when exchanging data with an older model calculator.

u Transferring Data from this Calculator to an Older Calculator Model
Basically, only data for functions that are available on both this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20)
and the older model can be transferred.
Data for a function that is available on this calculator but not on the older model cannot be
transferred. Transferring Graph mode graph expression data (Y=DATA) from this calculator to
the fx-9860GII, for example, will cause color information to be dropped automatically, because
the fx-9860GII does not support color.

13-13

The following table shows how each type of data is handled when transferring from this
calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) to an older model CASIO calculator.
Data Item
ALPHAMEM
CONICS
DYNA
E-CON2
EQUATION
FMEM
@GEOM
GMEM
LIST n
LIST FILE n
MAT n
@PICTPLT
PROGRAM
RECUR
SETUP
SSHEET
STAT
STRING n
SYSTEM
TABLE
FINANCE
VMEM
Y=DATA

*1
◎
*2
×
◎
◎
◎
×
*2 *3
*2
*2
◎
×
*4
*2
*5
*2 *6
*2
◎
×
◎
*2
*7
*2 *3 *7

fx-9750GII
◎
*2
×
◎
◎
◎
×
*2 *3
*2
*2
◎
×
*4
*2
*5
×
*2
◎
×
◎
*2
*7
*2 *3 *7

fx-7400GII
◎
×
×
×
◎
◎
×
*2 *3
*2
*2
◎
×
*4
*2
*5
×
*2
◎
×
◎
*2
*7
*2 *3 *7

CFX-9850G
◎
*2
×
×
◎
◎
×
*2 *3
*2
*2
◎
×
*4
*2
*5
×
*2
×
×
◎
*2
*7
*2 *3 *7

◎: Sent as-is ×: Not sent
*1 fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00), fx-9860G SD
(OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00)
*2 Color data not sent.
*3 “Thin” line style changed to “Normal”.
*4 Program contents are sent as-is, without conversion.
The pixel values in the arguments of Text, PxlOn, PxlOff, Pxlchg, and PxlTest( commands
are transferred as-is. Because of this, executing a program that includes these commands
on an older calculator model will result in incorrect display or a Syntax ERROR.
*5 When a Setup item is configured to settings supported by this calculator (fx-CG10/fxCG20) but not supported by the receiving calculator, the receiving calculator’s setting is set
to its default value. If “Thin” is selected for the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 “Sketch Line” Setup item,
for example, the setting will be changed to “Normal” on the receiving calculator. Setup
items that are supported by this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) but not by the receiving
calculator are not transferred.
*6 Conditional formatting data is not sent.
*7 The V-Window dot value is recalculated in accordance with the number of screen dots of
the receiving calculator.

13-14

u Transferring Data from an Older Calculator Model to this Calculator
Almost all data produced by an older model CASIO calculator can be transferred to this
calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20).
• Some data may be converted in order to make it compatible with this calculator’s
specifications. Transferring Graph mode graph expression data (Y=DATA) from the fx9860GII to this calculator, for example, will cause the V-Window dot value to be corrected
because the displays of the two models have different numbers of dots.
• In some cases, color data may be appended to data and other adjustments may be
performed automatically. In this case, the adjustments use initial default values. Transferring
Graph mode graph expression data (Y=DATA) from the fx-9860GII to this calculator, for
example, the default color (blue) is applied for the graph color.
• Even if Wakeup is turned on (page 13-1), the Wakeup function is disabled.
The following table shows how each type of data is handled when transferring from an older
model CASIO calculator to this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20).
Data Item
ALPHAMEM, CONICS, DYNA,
EQUATION, FMEM, Geometry,
LIST n, LIST FILE n, MAT n,
RECUR, SSHEET, STRING n,
TABLE
CAPT n, PICT n, SYSTEM
E-CON2, SETUP, STAT,
FINANCE

GMEM
Program

VMEM, Y=DATA

Description
Data is transferred as-is.

Not sent.
Original data is transferred as-is. However, Setup items
that are supported by this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20)
but not by the sending calculator will be set to their initial
default values.
Original data is transferred as-is. However, the default
color is assigned to expressions.
• Pixel values specified by the Text command argument
are converted to match this calculator’s screen size.
• Pixel values specified by the PxlOn, PxlOff, Pxlchg,
PxlTest command arguments are not converted to match
this calculator’s screen size.
Original data is transferred as-is. However, the dot value
is recalculated in accordance with the number of dots for
this calculator’s (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) display.

13-15

3. Connecting the Calculator to a Projector
You can connect the calculator to a CASIO projector and project calculator screen contents
onto a screen.

k Connectable Projectors (As of September 2010)
XJ-A135, XJ-A145, XJ-A235, XJ-A245

u To project calculator screen contents from a projector
1. Use the USB cable that comes with the calculator to connect to the projector.
• Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear.
2. Press 4(Projector).

k Precautions when Connecting
• An hourglass figure may remain projected on the screen after you connect the calculator to
a projector. If this happens, performing some operation on the calculator will restore normal
display.
• If the calculator stops operating normally, disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it. If
this does not correct the problem, disconnect the USB cable, turn the projector off and then
back on, and then reconnect the USB cable.
• Connecting the calculator to a projector with the USB cable immediately after starting up
the projector may cause the projected image to appear in grayscale and not in color. If this
happens, disconnect and then reconnect the USB cable.

13-16

Chapter 14 Geometry
1. Geometry Mode Overview
The Geometry mode allows you to draw and analyze geometric objects.
From the Main Menu, enter the Geometry mode.

k Geometry Mode Menus
Unlike other modes, the Geometry mode does not have function menus along the bottom of
the screen. Instead, it uses menus named [F1] through [F6] and [OPT], like the ones shown
below.

The following is a general explanation of Geometry mode menus.
• Pressing a key that corresponds to a menu ([F1] through [F6] or [OPT]) will display the menu
for that tab.
• After displaying a menu, use e and d to move between menu screens.
• To close a menu without selecting anything, press J.

u Menu Operations in This Chapter
Menu operations are shown using the following form in this chapter: 3(Draw) – 5:Vector.
When you see this, it means you can perform either of the following two operations.
• Press 3 to display the Draw menu, use c and f to highlight “5:Vector”, and then press
w.
• Press 3 to display the Draw menu and then press f.

14

14-1

k Menu Reference
The following tables describe the menu items that appear on each of the Geometry mode
menus.

u 1(File)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Create a new file

1:New

Open a file

2:Open

Save a file under a new name

3:Save as

Display a list of functions assigned to each key

4:Key Help

u 1e(View)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Start a box zoom operation

1:Zoom Box

Enter the pan mode (page 14-35)

2:Pan

Enter the scroll mode (page 14-36)

3:Scroll

Enlarge the display image

4:Zoom In

Reduce the size of the display image

5:Zoom Out

Adjust the size of the display image so it fills the display

6:Zoom to Fit

u 2(Edit)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Undo or redo the last operation

1:Undo/Redo

Select all objects on the screen

2:Select All

Deselect all objects on the screen

3:Deselect All

Select an entire polygon (page 14-19)

4:Select Figure

Delete the currently selected object

5:Delete

Clear the screen

6:Clear All

14-2

u 3(Draw)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Plot a point

1:Point

Draw a line segment

2:Line Segment

Draw a straight line

3:Infinite Line

Draw a ray

4:Ray

Draw a vector

5:Vector

Draw a circle

6:Circle

Draw an arc

7:Arc

Draw a semi circle

8:SemiCirc (Diam)

u 3e(Draw Spec)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Draw a triangle

1:Triangle

Draw an isosceles triangle

2:Isosc Triangle

Draw a rectangle

3:Rectangle

Draw a square

4:Square

Draw a polygon

5:Polygon

Draw a regular n-gon

6:Regular n-gon

Draw a function graph

7:Function f(x)

u 4(Construct)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Construct a perpendicular bisector

1:Perp Bisector

Construct a perpendicular

2:Perpendicular

Construct a midpoint

3:Midpoint

Construct an intersection

4:Intersection

Construct an angle bisector

5:Angle Bisector

Construct a parallel

6:Parallel

Construct a tangent

7:Tangent

Attach an angle measurement to a figure

8:Attached Angle

14-3

u 5(Transform)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Reflect an object

1:Reflection

Translate an object by specified values

2:Translation

Translate an object using an existing vector

3:Trans(Sel Vec)

Rotate an object

4:Rotation

Dilate an object

5:Dilation

Rotate an object 180 degrees on a specified point

6:Symmetry

u 6(Animate)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Add animation to two selected objects

1:Add Animation

Replace the current animation assigned to two selected
objects

2:Replace Anima

Turn on trace for a point and trace the movement of the
point while animation is being executed

3:Trace

Display the animation editing screen

4:Edit Animation

Perform an animation sequence once

5:Go (once)

Perform an animation sequence repeatedly

6:Go (repeat)

Add one or more values to the animation table (page 14-62)

7:Add Table

Display the animation table

8:Display Table

u K(Option)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Input text

1:Text

Input an expression

2:Expression

Specify the number format Geometry mode measurements

3:Number Format

Unlock all measurements

4:Clr Constraint

Display all objects

5:Show All

Hide the currently selected object

6:Hide

Perform an arithmetic operation or another type of operation
using the surface area of one or more figure.

7:Area Calc

14-4

u K(Option)e(Properties)
To do this:

Select this menu item:

Move the selected object to the front

1:to the front

Move the selected object to the back

2:to the back

Move all text to the front

3:All TEXT

Adjust the lightness of the background image

4:Fade I/O

Save Geometry mode screen contents as an image (g3p
File)

5:Store Picture

k Using the Pointer
You can use the following operations to move the on-screen pointer ( ) around the display
when drawing objects, editing objects, etc.

u To move the pointer
Use the cursor keys to move the pointer around the display. Holding down a cursor key moves
the pointer at high speed.

u To make the pointer jump to a particular location
Pressing a number key (b to j) will cause the pointer to jump to the corresponding section
of the screen as shown below.
h

i

j

e

f

g

b

c

d

k Using Key Help
Pressing 1(File) – 4:Key Help or the a key will display Key Help, which provides
information the function of each key in the Geometry mode.
Use the c and f keys to navigate between the three Key Help screens.
To exit the Key Help screens, press J.

Note
The key operations shown on the Key Help screens apply to the drawing screen only.

14-5

k Managing Geometry Mode Files
This section explains how to save Geometry mode data to files, and how to manage your
files.

u To create a new file
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 1:New.
• The following dialog box will appear if you have a
drawing on the screen.

2. To clear the current drawing and create a new file, press 1(Yes).
• This will create a new file and display a blank drawing screen.

u To open an existing file
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 2:Open.
• This displays a menu of existing files.
• Pressing 6(STRGMEM) here will display the storage memory file list where you can
open a g3p file. For details, see “Displaying a Geometry Mode Screen Background
Image” (page 14-8).
2. Use c and f to move the highlighting to the file you want to open and then press w.
• The following dialog box will appear if you have a
drawing on the screen.

3. To clear the current drawing, press 1(Yes).
• This will open the file you selected in step 2.

14-6

u To delete a file
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 2:Open.
• This displays a menu of existing files.
2. Use c and f to move the highlighting to the file you want to delete and then press
1(DELETE).
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete the selected file or 6(No) to cancel the delete operation.
4. To exit the file menu, press J.

u To save a file under a different name
1. While the file you want to save is open, perform the following operation: 1(File) – 3:Save
as.
• This will display the file name input screen and
automatically switch the calculator’s keys to Alpha Lock.

2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• You can use the following characters in a file name.
- Uppercase alphabetic characters A through Z
- Numerals 0 through 9
- Braces ({ })
• After inputting the name you want, press w to save the file and return to its drawing
screen.

14-7

k Displaying a Geometry Mode Screen Background Image
In the Geometry mode, you can open an image file (g3p) and use it as a background image
for a Geometry mode drawing.
• If you open a g3p file, draw something, and then save the result to a file, the g3p file will be
saved along with the Geometry mode data.
• After opening a background image, you adjust its lightness on the display. See “Adjusting the
Lightness of the Background Image” (page 14-37).
• Once you add a background image and save it, you will not be able to change the
background image of the file or remove it.

u To open a g3p file in the Geometry mode
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 2:Open.
2. Press 6(STRGMEM).
• This displays the storage memory file list screen.
3. Use c and f to move the highlighting to the background image file you want to use and
then press w.
• If a drawing is currently on the screen, the “Clear current image?” confirmation dialog box
will appear.
4. To clear the current drawing, press 1(Yes).
• If the file does not contain any Geometry mode data, a dialog box will appear at this
point asking if you want to use the Geometry V-Window initial default value. To open the
file using the Geometry V-Window initial default value, press 1. To cancel the open file
operation, press 6.
• If the file already contains Geometry mode data, the file will open immediately.

14-8

k Saving Current Screen Contents as an Image (g3p File) in the Geometry
Mode
You can save a Geometry mode screen shot as an image (g3p) file. The saved file includes
current V-Window setting information.

u To save current screen contents as an image in picture memory
1. While the screen you want to save is displayed, perform the following operation:
K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture w(Pict [1~20]).
2. On the Store In Picture Memory screen that appears, enter a value from 1 to 20 and then
press w.
• Storing a graphic image in a memory area that already contains a graphic image replaces
the existing graphic image with the new one.

u To save current screen contents under a file name
1. While the screen you want to save is displayed, perform the following operation:
K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture cw(Save As).
2. Perform the procedure starting from step 2 under “To store a graph screen image under a
file name” (page 5-21).

14-9

k Key Functions
The figure below shows the keys that are used for Geometry mode drawing screen
operations.

Displays the
measurement box.
(Page 14-41)

Displays menus.
(Page 14-1)

Moves the pointer.

Selects, deselects,
executes.

Cancels an operation,
or returns to the
previous menu or
screen.

Selects an object to
move it. (Page 14-31)

Selects, deselects,
executes.

Selects an entire polygon.
(Valid for polygons only.)
(Page 14-19)

Deletes the currently
selected object.
(Page 14-32)

!b Adds an
animation table.
(Page 14-63)

Deselects all, cancels
an operation, deletes
all (when pressed
twice).

Causes the pointer to
jump to a particular
position. (Page 14-5)

Undoes/Redoes an
operation.
(Page 14-30)

Displays Key Help.
(Page 14-5)

Zooms in/out.
(Page 14-37)
Enters the Scroll
mode.
(Page 14-36)

14-10

Zooms the screen
image to fit the
window area.
(Page 14-37)

Selects, deselects,
executes.

2. Drawing and Editing Objects
This section explains how to perform the following operations.
• Plot points, draw line segments, polygons, etc. ([F3](Draw) menu)
• Select and deselect objects ([F2](Edit) menu)
• For a drawn object, construct a perpendicular bisector, perpendicular, etc. ([F4](Construct)
menu)
• For a drawn object, perform various transform operations ([F5](Transform) menu)
• Undo an operation, move an object, delete an object and other editing operations ([F2](Edit)
menu)

k Using the Draw Menu
Press 3(Draw) to display the Draw menu. You can use the Draw menu to plot points, and
draw line segments, triangles, polygons, and other objects.

u To plot a point
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 1:Point.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the screen where you want to plot a point and then press
w.
• This will plot a point at the pointer location.

• The
icon will remain on the display, which means you repeat step 2 to plot more points,
if you want.
3. After you are finished plotting all the points you want, press o or J to deselect the
Point tool.

Note
Some drawing tools remain after you draw something, like the Point tool. To deselect such a
tool, press o or J.

14-11

u To add a labeled point to an existing line
Note
You can use the following procedure to add a labeled point to an existing line, to a side of a
polygon, to the periphery of a circle, etc.
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 1:Point.
2. Move the pointer on the screen towards the line where you want to add the labeled point.
• This selects the line, which is indicated by “”.

→

3. Press w.
• This will add a point on the line at the pointer location.

u To draw a line segment
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 2:Line Segment.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display from where you want to draw the line
segment and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display to where you want to draw the line segment
and then press w.
• This will draw a line segment between the two points.

Note
In steps 2 and 3 of the above procedure, you can move the pointer to an existing point on the
screen and press w. This will make the existing point one of the ends of the line segment.

14-12

u To draw an infinite line
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 3:Infinite Line.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location on the display and then press w.
• This will draw a line that passes between the two
points.

u To draw a ray
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 4:Ray.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location on the display and then press w.
• This will draw a ray that starts from the first point you
selected and that passes through the second point.

u To draw a vector
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 5:Vector.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display from where you want to draw the vector and
then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display to where you want to draw the vector and
then press w.
• This draws the vector.

14-13

u To draw a circle
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 6:Circle.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the center point of the circle
to be and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the circumference of the
circle to be and then press w.
• This draws a circle. The distance between the two points you specify is the radius of the
circle.

Note
In steps 2 and 3 of the above procedure, you can move the pointer to an existing point on
the screen and press w. This will make the existing point either the center point or the
circumference point.

u To draw an arc
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 7:Arc.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the center point of the arc to
be and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the start point of the arc to
be and then press w.
4. Move the pointer to the location where you want the end point of the arc to be.

.....

5. Move the pointer and the line segment to the location on the display where you want the
end point of the arc to be and then press w.
• An arc will be drawn from the start point to the end
point, in a counterclockwise direction.

14-14

u To draw a semi circle
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 8:SemiCirc (Diam).
2. Move the pointer to the point you want to specify as one end of the semi circle diameter and
then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the point you want to specify as the
other end of the semi circle diameter.

• In accordance with the pointer movement, a circle whose diameter passes through the first
point and the current point will appear on the display. Pressing w in the following step
will draw a semi circle with a diameter that forms an arc that goes counterclockwise from
the first point you specified to the second point.
4. Press w to draw the semi circle.

u To draw a triangle
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 1:Triangle.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location.
• This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the triangle that will be
drawn.

14-15

4. Press w.
• This draws a triangle.

→

• If the location of the pointer when you press w is very close to the point you specified in
step 2, the triangle that is drawn will be the maximum size that fits in the screen.

Note
The same type of two-point selection boundary in the above procedure is also used when
drawing an isosceles triangle, rectangle, square, or regular n-gon.
In each case, the resulting object will be the maximum size that fits in the screen if the second
point specified is too close to or at the same location of the first point.

u To draw an isosceles triangle
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 2:Isosc Triangle.
2. Perform steps 2 through 4 under “To draw a triangle” (page 14-15).
• This draws an isosceles triangle.

u To draw a rectangle or a square
1. Perform either of the following operations: 3e(Draw Spec) – 3:Rectangle or
3e(Draw Spec) – 4:Square.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location.
• This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the rectangle (or
square) that will be drawn.

14-16

4. Press w.
• This draws a rectangle or square.

• If the location of the pointer when you press w is very close to the point you specified in
step 2, the object that is drawn will be the maximum size that fits in the screen.

Note
In the case of a square, each side will be the length of the shorter side of the rectangle you
specify with the selection boundary in step 3.

u To draw a polygon
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 5:Polygon.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want a vertex of the polygon to be
and then press w.
• Repeat this step as many times as required to specify the other vertices of the polygon.
3. To complete the polygon, move the pointer to the location of the first vertex and then press
w.

→

Note
If you press J in place of step 3, the figure will be finalized as-is, resulting in an unclosed
non-polygon.

14-17

u To draw a regular n-gon
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 6:Regular n-gon.
• This displays a dialog box prompting you to specify the number of sides.
2. Input a value from 3 to 12 and then press w.
3. Perform steps 2 through 4 under “To draw a triangle” (page 14-15).
• This will draw a regular n-gon using the number of sides you specified in step 2.

u To draw a function
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 7:Function f(x).
• This causes the Function dialog box to appear.
2. Input the function.
3. Press w to draw it.

→

Note
• The only graph type that can be drawn is Y=f(x).
• The angle unit of the graph that is drawn is always Rad, regardless of the Angle setting on
the Setup screen.

14-18

k Selecting and Deselecting Objects
Before you can edit (move or delete) an object or create a figure using an object, you first
need to select part of it or all of it. This section explains how to select and deselect objects.

u To select a particular object
1. If any tool icon is in the upper right corner of the screen, press J or o to deselect the
tool.
2. Move the pointer close to the object you want to select.
• This will cause one or more marks to appear on the object. At this time the object will
begin to flash. Note that the object will not flash if it is a point and a mark is displayed
on the point.
3. Press w.
• This will cause the to change to k and will change the outline of the object to become a
thick line, which indicates that the object is selected.

→

• Now you can repeat steps 2 and 3 to select other objects, if you want.

u To select an entire polygon
1. If any tool icon is in the upper right corner of the screen, press J or o to deselect the
tool.
2. Move the pointer close to the object you want to select.
• This will cause marks to appear on some part
(vertex, side, etc.) of the object.

14-19

3. Press x or perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 4:Select Figure.
• This selects the entire object.

u To deselect a particular object
1. If any tool icon is in the upper right corner of the screen, press J or o to deselect the
tool.
2. Move the pointer close to the object you want to deselect.
• This will cause the k marks to become highlighted. At this time the object will begin to
flash. Note that the object will not flash if it is a point and a mark is displayed on the
point.

→

3. Press w.

• This will deselect the object, which causes the k mark(s) to disappear.

u To select all objects on the screen
Perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 2:Select All.

u To deselect all objects on the screen
Press o or perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 3:Deselect All.

14-20

k Specifying the Color and Line Type of a Displayed Object
You can use the procedure below to specify the color and line type for the outline of a
displayed figure, the fill color inside a figure, or the color of text, labels, and other non-figure
objects.

u To specify the color and line type of all the displayed objects
1. Perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 2:Select All.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the dialog box shown below.

• The dialog box will show only supported settings, which depend on the composition of the
selected object.
3. Configure the above dialog box with the following settings.
To specify this:

Perform this operation:

Specify the text color

Press b(Char Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.

Specify the line type

Press c(Line Style) and then press one of the following
keys: b(Norm), c(Thick), f(Thin).

Specify the line color

Press d(Line Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.

Specify the figure fill color

Press e(Area Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color. To specify no fill color, press
A(Clear).

Specify the lightness of the
figure fill color

Press f(Paint Style) and then press b(Normal) or
c(Lighter).

14-21

4. To apply the settings you configure, return to the dialog box in step 2 of this procedure and
then press J.

→

u To specifying the color and line type of a particular object
1. Use the procedure under “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” (page 14-19) to select the
object whose color and/or line type you want to specify.
2. Press !f(FORMAT).
• This displays a dialog box that shows supported settings, which depend on the
composition of the selected object.
3. Perform the procedure starting from step 3 under “To specify the color and line type of all
the displayed objects” (page 14-21).

k Using the Construct Menu
Press 4(Construct) to display the Construct menu. You can use the Construct menu to
construct various types of geometric objects, such as a perpendicular bisector, parallel, angle
bisector, etc.

u To construct a perpendicular bisector
1. Draw a line segment and select it.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 1:Perp Bisector.
• This will draw the perpendicular bisector of the line segment you selected.

→

Note
You can perform a perpendicular bisector construct operation while a single line segment, one
side of a polygon, or two points are selected on the screen.

14-22

u To construct a perpendicular
1. Draw a line segment, plot a point, and select the line and point.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 2:Perpendicular.
• This will draw a perpendicular to the selected line segment and passes through the
selected point.

→

Note
You can perform a perpendicular construct operation while a single line segment and single
point, a single line and single point, a single ray and a single point, a single vector and a single
point, or one side of a polygon and a single point are selected on the screen.

u To construct a midpoint
1. Draw a line segment and select it.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 3:Midpoint.
• This will plot the midpoint of the line segment you selected.

→

Note
You can perform a midpoint construct operation while a single line segment, one side of a
polygon, or two points are selected on the screen.

14-23

u To construct the point of intersection of two lines
1. Draw to intersecting line segments and select them.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 4:Intersection.
• This plots the point where the two line segments intersect.

→

Note
You can construct the point of intersection of two lines while two of any of the following objects
(two of the same object or two different objects) are selected on the screen: line segment, line,
rays, vector, side of a polygon, circle, or arc.

u To construct an angle bisector
1. Draw a triangle and select two of its sides.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 5:Angle Bisector.
• This draws the bisector of the angle formed by the two sides of the triangle that you
selected.

→

Note
• You can perform an angle bisector construct operation while two of any of the following
objects (two of the same object or two different objects) are selected on the screen: line
segment, line, ray, vector, or one side of a polygon.
• If the two objects you select are intersecting, the angle bisector construct operation will
construct two angle bisectors.

14-24

u To construct a parallel
1. Draw a line segment, plot a point, and select the line and point.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 6:Parallel.
• This will draw an infinite line that is parallel to the selected line segment and passes
through the selected point. Marks ( ) appear on both the line segment and the infinite line
to indicate they are parallel.

→

Note
You can perform a parallel construct operation while any of the following combination objects
is selected.
• A single line segment and a single point, a single line and a single point, a single ray and a
single point, a single vector and a single point
• One side of a polygon and a single point

u To construct a tangent
1. Draw a circle.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 7:Tangent.
• This will cause the message “Select Curve” to appear.
3. Move the pointer close to the location on the circle where you want to construct the tangent.
• Move the pointer towards the circle until

marks appear on it.

4. Press w.
• This will draw a line that is tangent to the circle at the location you selected with the
pointer.

→

Note
You can perform the tangent construct operation while a circle, semi circle, arc, or function
graph is selected.

14-25

u To attach an angle measurement to a figure
1. Draw a triangle and select two of its sides.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 8:Attached Angle.
• This attaches the angle measurement to the figure.

→

• While the “Select Display Position” message is displayed, you can use the cursor keys to
specify which angle measurement is displayed for the two selected sides.

→

→

→

3. To view the angle measurement, press w.

k Using the Transform Menu
Press 5(Transform) to display the Transform menu. You can use the Transform menu to
perform various transform operations, such as object reflection, object rotation, etc.

u To reflect an object
1. Draw the object you want to reflect. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Draw a line segment that represents the axis of the reflection.
3. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 1:Reflection.
• This will cause the message “Select Axis” to appear.
4. Move the pointer close to the line segment that you want to use as the axis of the reflection.
• Move the pointer towards the line segment until

14-26

marks appears on it.

5. Press w.
• This reflects the object using the line segment as the axis.

→

→

Note
You can specify a line segment, line, ray, one side of a polygon, or the x-axis or y-axis as the
axis of reflection.

u To translate an object by specified values
1. Draw the object you want to translate. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 2:Translation.
• This displays the Translation screen.
3. Input vector format values to specify the distance of parallel translation.
• The value in line 1 is the translation distance along the X-axis, while the value in line 2 is
the distance along the Y-axis.
4. After the values are the way you want, press w.
• This performs parallel translation of the object by the distance specified by the values you
input in step 3.

→

→

Note
If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be translated.

u To translate an object using an existing vector
1. Draw the object you want to translate. Here, we will use a triangle. Next, draw the vector
you want to use for parallel translation.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 3:Trans(Sel Vec).
• This will cause the message “Select Vector” to appear.
3. Move the pointer close to the vector you want to use for the parallel translation.
• Move the pointer towards the vector until

14-27

marks appears on it.

4. Press w.
• This will perform parallel translation of the original object in the direction of the vector you
selected.

→

→

Note
If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be translated.

u To rotate an object
1. Draw the object you want to rotate. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 4:Rotation.
• This will cause the message “Sel Rotation Center” to appear.
3. Move the pointer to the location you want to specify as the center of rotation.
4. Press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the angle of rotation.
5. Input the angle of rotation (counterclockwise) in degrees and then press w.
• This will draw the original object, rotated the specified amount.

→

→

Note
If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be rotated.

u To dilate an object
1. Draw the object you want to dilate. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 5:Dilation.
• This will cause the message “Sel Dilation Center” to appear.
• See the figure in the notes below for details about meanings of the terms used during the
dilation operation.
3. Move the pointer to the location you want to specify as the center of dilation.
4. Press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the dilation scale.

14-28

5. Input a scale value in the range of 0.1 < | x | < 10 and then press w.
• This will draw a resized version of the original object.

→

→

Note
• If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be dilated.
• The following figure illustrates the meanings of the terms used in the above procedure.

Center of
Dilation
Scale: –1

Original
Scale: 0.5 Object

Scale: 2

u To rotate a figure 180 degrees on a specified point
1. Draw the figure you want to rotate and select it. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 6:Symmetry.
• This will cause the message “Select Center Point” to appear.
3. Move the pointer to the point you want to use as the center point of the rotation and then
press w.
• This will draw the figure rotated 180 degrees on the selected point. In addition, a point is
plotted at the center point.

→

14-29

k Undoing and Redoing an Operation
The Undo command lets you undo the last operation you performed, while Redo lets you
restore an operation you have undone.

u To undo the last operation you performed
Immediately after performing the operation you want to undo, press * or perform the
following operation: 2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo.

Important!
Note that the following operations cannot be undone.
• Clear all objects operation: 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All (page 14-32).
• View Window setting configuration (page 14-35)
• Zoom operation (page 14-36)
• Scroll operation (page 14-36)
• Pan operation (page 14-35)
• Setup change (page 14-33)

u To redo an operation
Immediately after undoing the operation, press * or perform the following operation:
2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo.

k Moving and Deleting an Object
Before you can move or delete an object, you first need to select it. For details, see “Selecting
and Deselecting Objects” (page 14-19).

u To move an object
Note
Sometimes you may find that an object will not move the way you want it to. If this happens,
try locking the part(s) of the object that you do not want to move (page 14-47), or temporarily
unlock all objects (Clr Constraint, page 14-48).
1. Select the object you want to move.
• If you want to move only one of the vertices of a triangle for example, select the vertex. To
move only one side of the triangle, select the side.

One vertex selected

One side selected

14-30

Three sides selected

2. Press v.
• This causes the
icon to appear in the upper right corner of the screen and the pointer
to change from to . Also, a rectangle will enclose the object that you selected in step
1.

One vertex selected

One side selected

Three sides selected

3. Use the cursor keys to move the object in the direction you want.
• The rectangle will move in corresponding direction.

One vertex selected

One side selected

Three sides selected

4. To move the object to the current location of the rectangle, press w.

One vertex selected

One side selected

Three sides selected

Note
If you press v when nothing is selected on the screen, the pointer will change to a
which you can use to pan (shift) the entire screen.

→

→

14-31

,

u To delete an object
1. Select the object you want to delete.
• If you want to delete only one of the vertices of a triangle for example, select the vertex.
To delete only one side of the triangle, select the side.
2. Press D or perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 5:Delete.
• This deletes the selected object.

u To delete all objects on the screen
1. Perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All.
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.

Important!
Pressing 1(Yes) in the following step will delete all the objects currently on the screen.
This operation cannot be undone.
2. Press 1(Yes) to delete all the objects on the screen or 6(No) to cancel the delete
operation.

Note
You can also delete all objects by pressing o twice while nothing is selected on the screen.

k Hiding and Showing Objects
Use the following operations to hide specific objects and to show all currently hidden objects.

u To hide an object
1. Select the object you want to hide.
2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 6:Hide.
• This hides the selected objects.

u To show all hidden objects
Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 5:Show All. This shows all currently hidden
objects.

k Changing the Display Priority of Objects
Basically, objects you draw in the Geometry mode are stacked in the order they are drawn
(newest drawing on top). You can use the operations in this section to move drawn object
upwards or downwards in the stack. You also can move all text to the front, if you want.
• To move a particular object to the front: K(Option)e(Properties) – 1:to the front.
• To move a particular object to the back: K(Option)e(Properties) – 2:to the back.
• To move all text to the front: K(Option)e(Properties) – 3:All TEXT.

14-32

3. Controlling the Appearance of the Geometry
Window
This section provides information about how to control the appearance of the screen by
scrolling or zooming, and by showing or hiding axes and the grid.

Important!
Settings you configure on the Geometry mode Setup screen are applied in the Geometry
mode only. Even if another mode has settings of the same name, the Geometry mode
settings will not affect them. Conversely, changing setting with the same name in another
mode will not affect the Geometry mode settings.

k Displaying the Axes and Grid
You can display axes and grid points (or grid lines) on the Geometry mode screen. You also
can specify the pitch (spacing) of the grid points and lines.

→

Axes: On, Grid: On

Axes: Scale, Grid: Line

u To specify the axis and grid settings
1. Press !m(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Grid” and then use the following operations to
configure the settings you want.
To select this setting:

Press this key:

Show grid points

1(On)

Hide the grid

2(Off)

Show grid lines

3(Line)

• If you select Off to hide the grid, you can skip steps 3 and 4.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Grid Space” and then press 1(Space).
4. On the dialog box that appears, enter a value to specify the pitch of the grid and then press
w.
• You can specify a value from 0.01 to 1000, in increments of 0.01.

14-33

5. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Axes” and then use the following operations to
configure the settings you want.
To select this setting:

Press this key:

Show on-screen axes

1(On)

Hide on-screen axes

2(Off)

Show on-screen axes and scale values

3(Scale)

6. After the setting is the way you want, press J.

k Specifying Angle and Length Display Units
You can use the procedure in this section to show or hide the units of angle and length values.
You also can specify which units should be used for angle and length values.
Angle unit: Deg, Rad
Length: mm, cm, m, km, inch, feet, yard, mile

→

Angle: Rad, Angle Unit: On

Length Unit: On (mm)

u To specify angle and length display units
1. Press !m(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
2. Perform the following operations to configure the settings you want.
To select this setting:

Perform this operation:

Degrees for display and
calculation angle unit

Highlight “Angle” and then press 1(Deg).

Radians for display and
calculation angle unit

Highlight “Angle” and then press 2(Rad).

Show unit for angle values

Highlight “Angle Unit” and then press 1(On).

Hide unit for angle values

Highlight “Angle Unit” and then press 2(Off).

Show unit for length values

1. Highlight “Length Unit” and then press 1(On).
2. When the dialog box appears, use keys b
through i to specify the length unit.

Hide unit for length values

Highlight “Length Unit” and then press 2(Off).

3. After the setting is the way you want, press J.

14-34

k Configuring View Window Settings
You can configure View Window settings to specify the coordinates of the screen’s left edge
(Xmin) and right edges (Xmax). The length of the y-axis is configured automatically using a
ratio of 1:2 (y-axis:x-axis), but you can specify what part of the y-axis is in the middle of the
screen (Ymid).

Ymid

Xmin

Xmax

u To configure View Window settings
1. Perform the following operation to display the View
Window screen: !3(V-WIN).

2. Input values for Xmin, Xmax, and Ymid.
• If you want to return these settings to their initial defaults, press 1(INITIAL).
3. After all the settings are the way you want, press J.

k Using Pan and Scroll to Shift the Display Image
There are two methods available for shifting the contents of the screen. In addition to scrolling,
you can also use pan, which lets you grab a specific point on the screen and shift it to the
position you want.

u To pan the screen
1. Perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 2:Pan.
• This enters the Pan mode, which is indicated by the
the screen.

icon in the upper right corner of

2. Move the pointer to the location on the screen you want to grab and then press w.
• This causes the pointer to change from

to

.

3. Use the cursor keys to shift the screen in the direction you want.

14-35

4. To exit the Pan mode, press J.

→

Note
In the Pan mode, each press of w toggles the shape of the pointer between and . While
the pointer is displayed, you can use the cursor keys to move it to another location on the
screen. Pressing the cursor keys while the
pointer is displayed will shift (pan) the screen
contents.

u To scroll the screen
1. Press . or perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 3:Scroll.
• This enters the Scroll mode, which is indicated by the
icon in the upper right corner of
the screen. The pointer disappears from the screen at this time.
2. Use the cursor keys to scroll the screen in the direction you want.
3. To exit the Scroll mode, press J.

k Zooming
The Geometry mode provides you with a selection of zoom commands that you can use to
enlarge or reduce an entire screen image or a specific area of an object.

u To zoom using the zoom box
1. Perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 1:Zoom Box.
• This causes the

icon to appear in the upper right corner of the screen.

2. Move the pointer to the location on the display on one edge of the area you want to select
as the zoom box area and then press w.
3. Move the pointer in the direction of the opposite edges of the zoom box area.
• As you do, the calculator will display a selection boundary that will expand as you move
the pointer.
4. After selecting the zoom box area you want, press w.
• The area within the zoom box area expands to fill the entire screen.

→

14-36

u To zoom in and out
To double the size of the displayed image, press + or perform the following operation:
1e(View) – 4:Zoom In.
To halve the size of the displayed image, press - or perform the following operation:
1e(View) – 5:Zoom Out.

u To zoom the screen image to fit the window area
Press - or perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 6:Zoom to Fit.
• This will enlarge or reduce the currently display image so it fills the screen.

→

Note
The above operation does not apply in the case of a graph drawn using 3e(Draw Spec)
7: Function f(x).

k Adjusting the Lightness of the Background Image
You can adjust the lightness of the background image while a g3p file is open in the Geometry
mode. To adjust image lightness, press K(Option)e(Properties) 4:Fade I/O and then
perform the procedure from step 2 under “To adjust the lightness (Fade I/O) of the background
image” (page 5-12).

4. Using Text and Labels in a Screen Image
You can use the procedures in this section to insert text into a screen image. You can also edit
the labels that the calculator inserts automatically for objects, and add labels to objects.

k Inserting Text into Screen Images
You can use the following procedure to insert text into a screen image and to edit existing text.

u To insert text into a screen image
1. Move the pointer to the location on the screen where you want to insert the text.
2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 1:Text.
• This will display a text input dialog box and automatically switch the calculator’s keys to
Alpha Lock.

14-37

3. Input up to 31 characters of text and then press w.
• The text you input is inserted into the screen image at the location of the pointer.

→

4. Now you can move the text to another location on the screen, if you want.
• For details, see “To move an object” (page 14-30).

→

u To edit screen text
1. Select the text you want to edit.
2. Press J.
• This displays the measurement box at the bottom of the screen.
3. Press w.
• This displays the text input dialog box.
4. Edit the text and then press w.
• This causes the newly edited text to appear on the screen.

→

5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

14-38

k Adding or Modifying a Label
Label operations are explained in this section using a triangle. In the first example we modify
an existing label, while in the second example we add a label to one side of the triangle.

u To modify an existing label
1. On the triangle, select the vertex whose label you want to
change. In this example we will select point A.

2. Press J.
• This displays the measurement box at the bottom of the
screen.

3. Press d to highlight the up arrow button on the left side of the measurement box and then
press w.
• This displays an icon palette.

4. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the
press w.

icon on the icon palette and then

5. Press e to move the highlighting back to the measurement box and then press w.
• This will display a label editing dialog box and
automatically switch the calculator’s keys to Alpha Lock.

14-39

6. Input up to 14 characters for the label text and then press w.
• This will modify the label.

→

7. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

u To add a new label
1. Select the side of the triangle to which you want to add
the label.

2. Press J to display the measurement box.
3. Press d to highlight the up arrow button on the left side of the measurement box and then
press w.
• This displays an icon palette.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the
press w.

icon on the icon palette and then

5. Press e to move the highlighting back to the measurement box and then press w.
• This will display the label edit dialog box.
6. Input up to 14 characters for the new label text and then press w.
• This will add the label.

→

7. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

14-40

5. Using the Measurement Box
Pressing J displays a measurement box at the bottom of the screen as shown below.

Measurement Box
You can use the measurement box to perform the following operations.

View the measurements of an object
Displaying the measurement box and selecting an object displays combinations of the
following measurements, depending on the type of object you select: coordinates, distance/
length, slope, equation, vector, radius, circumference, perimeter, area, angle, supplementary
angle, tangency, congruence, incidence, or point on curve.

Specify the measurement of part of an object
After you display the measurement box, you can select part of an object and then change
numeric values for the applicable measurement. You can specify the coordinates of a point,
the length of a line segment (distance between endpoints), the angle formed by two lines, etc.

Lock the measurement of part of an object
After you display the measurement box, you can select part of an object and then lock the
applicable measurement. You can lock the coordinates of a point, the length of a line segment,
the angle formed by two lines, etc.

k Viewing the Measurements of an Object
The type of information that appears in the measurement box depends on the object that is
currently selected on the display. If a line segment is selected, for example, the measurement
box shows the distance, slope, or the equation for that line. You can specify the type of
information you want to view by highlighting the up arrow button to the left of the measurement
box, pressing the w (or f) key, and then using the cursor keys to highlight the appropriate
icon on the icon palette that appears.

14-41

The following table describes the information that appears when you highlight each icon, and
explains when each icon is available for selection.
Icon

Icon Name

This icon appears
when this is selected:

Highlighting this icon
displays:

Lockable

Coordinates

A single point

Coordinates of the point

Yes

Distance/
length

Two points on one object
or two different objects,
or a single line segment
or a vector

Distance between two
points, length of a line
segment or vector

Yes

Slope

Single line, ray, line
segment, or vector

Slope of the line, ray,
line segment or vector

Yes

Equation

Any single line or line
segment, ray, circle,
semi circle, arc or
function graph

Function of the object
(using rectangular
coordinates)

No

Expression

A single expression
(“EXPR=” object)

Calculation formula

No

Vector

A single vector

Vector components

Yes

Radius

A single circle, semi
circle or arc

Radius of circle, semi
circle or arc

Yes

Circumference

A single circle, semi
circle or arc

Length of the
circumference

No*3

Perimeter

A single polygon

Sum of the lengths of the
sides

Area

Any three points, a
single circle, semi circle,
arc, or polygon

Area

No*3

Two lines, line segments,
rays, or vectors*2 in any
combination

Angle and its
supplement formed by
the two objects

Yes

Two circles or arcs, line
and circle, or a line and
arc

Whether the two items
are tangent

Yes

Angle*1
Supplementary
Angle*1
Tangency

No

*1 The angle and supplementary angle is always displayed as degrees.
*2 When two vectors are selected, the angle that is no the angle formed mathematically by the
two vectors. It merely indicates the simple angle that would be formed if the vectors were
two lines.
*3 The circle itself can be locked.

14-42

Icon

This icon appears
when this is selected:

Highlighting this icon
displays:

Lockable

Congruence

Two line segments

Whether the line
segments are the same
length

Yes

Incidence

Point and a line, arc,
circle or a vector

Whether the point is on
the line/curve

Yes

Rotation angle

Two points created by
the 5 – 4:Rotation
command

Angle of rotation

No

Scale of
dilation

Two points created by
the 5 – 5:Dilation
command

Scale of dilation

No

Label/Text

A point that has a label
or an object that can be
named

Label text

No

Icon Name

You can use the measurement box to determine certain measurements.
The first example below shows how to view the measurements of a line segment. In the
second example, three points are selected on the screen and the measurement box shows the
area of the triangle formed by them.

u To view the measurements of a line segment
1. Draw a line segment and select it.
2. Press J to display the measurement box.
• This displays the length of the line segment.

3. Press d to highlight the up arrow button on the left side of the measurement box and then
press w.
• This displays an icon palette.

14-43

4. Select the icons on the icon palette to display other measurements.
• In the case of the line segment, for example, you can view its length, slope, and equation.

Slope

Equation

5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

u To display the area of a rectangular area
You can use the measurement box to display the area of a triangle formed by any three points
you select on the display.
Example:

To use the rectangle ABCD to determine the areas of the triangles
formed by points A, D, and B, and points A, D, and C

1. Draw the rectangle.
2. Select points A, D, and B.
3. Press J.
• This causes the area of the triangle ADB to appear in
the measurement box.

4. To make the drawing screen active, press J.
• This causes the measurement box to become
unhighlighted and the pointer to reappear on the
drawing screen.

5. Press o to deselect the current points and then select points A, D, and C.
• This causes the area of the triangle ADC to appear in
the measurement box. The above procedure shows that
the areas of the two triangles are the same.

6. To close the measurement box, press J.

14-44

Note
A value that shows the area of an object whose lines intersect is indicated by double asterisks
(``) to the left of the value. This indicates that the value may not indicate the correct area.

k Specifying a Measurement of an Object
In the following examples, we specify the angle of a triangle and the length of one side of a
triangle.

u To specify the angle of a triangle
1. Draw a triangle.
2. Select side AC and then select side BC.
3. Press J to display the measurement box.
• This displays the size of ∠ACB (in degrees) in the
measurement box.

4. Input the value you want to specify for ∠ACB (in degrees) into the measurement box and
then press w.
• In this example we input 90, which makes ∠ACB 90 degrees.

→

5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

14-45

Note
• Performing step 5 in the above procedure not only changes the measurement value, it
also locks the measurement. For details about locking and unlocking measurements, see
“Locking or Unlocking a Measurement of an Object” (page 14-47).
• Specifying a value can change an object in a way that is unexpected. If this happens, try
locking part(s) of the object (page 14-47) or temporarily unlock all objects (Clr Constraint,
page 14-48).

u To specify the length of one side of a triangle
Note
• Specifying any one of the following measurements for the first time in the file you are editing
(or immediately after an all clear operation: 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All) will cause the resulting
object to be resized so it fits within the display area.
- Length of one side of a triangle
- Length of a line segment or vector
- Length of one side of a rectangle, square, polygon, or regular n-gon
- Circumference of a circle or length of an arc
View Window settings will be reconfigured automatically so the size of the object on the
display may not appear to change very much.
The following example shows what happens when the length of the base of a triangle drawn
with default View Window settings (with a screen width of 10.7) is changed to 120.

→

View Window settings are reconfigured in order to ensure that specifying a measurement of
an object does not make it too bit to fit on the screen or too small to see. Note that all other
objects currently on the screen also will be resized by the same amount at the object whose
measurement you are specifying.
• Once you specify one measurement of an object, it will not be resized further if you specify
another of its measurements.

14-46

k Locking or Unlocking a Measurement of an Object
By “locking a measurement” we mean that the corresponding object cannot be moved. For
example, if we lock a point to a circle and move the circle, the point will also move.

u To lock or unlock a measurement
The icon to the right of the measurement box indicates whether a measurement is locked or
unlocked.
Measurement is unlocked.
Measurement is locked.

u To lock a particular measurement
You can lock a particular measurement by performing any one of the following operations.
• Perform the procedure under “Specifying a Measurement of an Object” (page 14-45) to
specify the measurement. This will cause the specified measurement to become locked
automatically.

→

• If the icon to the right of the measurement box is
press w.

, move the highlighting to the icon and

→

• Move the highlighting to the up arrow button to the right of the
menu that appears, select [Lock] and then press w.

→

14-47

icon and press w. On the

Note
• Some measurements cannot be locked. For details, see the “Lockable” column in the table
under “Viewing the Measurements of an Object” (page 14-41).

u To unlock a particular measurement
You can unlock a particular measurement by performing any one of the following operations.
• If the icon to the right of the measurement box is
press w.

, move the highlighting to the icon and

• Move the highlighting to the up arrow button to the right of the
On the menu that appears, select [Unlock] and then press w.

icon and press w.

u To unlock all objects on the screen
Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 4:Clr Constraint.
This unlocks all locked settings.

Note
The above operation unlocks both measurements you locked manually, as well as objects that
are locked automatically whenever they are drawn. For example, the above operation unlocks
all of the following lock conditions.
• The lock that is applied when you draw a rectangle that keeps its opposing sides equal
(opposing side congruence lock)
• The lock that is applied when you draw an isosceles triangle (ABC) that keeps side AB and
side BC equal (side AB and side BC congruence lock)
• The lock that is applied when you draw an infinite line that keeps the line passing through
two points (point A and point B) (infinite line and point A, B incidence lock)
• The relationship between the line segment and perpendicular bisector that is formed when
you select a line segment and perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 1:Perp
Bisector.
• The (locked) similarities of objects when you select the objects and perform the following
operation: 5(Transform) – 5:Dilation.

14-48

k Pasting Measurements into a Screen Image
You can use the procedures in this section to paste object measurements into the image on
the screen. The measurements change dynamically as you manipulate the object.
The following types of measurements can be pasted into a screen image: coordinates,
distance/length, slope, equation, vector components, radius, circumference, perimeter, area,
angle, supplementary angle.

u To paste a measurement into a screen image
Example:

To paste an internal angle measurement into a screen image

1. Draw a triangle and select two of its sides.

2. Press J to display the measurement box.

3. Press e to highlight the up arrow button on the right side of the measurement box and
then press w.
• This will display a menu.

4. Use f to move the highlighting to [Paste] and then press w.
• This will cause the measurement in the measurement box to be pasted into the screen
image. At this time, the pasted measurement text is selected.

→

14-49

5. Move the text to another location on the screen, if you want.
• Press v and then use the cursor keys to move the pasted measurement around the
screen. For details, see “To move an object” (page 14-30).

→

Note
You can also paste the measurement that is currently in the measurement box into the screen
image by pressing !j(PASTE) while the measurement box is highlighted in step 2 of the
above procedure.

k Editing a Measurement Type Tag
When you paste a measurement into a screen image using the “To paste a measurement
into a screen image” procedure on page 14-49, a measurement type tag (text or a symbol) is
appended in front of the measurement value to indicate the measurement type.
Examples:

Length
Angle (Internal)
Angle (Supplementary)

You can edit or delete the measurement type tag as required.

u To edit a measurement type tag
1. Select the measurement whose type tag you want to edit and then press J.
• This will display the measurement box and display the
type tag of the selected measurement inside it.

2. Press w.
• This will display the label edit dialog box.

14-50

3. Input up to 14 characters for the label type tag.
• To delete the label type tag, press o.
4. Press w.
• This changes the measurement, which is highlighted on
the display.

5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

k Displaying the Result of a Calculation that Uses On-screen
Measurement Values
You can use the procedure in this section to perform calculations using the angle value, line
length, and other measurement values attached to an object, and display the result on the
screen.

u To display the result of a calculation that uses on-screen measurement
values
Example:

With line segment AB and line segment CD (point C being on AB) drawn
on the display as shown here, calculate the sum of ∠ACD and ∠DCB,
and display the result on the screen. (54.72 + 125.28 = 180.00)
• For information about displaying measurement values of ∠ACD and ∠DCB,
see “Pasting Measurements into a Screen Image” (page 14-49).

14-51

1. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 2:Expression.
• This will display “EXPR=” at the pointer location and display the measurement box.
• The above will also display labels for each measurement currently on the screen.

Labels

2. Now you can use the labels to specify measurement values in the calculation you input in
the measurement box.
• To input a measurement value in the measurement box, input the at sign (@) followed by
the numeric label of the value: @1, @2, etc. Since we want to calculate the sum of angles
DCB (@1) and ACD (@2) here, you would input the following: @1+@2.
• You can input “@” by pressing 1.

3. After inputting the calculation expression, press w.
• The calculation result is displayed to the right of
“EXPR=”.

Note
When a measurement is a coordinate or vector component, the label format becomes, “@1X”,
“@1Y”, etc. “@1X” indicates the x-value of a coordinate or the x-component value of a vector,
while “@1Y” indicates the y-value of a coordinate or the y-component value of a vector.

14-52

k Calculation Using the Surface Area of Displayed Figures
You can use the procedures in this section to perform calculations using the surface area of
figures, and display both the expression and calculation results. For example, calculation of
the sum of the surface areas of triangle ABC and triangle A’B’C’ can be displayed as shown
below.

Figures that can be specified for a calculation are those with fill colors (those whose Area
Color is anything other than “Clear”). For information about the Area Color setting, see
“Specifying the Color and Line Type of a Displayed Object” (page 14-21).

u To perform a calculation using the surface area of displayed figures
Example:

To calculate the sum of the surface areas of two displayed triangles,
and display the expression and calculation results

1. Draw the triangles, and then specify blue for the Area
Color of one, and red for the Area Color of the other.

2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 7:Area Calc.
• This display the measurement box with one of the triangles highlighted. The highlighted
figure is the one that is currently selected for surface area calculation. You can use d
and e to move the highlighting between the two figures.
3. Select the first figure to be calculated (the left one in this example) and then press w.
• This will highlight the measurement box, indicating that
the contents of the box can be edited.
• “@1 DABC” appears on the left triangle, and “@1” (the
symbol for DABC) is input into the measurement box.

14-53

4. Press +.

5. Press f to return the editing focus to the drawing screen from the measurement box, and
then press ew to select the other triangle on the right side of the screen.
• “@2 DA’B’C’ ” appears on the right triangle, and “@2”
(the symbol for DA’B’C’) is input into the measurement
box.

6. Press w.
• This causes the calculation expression DABC+DA’B’C’
to appear at the top of the screen.

7. Press J to close the measurement box.
• Now you can move the text on the screen as you like.
• For more information, see “To move an object” (page 14-30).

14-54

k Specifying the Number Format of a Measurement
You can specify the number format for each measurement on the screen.

Note
• The initial default number format is “Fix2”. For details about number formats, see “Specifying
the Angle Unit and Display Format” (page 2-12).
• Regardless of the current number format setting, integer values are always displayed with
their decimal parts cut off.

u To specify the number format of a measurement
Example:

To specify one decimal places for measurement values

1. Select the measurement whose number format you want
to change.

2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 3:Number Format.
• This displays the Number Format dialog box.
3. Move the highlighting to the number format you want. Since we want to specify one decimal
places, we will select “Fix1” here.
4. Press w.

→

14-55

6. Working with Animations
An animation consists of one or more point/curve pairs, in which the curve can be a line
segment, circle, semi circle, arc, or function. You build an animation by selecting a point/curve
pair and then adding it to an animation.

k Creating and Running an Animation
u To add an animation and run it
Example:

To animate a point around a circle

1. Plot a point and draw a circle, and select them.

2. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation.
• This will add an animation effect that causes a point to
move along the circumference of the circle.

3. Perform either of the following operations: 6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) or 6(Animate) –
6:Go (repeat).
• This cause the point to move along the circumference of the circle.

→

4. To stop the animation, press J or o.

14-56

...

Note
• You can repeat the above procedure to create multiple points that move simultaneously.
Try this:
- Draw a line segment and plot another point.
- Select the line segment and the point.
- Repeat steps 2 and 3 above.
Notice that both animations go at the same time!
• To start a new animation, perform the procedure under “To replace the current animation
with a new one” below.

u To replace the current animation with a new one
1. Select the point and curve for the new animation.
2. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 2:Replace Anima.
• This discards the current animations and sets up an animation for a new point and curve
set.
3. To execute the new animation, perform either of the following operations:
6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) or 6(Animate) – 6:Go (repeat)
4. To stop the animation, press J or o.

u To trace a locus of points
Note
Using trace leaves a trail of points when the animation is run.
Example:

To use the Trace command to draw a parabola

A parabola is the locus of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix).
Use the Trace command to draw a parabola using a line segment (AB) as the directrix and a
point (C) as the focus.
1. Draw a line segment AB and plot point C, which is not on line segment AB.
2. Plot point D, which should also not be on line segment AB, but should be on the same side
of the line segment as point C.
3. Draw a line segment that connects point D with point C.
4. Draw another line segment that connects point D with line
segment AB. This is line segment DE.

5. Select line segments AB and DE, and then press J.
• This displays the measurement box, which shows the angle between line segments AB
and DE.

14-57

6. Input 90 into the measurement box by pressing jaw.
• This makes the angle between line segments AB and
DE 90 degrees, and locks it.

7. Press Jo to deselect all objects on the screen.
8. Select line segments DE and DC, and then press J.

9. Press dw to display the icon palette, move the highlighting to the
press w.

w
→

10. Use e to move the highlighting to the
• This changes the icon to

icon and then press w.

.

• This makes line segments DE and DC congruent in
length.

11. Press JJo and then select point E and line segment AB.
12. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation.
13. Press o and then select point D.

14-58

icon, and then

14. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 3:Trace.
• This specifies point D (the one you selected in step 13) as the “trace point”.
15. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 5:Go (once).
• This should cause a parabola to be traced on the
display. Note that line segment AB is the directrix and
point C is the focus of the parabola.

Note
• All of the points that are currently selected on the screen become trace points when you
perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 3:Trace. This operation also cancels Trace
for any point that is currently configured as a trace point.
• The calculator’s auto power off feature will turn off power if an animation is being performed.
If calculator power is turned off (either by auto power off or manually) while an animation is
being performed, the animation will be stopped.

u To edit an animation
Example:

While the animation screen created with the procedure under “To trace
a locus of points”, use the Edit Animations screen to edit the animation

1. While the animation screen you want to edit is on the display, perform the following
operation: 6(Animate) – 4:Edit Animation.
• This will display the Edit Animations screen.
2. Edit the animation using one of the procedures below.
When you want to do
this:
Specify how many times
the animation should
be executed when you
perform the operation:
6(Animate) –
6:Go (repeat)

Perform this procedure:
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “Times” and then press 1(Times).

→

2. On the dialog box that appears, input the number of repeats
you want to specify and then press w.
• Inputting 0 here will cause the animation to repeat until
you press J or o stop it.

14-59

When you want to do
this:
Specify the number of
steps to be used as point E
travels along line segment
AB

Perform this procedure:
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “Steps” and then press 1(STEPS).

→

2. On the dialog box that appears, input an integer from 2
through 100 and then press w.
Specify the start point
and the end point of the
movement of point E along
line segment AB

1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “t0”, which is located just under the
“E” of “Animations”.

2. Input a number from –10 to 10.

• t0 specifies the start point for point E movement along
line segment AB. Inputting a value of 0 specifies point
A as the start point, while a value of 1 specifies point B.
Specifying 0.5 specifies the center of line segment AB. A
value smaller than 0.5 shifts the start point towards point
A, while a larger values shift towards point B.
3. After specifying a value for t0, press w.
• This will highlight “t1”.

4. Input a value from –10 to 10 and then press w.
• t1 specifies the end point for point E movement along line
segment AB. Inputting a value of 1 specifies point B as the
end point, while a value of 0 specifies point A.

14-60

When you want to do
this:
Delete the animation
assigned to point E

Perform this procedure:
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “E”, which is located under
“Animations”.

2. Press 1(DELETE).
• This deletes the animation assigned to point E and
causes “E” (along with the “t0” and “t1” values under it) to
disappear from under “Animations” screen.
Note
Selecting “Animations” in step 1 and then pressing
1(DELETE) will delete the animations assigned to all points.
Turn off trace for point D

1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “D” under “Traces”.

2. Press 1(DELETE).
• This turns off trace for point D and causes “D” to
disappear from under “Traces”.
Note
Selecting “Traces” in step 1 and then pressing 1(DELETE)
will turn off trace for all points.
3. After all the settings are the way you want, press J.
• This will close the Edit Animations screen.

14-61

k Generating an Animation Table
Under default settings, an animation causes a specified point to move along a specified line
segment, circle, or arc in 20 steps. You can configure the calculator to generate a table,
called an “animation table”, which records the coordinates of each step, the length of the line
segment, the area of the object, etc.
Any of the following data can be added to the animation table: coordinates (x, y), distance/
length, slope, radius, circumference, perimeter, area, angle, supplementary angle, vector
segments (x, y), and expression.

u To add columns to the animation table
Example:

Draw the triangle CDE with a base parallel to and a vertex (point D)
located on horizontal line AB. Next, generate an animation table that
includes the length of line segment CD and the area of the triangle as
point D moves along line segment AB.

1. Draw line segment AB and triangle CDE.

2. Select line segment AB and point D, and then perform the following operation:
6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation.
• This will add an animation effect that causes point D to move along line segment AB.
3. Here we will generate an animation table for the length of line segment CD, so first select
line segment CD.
4. Press J to display the measurement box.

• If the
icon does not appear on the left edge of the screen, highlight the up arrow to the
left of the measurement box and then press w. On the icon palette that appears, select
the
icon.
5. Press e to highlight the up arrow button on the right side of the measurement box and
then press w.
• This will display a menu.

14-62

6. Use f to move the highlighting to [Add Table] and then press w.
• This will display an animation table that shows the
length of line segment CD at each step of the animation
in a column labeled “Length”.

7. Press J to close the animation table screen.
8. Press J again to make the drawing screen active.
9. Select sides CD, DE, and CE of the triangle.
10. Press J to display the measurement box.

• If the
icon does not appear on the left edge of the screen, highlight the up arrow to
the left of the measurement box and then press w. On the icon palette that appears,
icon.
select the
11. Perform steps 5 through 6 above.
• Now when the animation table appears, it will include
the “Length” column we created in step 6, long with a
new “Area” column, which contains the area of triangle
CDE at each step of the animation.

• As can be seen here, the area of triangle CDE does not change as point D moves along
line segment AB, which is parallel to the base (CE) of the triangle.
12. To exit the animation table screen, press J.
13. To close the measurement box, press J twice.

Note
• You can add up to 26 columns to the animation table.
• In place of steps 4 through 6 in the above procedure, you can use either of the following
operations to add a column to the animation table: 6(Animate) – 7:Add Table or !b.

14-63

u To display the animation table
To display the animation table you generated with the procedure under “To add columns to the
animation table”, perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 8:Display Table.

u To save an animation table column to a list
1. Display the animation table.
2. Use d and e to move the highlighting to the column
you want to save as list data.

3. Press 1(STORE)1(LIST).
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the number of the list where you want to save the
column.
4. Input the list number as an integer from 1 to 26 and then press w.
• For details about list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”.

u To save an entire animation table as spreadsheet data
1. Display the animation table.
2. Press 1(STORE)2(S-SHT).
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the spreadsheet file name.
3. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• For details about spreadsheet data, see “Chapter 9 Spreadsheet”.

u To delete a particular column from an animation table
1. Display the animation table.
2. Use d and e to move the highlighting to the column you want to delete.
3. Press 2(DELETE)1(DELETE).

u To delete all of the columns from an animation table
1. Display the animation table.
2. Press 2(DELETE)2(DEL-ALL).
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete the selected file or 6(No) to cancel the delete operation.

14-64

Chapter 15 Picture Plot
Picture Plot is an application that lets you plot points (that represent coordinates) on a
photograph, illustration, or other graphic and perform various types of analysis based on the
plotted data (coordinate values).
For example, the photograph below shows the nozzles of a fountain shooting thin streams of
water at different angles.

If we view the plane traced by the water of the nozzle closest to us in the photograph as an XY
Cartesian coordinate plane, we then will be able to express any point on the path traced by the
water as a coordinate (X, Y). The Picture Plot plot function makes it easy to plot points on a
photograph such as this or some other image, and extract the coordinate values of the plots.

Plotting points

Coordinates (plot list screen)

You can use the plots to perform the following types of operations.
• Register and graph a Y=f(x) form equation and overlay it on a photograph and plot. You
also can use the graph Modify function (page 5-36) to adjust the coefficient values of the
expression and find a function that lines up better with the plots.
• Perform regression calculation based on the plotted coordinate values and draw a regression
graph that overlays the plots. This makes it possible to produce the mathematical expression
and graph of a path of movement.

15

15-1

• Add time values (T) to the coordinate values (X, Y) and plot points on the T-X plane or T-Y
plane. This makes it possible to produce the mathematical expressions and graphs of the
correlation between horizontal direction movement and time, and the correlation between
vertical direction movement and time.

Regression graph

T-X regression graph
(left side)

During full-screen display of an X-Y coordinate graph, SKETCH and G-SOLVE operations can
be used the same way they are in the Graph mode.

k Picture Plot Specific Setup Items
The items described below are Picture Plot specific Setup screen items that appear only after
you press !m(SET UP).
indicates default setting.
• Axtrans Wind
• {Auto}/{Manual} ... Specifies {link to the V-Window settings on the left side (T-Y or T-X) of
the AXTRANS screen for auto setting}/{do not link to the V-Window settings on the left
side (T-Y or T-X) of the AXTRANS screen}
• Plot Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a color for plots.
• Plot Type
• {}/{

}/{} ... Specifies the plot figure.

• Sketch Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a draw color for the
Sketch function.

15-2

1. Picture Plot Function Menus
k File List Screen Function Menu
• {OPEN} ... Opens a g3p/g3b file or folder.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes a g3p/g3b file.
• {SEARCH} ... Searches for a g3p/g3b file.
• {DETAIL} ... Displays the file DETAIL screen (page 11-6).

k Picture Plot Screen Function Menu
• {FILE} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {OPEN} ... Opens the file list.
• {SAVE} ... Saves the currently open file and overwrites its previously save version (if any).
• {SAVE • AS} ... Saves the currently open file under a new name (Save As).
• {Plot} ... Enters the plot mode (for plotting points on the screen).
• {List} ... Displays a plot coordinate value list (Plot List screen).
• For information about Plot List function menu items, see “Plot List Function Menu” (page
15-4).
• {DefG} ... Displays a screen for registering graph expressions.
• {MODIFY} ... Enters the Modify mode (page 5-36).
• {AXTRNS} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {T-Y}/{T-X} ... Splits the screen in half (left and right) and specifies {horizontal axis = T,
vertical axis = Y}/{horizontal axis = T, vertical axis = X} for the right side.
• {REG} ... Displays a submenu (same as the one on page 6-23) for executing regression
calculation based on plots.
• {EDIT} ... Enters the plot editing mode (only when plots are on the display).
• {DELETE} ... Enters the plot delete mode (only when plots are on the display).
• {PLAY} ... When the currently open image is a g3b file, sequentially displays the image in the
file.
• {Auto} ... Sequentially displays all of the images in a g3b file three times automatically.
• {Manual} ... Allows manual display of the images in a g3b file using d(back) and
e(forward).
• {PICTURE} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {1~20} ... Saves the current screen as an image in Picture Memory.
• {SAVE • AS} ... Saves the current screen as an image under a name specified by you.
• {PAN} ... Enters the Pan mode (page 5-10).
• {FadeI/O} ... Adjusts the lightness of an image (page 15-12).

15-3

k Plot List Function Menu
• {AXTRNS} ... Same as {AXTRNS} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
• {EDIT} ... Selects to edit the currently highlighted value on the plot list.
• {DEL • BTM} ... Deletes the last line of data on the plot list.
• {DEL-ALL} ... Deletes all of the data on the plot list.
• {SET} ... Selects to configure the time (T) value (page 15-15).
• {JUMP} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {TOP}/{BOTTOM} ... {jump to the top line}/{jump to the bottom line}
• {Plot} ... Exits the plot list screen and enters the plot mode.
• {REG} ... Same as {REG} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
• {STORE} ... Saves the specified Plot List column (X or Y) to list memory.
• {RECALL} ... Recalls list memory data to the Plot List X-column or Y-column.

k Plot Mode Function Menu
• {PICTURE} ... Same as {PICTURE} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
• {UNDO} ... Deletes the last point plotted. Executing {UNDO} again will plot the deleted point.
• {EDIT} ... Same as {EDIT} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.

k AXTRANS Screen Function Menu
• {Switch} ... Switches the display mode of the left side (X-Y coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen.
• {Cutout} ... Specifies the trimming range of the left side (X-Y coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen.
• {List} ... Returns to the plot list screen.
• {REG} ... Displays a submenu (same as the one on page 6-23) for executing regression
calculation based on plots on the right side (T-Y or T-X coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen.
• {P-LINK} ... Causes plots on the left side and right side of the AXTRANS screen that
correspond to each other to flash.

15-4

2. Managing Picture Plot Files
Picture Plot requires the use of a background image file. The following types of image files can
be opened by Picture Plot.
g3p file ... A file that contains a single image.
g3b file ... A file that contains multiple images.
You can use an image file that is already built into the calculator, or you can use CASIO
original contents you download from http://edu.casio.com.

k Starting a Picture Plot Operation
A Picture Plot operation is started by entering the Picture Plot mode and opening an image
file (g3p or g3b).

Note
Opening an image file is required when you enter the Picture Plot mode for the first time
after purchasing or resetting the calculator. After that, the image file you last opened will be
opened automatically whenever you enter the Picture Plot mode. After opening an image file,
you do not need to do so again unless you want to change to another image file or reset the
calculator.

u To open a file
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Picture Plot mode.
• This displays the file list screen.
• If the file you opened the last time you used the Picture Plot mode is displayed (or if the
Picture Plot screen is currently displayed), press K1(FILE)1(OPEN) to display the
file list screen.
2. Use f and c to highlight the file you want to open, and then press 1(OPEN) or w.

k Saving a File
Plotting points on the Picture Plot screen and saving the file will cause the Picture Plot plot
data to be added to the image file (g3p or g3b). This does not affect the image data of the
original image file and the file name extension remains the same as what it was before the
Picture Plot data was added. This means that even if you add Picture Plot data to an image
file, you will be able to use that file in other modes. Note, however, that the plots will not be
displayed if you open such an image file in another mode. Also using an image file in another
mode does not affect its Picture Plot data.

15-5

u Picture Plot Settings Saved to Image Files
• Picture Plot settings that can be changed on the Setup screen are divided into two groups:
settings that are saved in the image file and settings that are saved by the calculator.
Item name
Axtrans Wind

Settings saved to the
image file

Settings saved by the
calculator

*1


Graph Func
Plot Color

*1

Plot Type

*1

Sketch Color

*1

Sketch Line

*2

Angle



Complex Mode



Coord



Grid

*2

Axes

*2

Label

*2


Display

*1 Picture Plot specific setup item
*2 Common setting in all modes. If you enter the Picture Plot mode after changing these
settings in another mode, the setting of the file that was opened the last time you were in
the Picture Plot mode will be recalled.
• For V-Window settings, the settings stored with a file will be recalled whenever the file is
opened in the Picture Plot mode. This means that if you change V-Window settings in
another mode and then return to the Picture Plot mode, the V-Window settings will revert
to the settings for the file that is currently opened in the Picture Plot mode. If you go from
the Picture Plot mode to another mode, the Picture Plot V-Window settings are retained.
Settings do not change in accordance with the mode being entered.

u To save a file
While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K1(FILE)2(SAVE). This will save the
file you are editing by replacing the currently stored version (if any).

15-6

u To save a file under a different name
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
2. Specify the folder you want.
• Highlight ROOT to save the file to the root directory.
• To save the file in a specific folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
3. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
4. On the File Name dialog box that appears, enter a name up to eight characters long and
then press w.

3. Using the Plot Function
You can plot points on the screen, overlay them with a graph of an expression in the form
Y=f(x), and draw a regression graph that approximates the plots.

k Plotting Points
u To plot points on the screen
1. Enter the Picture Plot mode and then open a g3p or g3b file.
• This displays the Picture Plot screen.
• For information about how to open a file, see “To open
a file” (page 15-5).

2. Press K2(Plot) to enter the Plot mode.
• A pointer will appear in the center of the screen.
3. Use the cursor keys (or number keys) to move the pointer to the location of the point you
want to plot and then press w.
• This plots a point at the current pointer location.
• If the currently open file is a g3b file, plotting a point will switch to the next image in the file.
For details, see “Plotting Points in a g3b File” (page 15-8).
• To delete the last point you plotted, press K2(UNDO).
• For information about using the number keys to move the pointer to a particular location,
see “To make the pointer jump to a particular location” (page 15-8).

15-7

4. Repeat step 3 as many times as required to plot all of the
points you want.

• Here, you could press K3(EDIT), select a plot, and move it to another location. For
details, see “To move a plot” (page 15-9).
• You can plot up to 50 points in the case of a g3p file. For a g3b file, you can plot one point
for each of the images contained in the file.
5. After you are finished plotting all of the points you want, press J or !J(QUIT).

u To make the pointer jump to a particular location
In the Plot mode, pressing a number key (b to j) will cause the pointer to jump to the
corresponding section of the screen as shown below.
h

i

j

e

f

g

b

c

d

u Plotting Points in a g3b File
A g3b file is a special Picture Plot file that can contain up to 30 images in a single file.
• Opening a g3b file with Picture Plot and plotting a point will switch to the next sequential
image in the file.

→

→

• To view the images contained in a g3b file, press K6(g)5(PLAY) and then perform
one of the playback operations described below.
- Press 1(Auto). This sequentially displays all of the images in the file three times
automatically.
- Press 2(Manual). Use d and e to scroll the images in the file.
Press J to return to the screen that was displayed before you pressed K6(g)
5(PLAY).
• g3b files can be opened in the Picture Plot mode only.

15-8

u To move a plot
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K6(g)3(EDIT).
• You also could press K2(Plot)K3(EDIT) instead.
• This enters the plot editing mode with the pointer located at the first point that was plotted
on the image.
Plot number of pointer
position
Plot T-value of pointer
position (page 15-14)

Total number of plots

2. Use e and d to move the pointer to the plot you want to move and then press w.
• This selects the plot, causing it to flash.
3. Use the cursor keys (or number keys) to move the pointer to the location to which you want
to move the plot and then press w.
• This will move the plot. The pointer will move to the next sequential plot, when there is
one.

→

• If you want to move another plot, repeat steps 3 and 4.
4. After you are finished moving all of the plots you want, press J or !J(QUIT).

u To change the color of all the plots
Either of the following operations can be used to change the color of all the plots currently on
the screen.
• On the Setup screen, change the “Plot Color” setting.
• While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press !f(FORMAT) to display the FORMAT
dialog box, and then change the color setting.
Changing the color using the FORMAT dialog box also changes the Setup screen’s “Plot
Color” setting. The color you change to is also reflected in the text color on the plot list screen.

15-9

u To delete all plots
Press K6(g)4(DELETE), and a confirmation dialog box will appear. Press 1(Yes) to
delete all of the plots. To cancel the delete operation, press 6(No) instead.

Note
• In addition to using the plot list screen to delete all plots, you also can sequentially delete
plots one-by-one, starting from the last point plotted. See “Deleting the Last Plot Data Line”
(page 15-14).

k Inputting an Expression of the Form Y=f(x) and Graphing It
You can draw a graph based on an expression with the form Y=f(x) on the Picture Plot screen.
From the Picture Plot screen, press K4(DefG) to display the graph relation list screen.
From there, operations are identical to those in the Graph mode.

Note
• The data on the graph relation list screen is shared with the Graph mode. Note, however,
that only Y= type graphs can be used in the Picture Plot mode. Because of this, calling up
the graph relation list screen from the Picture Plot mode will display a “Y” (Y= type) item for
function menu key 3. Also note that the 5(MODIFY) function menu item is not displayed
on the graph relation list screen. The Modify function can be executed from the Picture Plot
screen.
• Y= type expressions on the graph relation list screen that include variables can be modified
by pressing K5(MODIFY) while the Picture Plot screen is displayed. For details about
this operation, see “Modifying a Graph” (page 5-36).

k Using Regression Graphs
You can perform regression calculation based on plotted coordinate values and draw a
regression graph.

u To draw a regression graph overlaid on plots
1. Perform the procedure under “To plot points on the screen” (page 15-7).
2. Press K6(g)2(REG).
• This displays the regression calculation type function
menu.

15-10

3. Press the function key that corresponds to the type of regression calculation*1 you want to
perform.
• To perform quadratic regression, for example, press
3(X2). This performs the regression calculation and
displays the results.*2

• You can press 5(COPY) here to copy the obtained regression formula to the graph
relation list screen. See “Inputting an Expression of the Form Y=f(x) and Graphing It”
(page 15-10) for more information.
4. To draw a regression graph, press 6(DRAW).

*1 For information about regression calculation types, see “Selecting the Regression Type”
(page 6-15).
*2 For information about the meanings of the values that appear on this screen, see
“Displaying Regression Calculation Results” (page 6-16) and the regression graph
explanations on pages 6-16 through 6-20.

Note
• Besides regression graphs, you also can specify your own expressions and graph them. See
“Inputting an Expression of the Form Y=f(x) and Graphing It” (page 15-10).

u Scrolling and Panning a Plot or Graph Screen
On the Picture Plot screen, you can use the cursor keys to scroll the XY-coordinate axes up,
down, left, and right. Note that the background image is fixed and does not scroll.

You also can press K6(g)6(g)2(PAN) and pan (grab-and-drag) the XY-coordinate
axes. The pan operation is the same as that in the Graph mode (page 5-10).

15-11

u To maneuver between the Picture Plot screen, AXTRANS screen, and plot
list screen
Once you display the plot list screen and AXTRANS screen (page 15-14), each press of
!6(G⇔T) cycles between the Picture Plot screen, AXTRANS screen, and plot list screen.

!6(G⇔T)

!6(G⇔T)

!6(G⇔T)

k Adjusting the Lightness (Fade I/O) of an Image
You can adjust the lightness of an image within a range of 0% (as-is) to 100% (not displayed).
A higher setting value makes the image lighter, and a setting of 100% displays all white.

→

You can adjust the lightness for optimum viewing of plots and graphs.
• Note that the lightness setting can be adjusted only when the image is a 16-bit image data.
• After you adjust the lightness level, the setting is stored in the image file when you perform
either of the following operations: K1(FILE)2(SAVE) or 3(SAVE • AS).

u To adjust the lightness (Fade I/O) of an image
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K6(g)6(g)3(FadeI/O).
• This causes a slider for adjusting image lightness to appear on the display.
2. Use d and e to adjust the lightness value.
• You can also input values directly, if you want. To specify a lightness value of 20%, for
example, press caw.
3. After the setting is the way you want, press w.

15-12

4. Using the Plot List
Each plot on the Picture Plot screen has coordinate value data. You can use the plot list to
display and edit these coordinates.

k Displaying Coordinate Values of Plots (Plot List)
You can use the procedures in this section to display a list of plot coordinates (X, Y), and use
the list to edit values, delete plot data, and change plot colors. You also can specify a time
value (T) for each plot and draw a T-X or T-Y graph (AXTRANS) function.

u To edit plot coordinate values
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press
K3(List) to display the plot list screen.

• The X and Y values of the plot list screen show plot coordinates. The T-value indicates
time. (For more information about T-values, see “Displaying Plots on T-Y Coordinates and
T-X Coordinates (AXTRANS Screen)” on page 15-14.) On this screen you can edit the X
and Y values only.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the X-column or Y-column value you want to
edit and then press 2(EDIT).
3. Edit the values and then press w.
• If you want to edit other values, repeat steps 2 and 3.
• To return to the Picture Plot screen, press J or !J(QUIT).
• Changing a value cause the change to be reflected by the corresponding plot on the
Picture Plot screen.

Note
• While the plot list screen is displayed, you can use 6(g)4(STORE) to store list data on
the plot list to list memory and 6(g)5(RECALL) to recall plot list data from list memory.
Note, however, that both the store and recall operations ignore any color information
associated with list data.

15-13

u Deleting the Last Plot Data Line
Perform one of the following operations, depending on the type of cell that is currently
highlighted.
• If the X-value or Y-value of the last line of the plot list screen is selected, press
3(DEL • BTM) once to delete the last line of plot data.
• If the X-value or Y-value of any line besides the last line of the plot list screen is selected,
press 3(DEL • BTM) once to move the highlighting to the last line and then press
3(DEL • BTM) again to delete the last line of plot data.

u To delete all plots
Press 4(DEL-ALL), and a confirmation dialog box will appear. Press 1(Yes) to delete all of
the plots. To cancel the delete operation, press 6(No) instead.

u To return to the Picture Plot screen from the plot list screen
Press J, !J(QUIT), or !6(G⇔T).

k Displaying Plots on T-Y Coordinates and T-X Coordinates (AXTRANS
Screen)
As can be seen on the plot list screen, the data for each plot includes X and Y-coordinates, as
well as a time value T.
On the Picture Plot screen each plot is normally displayed as coordinates (X, Y) on an X-Y
plane, but time value T can be used to display plots as coordinates (T, Y) on a T-Y plane or as
coordinates (T, X) on a T-X plane.
• Under initial default settings, time values are 0, 1, 2, and so on (arithmetic progression with
a start value of 0 and a step value of 1), in accordance with the sequence that the points are
plotted. You can change the T value assigned to each plot by changing the start value and
step value.
• T-Y coordinate plots and T-X coordinate plots are displayed on a special screen called the
AXTRANS screen. The AXTRANS screen simultaneously displays the X-Y coordinate plots
and the T-Y or T-X coordinate plots as shown in the example below.

X-Y coordinate plots T-X coordinate plots

15-14

u To configure the time (T) value
1. While the plot list screen is displayed, press 5(SET).

2. On the screen that appears, specify the start value and step value.
• If you want to specify a start value of 1 and a step of 1.5, for example, press bwb.
fw.
3. After the settings are the way you want, press w (or J).
• This returns to the plot list screen, where you can check
whether the T-value has changed as you intended.

Note
The following are the ranges for the start value and the step value.
–1.0E+10 < Start < 1.0E+10
0 < Step < 1.0E+10

u To display plots on T-Y coordinates or T-X coordinates
1. While the plot list screen is displayed, press 1(AXTRNS). From the Picture Plot screen,
you also could press K6(g)1(AXTRNS).

2. Depending on the coordinate system you want to use to display the plots, press 1(T-Y) or
2(T-X).
• This displays the AXTRANS screen, which shows the
X-Y coordinate system plots on the left and the T-Y or
T-X coordinate system plots on the right.

15-15

Note
• While the AXTRANS screen is displayed, the “Grid” setting on the Setup screen is
always “Off”, while the “Label” setting is always “On”. For the “Axes” setting, you can
select “On” or “Scale” only. If you try to select “Off” for this setting, it will change back to
“On” automatically.
• As soon as the AXTRANS screen is displayed, the left screen T-axis V-Window is
always configured automatically, regardless of the current “Axtrans Wind” setup.
• Pressing K while this screen is shown will display a function menu you can use to
perform the following operations.
And then perform the procedure
located here:

To do this:

Press this key:

Change the display mode
of the left-side screen

1(Switch)

Go to the plot list screen

3(List)

Draw a regression graph
overlaid on the plots in
the right-side screen

4(REG)

From step 3 under “To draw a
regression graph overlaid on plots”
(page 15-10)

Cause plots on the left
side and right side of the
AXTRANS screen that
correspond to each other
to flash

5(P-LINK)

“To make plots on the left side and
right side of the AXTRANS screen
that correspond to each other to
flash” (page 15-17)

“To switch the display mode of the
left side (X-Y coordinate system) of
the AXTRANS screen” below
—

3. To return to the plot list screen, press J.

u To switch the display mode of the left side (X-Y coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen
1. While the AXTRANS screen is displayed, press K to display the function menu.
2. Press 1(Switch).
• Each press of 1(Switch) cycles the left-side display mode in the sequence shown below.

→

→

(1) Full screen with horizontal squeeze
(2) Cut off screen (no squeeze)

15-16

(3) Compressed screen, maintaining aspect ratio
• When (2) (no squeeze) is selected as the display mode, you can specify what part
of the screen is cut off. To do so, press 2(Cutout) and then use the d and e
keys to move the boundary so it encloses the part of the screen you want to display.
Finally, press w.

→

3. When the display mode is the way you want, press J.

u To make plots on the left side and right side of the AXTRANS screen that
correspond to each other to flash
1. While the AXTRANS screen is on the display, press K5(P-LINK).
• This will cause the plots on the left-side (X-Y
coordinates) and right-side (T-X coordinates) that
correspond to the first line of data (the first plots) to
flash.

• Use d and e to move the flashing back and forth between plots. This feature is useful
to determine how the plots on either side of the screen correspond to each other.
2. To stop the flashing, press J.

u To return to the plot list screen from the AXTRANS screen
Press J or !6(G⇔T).

15-17

5. Common Functions with the Graph Mode
On the Picture Plot screen, !1 to 5 function menu items are the same as those in the
Graph mode. See the pages below for more information.
• !1(TRACE) ... “Reading Coordinates on a Graph Line” (page 5-52)
• !2(ZOOM) ... “Zoom” (page 5-8)
• !3(V-WIN) ... “V-Window (View Window) Settings” (page 5-4)
• !4(SKETCH) ... “Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph Screen (Sketch)” (page
5-50)
• !5(G-SOLVE) ... “Analyzing Graphs (G-SOLVE Menu)” (page 5-54)

Note
After you start a trace operation by pressing !1(TRACE), you can change the color of the
plot where the trace pointer is currently located. Perform the following steps to change the plot
color.
1. While the Picture Plot screen contains plotted points, press !1(TRACE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear at the first point that was plotted on the image.
• If there are both plots and a graph on the Picture Plot screen, pressing !1(TRACE)
will cause the trace pointer to appear on the graph first. In this case, use f and c to
move the trace pointer between the graph and the plots.
2. Use e and d to move the trace pointer to the plot whose color you want to change.
3. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the FORMAT dialog box.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the desired color and then press w.
• The color you change to is also reflected in the text color of the corresponding plot data.

15-18

Appendix
1. Error Message Table
• General calculation errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Syntax
ERROR

• Illegal syntax
• Attempt to input an illegal command

Press J to display the error and
make necessary corrections.

Ma ERROR

• Calculation result that exceeds the
calculation range.
• Mathematical error (division by zero,
etc.)

Check input values and make
corrections to ensure that values are
within allowable limits.

Stack ERROR

Execution of calculations that exceed
the capacity of the stack for numeric
values or stack for commands.

• Simplify the formulas to keep
stacks within 10 levels for the
numeric values and 26 levels for the
commands.
• Divide the formula into two or more
parts.

Input value
must be
integer.

Attempting to input a non-integer value
in a location that requires integer input.

Input an integer value.

Input value
must be
matrix.

Attempting to input a non-matrix value
in a location that requires matrix input.

Input a matrix value.

Input value
must be list.

Attempting to input a non-list value in a
location that requires list input.

Input a list value.

Input value
must be real
number.

Attempting to input a non-real number
value in a location that requires real
number input.

Input a real number value.

Invalid polar
form

Attempting to input an imaginary
number for polar form (r∠θ) r or θ.

Check the polar form.

Wrong
argument size
relationship.

The size relationship between two
arguments is opposite from what it
should be.
Example: nCr(3,10)

Change the values so the size
relationship required by the syntax is
maintained.

Non-Real
ERROR

Calculation that produces a complex
number when Real is specified for the
Complex Mode setting on the Setup
screen, even though the argument is a
real number.

Change the Complex Mode setting to
something other than Real.

α-1

α

When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Can’t Simplify

Fraction simplification was attempted
using the 'Simp function (page
2-25), but simplification could not be
performed using the specified divisor.
Example: Specifying a divisor of 3 to
simplify the fraction 4/8.

Specify a different divisor or execute
'Simp without specifying any divisor.

Can’t Solve!
Adjust initial
value or
bounds. Then
try again

A Solve calculation could not obtain a
solution within the specified range.

• Change the specified range.
• Correct the input expression.

Time Out

A Solve calculation was unable to
satisfy convergence conditions.

If you are performing a Solve
calculation, try changing to the initial
default estimated value.

Conversion
ERROR

• Attempting to use the unit conversion
command to convert between two
units in different categories.
• Executing a conversion calculation
using the same command twice in a
conversion expression.

In a conversion expression, specify
two different commands that are in
the same category.

Invalid Type

An illegal data type is specified.

Specify valid data.

Underflow

When performing a function calculation
or an equation calculation, you input
an extremely small value for one of
the arguments or you input values for
multiple arguments that are extremely
removed from each other.
Example: ∑(X,X,1,2,1E–50),
1E99x2+1E99x+1E–99=0, etc.

Depending on the calculation
contents, the underflow will occur and
the calculation will not be performed.
Change the value(s) and try again.

α-2

• List and matrix calculation errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Invalid list or
matrix

Incorrect use of a list or matrix.

Press J to display the error and
make necessary corrections.

Dimension
ERROR

Illegal dimension used during matrix or
list calculations.

Check the matrix or list dimension.

Complex
Number in List

List containing complex number used
in a calculation or operation for which
complex number data is invalid.

Change all data in the list to real
numbers.

Complex
Number in
Matrix

Matrix containing complex number
used in a calculation or operation for
which complex number data is invalid.

Change all data in the matrix to real
numbers.

Improper
Number of
Elements

You attempted to create a list or matrix
whose number of elements exceeds
the maximum limit.

A list cannot have more than 999
elements, and a matrix cannot
exceed 999 rows × 999 columns.

• Equation mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Infinitely Many
Solutions

An infinite number of solutions for
simultaneous linear equations.

—

No Solution

No solution for simultaneous linear
equations.

—

No Variable

No variable within a Solve equation.

α-3

Input a Solve equation that includes
a variable.

• Graph, Dyna Graph, Table, Recursion, Conic Graphs mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Range
ERROR

V-Window range settings exceeded
when a graph is redrawn.

Redraw using the proper settings.

No Variable

No variable specified within a graph
function being used for Dynamic Graph.

Specify a variable for the graph
function.

Too Many
Variables

• Attempting to execute the Modify
function using an expression with
more than five variables.
• Attempting to execute the Modify
function when multiple expressions
containing variables are selected.

• Change the expression so it
contains no more than five
variables.
• Select only one expression that
contains a variable.

No item is
selected

Attempting to draw a graph or create a
table while there is no data selected.

Select data and try again.

Expression in
use

Attempting to copy the expression of
a graph while Modify is running to an
area where an expression that is being
used for graphing is located.

Select a diffrerent area and try again.

Requires
one variable
expression.

• You attempted to execute a Modify
function operation while no
expression that contains a variable is
selected.
• You attempted to execute a Modify
operation while multiple expressions
containing variables are selected.

Select at least one and only one
expression that contains a variable.

Invalid graph
type

• You attempted to execute a Modify
operation in the Graph mode while a
list graph expression, overwrite graph
expression, or inequality is selected.
• You attempted to execute a Modify
operation in the Table mode while a
list graph expression, overwrite graph
expression, inequality, or a range of
values is selected.

Select a different type of expression
and try again.

Too Many
Sectors

You executed a calculation using GSolve ∫dx - ROOT or ∫dx - INTSECT, but
there are 21 or more roots in the range
specified by you.

Specify a range that is narrower and
try again.

α-4

• Statistics mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Condition
ERROR

You are attempting to display multiple
statistical graphs of different types.

Press 1(GRAPH)4(SELECT) to
display the graph On/Off screen, and
then select “DrawOn” only for graphs
of the same type.

Data in use

• You attempted to execute a
regression calculation while the same
list specified by “Resid List” (residual
list) is specified as calculation data.
• You attempted to execute a Test,
Confidence Interval, or Distribution
calculation while the same list
specified by “Save Res” (save result
list) is specified as calculation data.

• For “Resid List”, specify a list other
than the one being used for the
regression calculation.
• For “Save Res”, specify a list
other than the one being used for
the Test, Confidence Interval, or
Distribution calculation.

• Program errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:
Go ERROR

So you need to do this:

1 No corresponding Lbl n for Goto n.

2 No program stored in program area
Prog "file name".

1 Correctly input a Lbl n to correspond to the Goto n, or delete the
Goto n if not required.
2 Store a program in program area
Prog "file name", or delete the
Prog "file name" if not required.

Nesting
ERROR

Nesting of subroutines by Prog "file
name" exceeds 10 levels.

• Ensure that Prog "file name" is not
used to return from subroutines to
main routine. If used, delete any
unnecessary Prog "file name".
• Trace the subroutine jump
destinations and ensure that no
jumps are made back to the original
program area. Ensure that returns
are made correctly.

Too many path
levels

Specification of more than five path
levels in a program.

Specify no more than five path levels.

α-5

• Spreadsheet mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Range
ERROR

The spreadsheet cell range was
exceeded by paste, recall, or other cell
operation.

Repeat the procedure taking care
that the cell range is not exceeded.

Circular
ERROR

There is a circular reference (such as
“=A1” in cell A1) in the spreadsheet.

Change cell contents to remove the
circular references.

• eActivity mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

No MEMO

• On the eActivity mode file menu
screen, pressing 5(MEMO) while a
file that does not include a MEMO is
selected.
• Attempting to display the MEMO
Catalog screen while editing a file that
does not include a MEMO.

Only one
memo allowed
per line.

• In the eActivity mode, attempting to
append a MEMO to a line that already
has a MEMO appended.
• In the eActivity mode, attempting
to delete the newline code between
two lines that both have a MEMO
appended.

Image wrong
size for
insertion.

In the eActivity mode, you are
attempting to insert an image file
whose file size is not supported.

α-6

Perform these operations while a file
that includes a MEMO is selected.

—

Use an image file that is the
supported size (page 10-14).

• Memory mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Memory
ERROR

Operation or memory storage operation
exceeds remaining memory capacity.

• Keep the number of memories you
use within the currently specified
number of memories.
• Simplify the data you are trying to
store to keep it within the available
memory capacity.
• Delete no longer needed data to
make room for the new data.

Folder has
over 300 files.
Some will be
skipped

The number of files in the storage
memory folder you are trying to open in
the Memory mode exceeds 300.

Use your computer*1 to distribute the
files among multiple folders so no
folder in storage memory contains
more than 300 files.

Sub-folders
in this folder
cannot be
displayed

In the Memory mode, a level 3 nested
storage memory folder is displayed,
and it contains a level 4 nested folder.
(The level 4 folder will be displayed, but
it cannot be opened.)

Use your computer*1 to store all files
you want to access in the top three
folder nesting levels.

Too Many
Data

The number of data items is too large.

Delete unneeded data.

Fragmentation
ERROR

Memory must be optimized before any
more data can be stored.

Optimize memory.

Invalid Name

The file name you input includes invalid
characters.

Use the correct characters to input a
valid file name.

Invalid Type

An illegal data type is specified.

Specify valid data.

Storage
Memory Full

The storage memory is full.

Delete unneeded data.

Data ERROR

A data error occurred.

Check to make sure you are writing
correct type of data and try again.

*1 For details about using a computer to perform storage memory file and folder operations, see
“Transferring Data between the Calculator and a Personal Computer” (page 13-5).

α-7

When you see
It means this:
this message:
File System
ERROR

So you need to do this:

The calculator memory file system
is corrupted or the storage memory
format is one that cannot be read by
the calculator.

After reading the information under
“Important!” below, perform an
Initialize All operation as described in
“Reset” (page 12-4).
Important!
Performing an Initialize All operation
will delete all data in calculator
memory, including language data.
If you need the data in calculator
memory, use the USB cable to
connect the calculator to a computer
and copy all of the data you want to
keep to your computer’s hard disk
before performing the Initialize All
operation. For more information, see
“Performing Data Communication
between the Calculator and a
Personal Computer” (page 13-3).

α-8

• Data communication errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Complex
Number in
Data

Data sent from a function of this
calculator (matrix, etc.) includes
complex number data, but the
corresponding function of the receiving
calculator does not support data that
includes complex numbers.
Example: Attempting to send a matrix
containing a complex number in an
element to CFX-9850G.

Send data that does not include
complex numbers.

CSV error
in row [A],
column [B]

The imported CSV file included data
that cannot be converted.

Use your computer to check the
row A, column B data in the file
and change it to data that can be
converted.

USB Connect
ERROR

USB cable connection broken during
data communication.

Use the USB cable to correctly
connect the calculator and computer
(or other device).

Com ERROR

Problem with cable connection
or parameter setting during data
communication.

Check to make sure there is nothing
wrong with the cable connection,
and that parameters are configured
correctly.

Transmit
ERROR

Problem with cable connection or
parameter setting during data
communication.

Check to make sure there is nothing
wrong with the cable connection,
and that parameters are configured
correctly.

Receive
ERROR

Problem with cable connection or
parameter setting during data
communication.

Check to make sure there is nothing
wrong with the cable connection,
and that parameters are configured
correctly.

Memory Full

Memory of receiving calculator
became full during program data
communication.

Delete some data stored in the
receiving calculator and try again.

Invalid Data
Size

Attempting to send data of a size that is
not supported by the receiving device.

Make sure the data being sent is
of a size that is supported by the
receiving device.

Invalid Data
Number

Attempting to send data with a data
number that is not supported by the
receiving device.

Specify a data number supported by
the receiving device when sending
data.

Please
Reconnect

The connection was dropped for some
reason while updating the operating
system.

Reconnect and try again.

α-9

• Geometry mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

First select a
segment.

You are attempting to construct a
perpendicular bisector without first
selecting a line segment.

Select the required object(s) and
then try again.

First select a
line and point.

You are attempting to construct a
perpendicular or parallel without first
selecting a line segment and point.

First select
2 points or a
segment.

You are trying to construct a midpoint
without first selecting two points or a
line segment.

First select
the applicable
figure.

• You are trying to construct a point of
intersection without first selecting two
lines.
• You are trying to execute an Add
Animation or Replace Animation
command without first selecting the
required object.
• You are trying to execute an Add
Table command without first selecting
the required object.

First select 2
segments.

You are trying to construct an angle
bisector without first selecting two line
segments.

Too Many
Objects!
Work memory
cleared.

Work memory became full.

Delete objects you no longer need or
open a new file.

Invalid
Measurement

You are attempting to use the
Expression command to input
an expression that contains a
measurement that does not exist.

Check to make sure that the
expression you are inputting contains
only measurements that are currently
on the screen.

Too Many
Animations

You are trying to add more than 10
animations.

Use the Edit Animations screen to
delete animations you no longer
need, or create a new file and add
new animations.

First select
point(s).

You are trying to execute the Trace
command without first specifying a
trace point.

Specify the trace point and try again.

Too Many
Trace Points

You are trying to specify more than 10
trace points.

Select only up to 10 trace points.

Too Many
Rows

You are trying to add more than 26
columns to an animation table.

Delete columns from the animation
table that you do not need and try
again.

α-10

When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

First configure
animation
settings.

• You are trying to run an animation
without first configuring its settings.
• You are trying to execute an Add
Table command without first
configuring animation settings.

Configure animation settings and try
again.

Cannot Add
Animation

• The point you selected for an Add
Animation or Replace Animation
command operation cannot be used
in an animation because it is locked,
etc.
• The point you selected for an Add
Animation or Replace Animation
command operation cannot be used
in an animation because it is already
being used in the animation you are
configuring or in another animation.

Select a point to which animation can
be added and try again.

Select the
applicable
measurement
icon.

You are trying to execute the Add Table
command without first selecting the
appropriate measurement icon.

Select the icon of a measurement
that can be added to an animation
table.

First configure
animation
settings and
create a table.

You tried to execute the Display Table
command without generating an
animation table.

Generate an animation table first.

Create at least
one figure with
a fill color.

You are attempting to execute a surface
area calculation (K(Option) – 7:Area
Calc) when there is no figure on the
screen with a fill color.

Draw a figure with a fill color and try
again.

α-11

• Picture Plot mode errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:
Too many
plots

So you need to do this:

In the Picture Plot mode, the number
of plots exceeds the allowable upper
limit.

—

• Setup errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

Out of Domain

Attempting to input a value that is
outside the allowable input range.

Input a value that is within the
allowable range.

Invalid setting

• Input of an improper V-Window value.

• Change the V-Window value so it is
within range.
• Input a proper range value.

• Input of an improper value on the
range screen and use of that value for
execution.
• Attempting to create a table with a
Step value of 0.
• Attempting to input illegal V-Window
setting combinations.
Example: Xmin = 10, Xmax = 10
• Attempting to create a table in the
Recursion mode when the Start
value is greater than or equal to the
End value.
• The Edit Animations screen is
configured with the setting t0=t1 in
the Geometry mode.
• Internal calculation generated a
mathematical error (division by zero,
etc.) when executing a function
calculation, or a calculation in the
Financial mode or Statistics mode.
Out of Range

Calculation result that exceeds the
calculator display range.

α-12

• Specify a Step value other than 0.
• Enter values that have the proper
relationship with each other.
• Change the value so the Start value
is less than the End value.

• Configure the Edit Animations
screen so t0 and t1 are assigned
different values for the same
animation.
• Since the calculation contains one
or more values that cannot be
calculated, input different values
and try again.
Change the calculation formula.

• Other errors
When you see
It means this:
this message:

So you need to do this:

No Data

The specified data does not exist.
(Occurs when a list or variable that
does not contain data is referenced.)

Change the data specification.

No File

Attempting to recall a file from Picture
Memory (1 through 20) when there is
no file located at the applicable Picture
Memory number.

Specify a Picture Memory number
where a file is stored.

Not Enough
Elements

• The list you specified for a calculation
does not contain the number of
elements required to perform the
calculation.
• You attempted to execute a
statistical calculation using a list
whose elements are all zero for the
frequency data.

• Check the number of elements
required by the calculation you are
trying to perform and adjust the
number of list elements accordingly.
• For frequency data, use a list
whose elements contain values
greater than zero.

α-13

2. Input Ranges
Function
sinx
cosx
tanx

Input range for real
number solutions
(DEG) |x| < 9 × (109)°
(RAD) |x| < 5 × 107πrad
(GRA) |x| < 1 × 1010grad

sin–1x
cos–1x

|x| < 1

tan–1x

|x| < 1 × 10

sinhx
coshx

|x| < 230.9516564

tanhx

|x| < 1 ×10

sinh–1x

|x| < 1 × 10100

cosh–1x

1 < x < 1 × 10100

tanh–1x

|x| < 1

Internal
digits

15 digits

Precision
As a rule,
precision is
±1 at the
10th digit.*

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

"

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

"

"

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

100

1 × 10–99 < x < 1 × 10100

10x

–1 × 10100 < x < 100

e

–1 × 10100
< x < 230.2585092

x
'

0 < x < 1 × 10100

x2

|x| < 1 × 1050

1/x

|x| < 1 × 10100, x ≠ 0

x
'

|x| < 1 × 10100

x!

0 < x < 69
(x is an integer)

"

"

Result < 1 × 10100
n, r (n and r are integers)
0 < r < n, n < 1 × 1010

"

"

"

"

3

nPr
nCr
Pol (x, y)
Rec
(r ,θ)

However, for tanx :
|x| ≠ 90(2n+1): DEG
|x| ≠ π/2(2n+1): RAD
|x| ≠ 100(2n+1): GRA

100

logx
Inx

x

Notes

x2 + y2 < 1 × 10100
|r| < 1 × 10100
(DEG) |θ | < 9 × (109)°
(RAD) |θ | < 5 × 107π rad
(GRA) |θ | < 1 × 1010grad

"

α-14

"

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

However, for tanθ :
|θ | ≠ 90(2n+1): DEG
|θ | ≠ π/2(2n+1): RAD
|θ | ≠ 100(2n+1): GRA

Input range for real
number solutions

Function

° ’”
←⎯

° ’”

Internal
digits

Precision

15 digits

As a rule,
precision is
±1 at the
10th digit.*

|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100
0 < b, c
|x| < 1 × 10100
Sexagesimal display:
|x| < 1 × 107

Notes

x > 0:

^(xy)

–1 × 10100 < ylogx < 100
x=0:y>0
m
x < 0 : y = n, ––––
2n+1
(m, n are integers)
However;
–1 × 10100 < y log |x| < 100

"

"
• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

y>0:x≠0
–1 × 10100 < 1 logy < 100

x

y
'

x

y=0:x>0
n+1
y < 0 : x = 2n+1, 2––––
m
(m ≠ 0; m, n are integers)

"

"

However;

• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.

–1 × 10100 < 1 log |y| < 100

x

ab/c

Total of integer, numerator
and denominator must be
within 10 digits (includes
division marks).

"

"

* For a single calculation, calculation error is ±1 at the 10th digit. (In the case of exponential display,
calculation error is ±1 at the last significant digit.) Errors are cumulative in the case of consecutive
calculations, which can also cause them to become large. (This is also true of internal consecutive
calculations that are performed in the case of ^(xy), x'
y, x!, 3'
x, nPr, nCr, etc.)
In the vicinity of a function’s singular point and point of inflection, errors are cumulative and may
become large.
Function
Binary, octal,
decimal,
hexadecimal
calculation

Input range
Values fall within following ranges after conversion:
DEC: –2147483648 < x < 2147483647
BIN: 1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111 (negative)
0 < x < 111111111111111 (0, positive)
OCT: 20000000000 < x < 37777777777 (negative)
0 < x < 17777777777 (0, positive)
HEX: 80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF (negative)
0 < x < 7FFFFFFF (0, positive)

α-15

E-Con2
Application
(English)

ε-1
E-Con2 Overview

All of the explanations provided here assume that you are already familiar
with the operating precautions, terminology, and operational procedures of
the calculator and the EA-200.

1. E-Con2 Overview
• From the Main Menu, enter the E-Con2 mode.

E-Con2 Main Menu
• The E-Con2 mode provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data
sampling using the CASIO EA-200.
• 1(SET) ...............Displays a screen for setting up the EA-200.
• 2(MEMORY) ......Displays a screen for saving EA-200 setup data under a file
name.
• 3(PROGRAM) ....Performs program conversion.
• This function can be used to convert EA-200 setup data
configured using E-Con2 to an EA-200 control program (or
EA-100 control program) that can run on the fx-9860G SD/fx9860G.
• It also can be used to convert data to a program that can be run
on a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series calculator.
• 4(START) ..........Starts data collection.
• 5(GRAPH) .........Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for
analyzing graphs. Graph Analysis tools include calculation of
periodic frequency, various types of regression, Fourier series
calculation, and more.
• 6(HELP) .............Displays E-Con2 help.
• Pressing the K key (Setup Preview) or a cursor key while the E-Con2 main menu is on
the screen displays a preview dialog box that shows the contents of the setup in the current
setup memory area.
To close the preview dialog box, press J.
Note
• For details about setup data and the current setup memory area, see “Using Setup
Memory” (page ε-24).

20100801

ε-2
Using the Setup Wizard

2. Using the Setup Wizard
This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the EA-200 setup quickly
and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear.

k Setup Wizard Parameters
Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three EA-200 basic sampling
parameters using an interactive wizard format.
• Sensor (Select Sensor)
• Total Sampling Time
• Sampling Time Unit (Select Unit)
Note the following rules whenever you use the Setup Wizard.
• The EA-200 sampling channel is CH1 or SONIC.
• The trigger for a Setup Wizard setup is always the w key.

• To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard
Note
• To terminate Setup Wizard part way through and cancel the setup, press !J(QUIT).
1. Display the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1).
2. Press 1(SET) and then 1(WIZARD).
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the “Select Sensor” screen.
3. Press 1 to specify a CASIO sensor or 2 to specify a Vernier sensor.
• Pressing either key will display the corresponding sensor list.
4. Specify the sensor you want to use.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the sensor you want to use,
and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, skip to step 6.
• If the sensor you specified has more than one option
(more detailed specifications, such as sampling
unit, mode, etc.), an option list will appear on the
display at this time. If this happens, advance to step
5 (where you will see an example of the screen that
appears when you select 1 - [Temperature] in step
4).

20100801

ε-3
Using the Setup Wizard

5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to
select, and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6.
Important!
When special settings are required by the sensor and/or option you select, other screens
other than the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen will appear on the display. The
following shows where you should go to find information about the operations you need
to perform for each sensor/option selection.
If you select this sensor/option:

Go here for more information:

[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT]
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only]

“Using Setup Wizard to Configure
Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling” on
page ε-4

[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate]

“To configure a setup for PhotoGate
alone” on page ε-5

[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley]

“To configure a setup for PhotoGate
and Smart Pulley” on page ε-5

[CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)]

“Outputting the Waveform of a
Function through the Speaker” on
page ε-6

6. Use the number input keys to input the total sampling time. Just input a value.
In step 8 of this procedure, you will be able to specify the unit (seconds, minutes, hours,
days) of the value you input here.
Note
• With some sensors ([CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave], etc.) sampling time is
limited to a few seconds. The unit for such a sensor is always seconds, and so the
“Select Unit” screen does not appear.
• If you specify a total sampling time value in the range of 10 seconds to 23 hours, 59
minutes, 59 seconds, real-time graphing will be performed during sampling. This is the
same as selecting the Real-time Mode on the “Advanced Setup” screen.
7. After inputting total sampling time value you want, press w.
• This displays the “Select Unit” screen.
8. Use number keys b through e to specify the unit for the value you specified in step 6.
• This displays a confirmation screen like the one
shown nearby.

20100801

ε-4
Using the Setup Wizard

9. If there is no problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1.
If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J. This will return to the screen in step 4
(for setting the total sampling interval), where you can change the setting.
• Pressing 1 will take you to the final Setup Wizard
screen.

10. Press number keys described below to specify what you want to do with the setup you
have configured.
b(Start Setup) ................Starts sampling using the setup (page ε-30)

c(Save Setup-MEM) .....Saves the setup (page ε-24)

d(Convert Program) ......Converts the setup to a program (page ε-27)

k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling
When you perform sound sampling executed by the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by
specifying [CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three
options: [Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the
following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and
volume (vertical axis). “FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal
axis) and volume (vertical axis).
The following shows the settings for recording FFT data.
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] or
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only].
• This causes a “Select FFT Range” screen to appear.
• You can select one of four settings for FFT Range. The setting you select will
automatically apply the applicable fixed parameters shown below.
Setting 2 - 1000 Hz: 4 - 2000 Hz: 6 - 3000 Hz: 8 - 4000 Hz:
1
2
3
4
Parameter

Frequency pitch
Upper limit of sampling frequency
Sampling interval
Number of samples

2 Hz
1000 Hz
61 μ sec
8192

4 Hz
2000 Hz
31 μ sec
8192

6 Hz
3000 Hz
20 μ sec
8192

8 Hz
4000 Hz
31 μ sec
4096

3. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select an FFT Range setting.
• Selecting an FFT Range causes the final Setup Wizard screen to appear.
4. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page ε-2
to finalize the procedure.
20100801

ε-5
Using the Setup Wizard

k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a PhotoGate Setup
Connection of a Vernier PhotoGate requires configuration of setup parameters that are
slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors.

• To configure a setup for PhotoGate alone
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
• This displays a screen where you specify whether PhotoGate is connected to the CH1
or SONIC channel.
3. Press 1 to specify CH1 or 2 to specify SONIC.
• This causes a “Gate Status” screen to appear.
• “Open” means the photo path is not blocked, while “Close” means the photo path is
blocked.
• The gate status defines what PhotoGate status should cause timing to start, and what
status should cause timing to stop.
Open-Open ..............Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes
and then opens again.
Open-Close..............Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes.
Close-Open..............Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens.
Close-Close .............Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens
and then closes again.
4. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select a Gate Status setting.
• Selecting a gate status causes a screen for specifying the number of samples to
appear.
5. Input an integer in the range of 1 to 255 to specify the number of samples.
6. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page ε-2
to finalize the procedure.

• To configure a setup for PhotoGate and Smart Pulley
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
• This causes an “Input Distance(m)” screen to appear.
• The distance you specify here is the distance the weight travels after it is released.
• Input a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 to specify the distance in meters.
3. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page ε-2
to finalize the procedure.

20100801

ε-6
Using the Setup Wizard

k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker
Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to the EA200. If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it
configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and
graph on the calculator.

• To configure a setup for speaker output
1. Connect the data communication cable (SB-62) to the communication port of the
calculator and the MASTER port of the EA-200.
2. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
3. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)].
This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.

4. Press w to advance to the View Window setting screen.
• The following settings are configured automatically: Ymin = –1.5 and Ymax = 1.5. Do
not change these settings.
5. Press w or J to advance to the graph relation list.
6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input.
• Note that the angle unit is always radians.
• Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the
range of –1.5 to +1.5.

7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function.
• This graphs the function and displays a vertical
cursor line as shown in the sample display nearby.
Use the graph to specify the range that you want to
output to the speaker.

8. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the output, and
then press w to register it.

20100801

ε-7
Using the Setup Wizard

9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.

→

10. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one
octave, input a value of 200%. To lower the original sound by one octave, input a value
of 50%.
11. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
12. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
13. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.

14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do.
To change the output frequency and try again:
Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above
steps from step 10.
To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again:
Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from
step 8.
To change the function:
Press 6(No) and then J to return to the graph relation list in step 6. Next, repeat the
above steps from step 6.
To exit the procedure and return to the E-Con2 main menu:
Press 6(No) and then press J twice.

20100801

ε-8
Using Advanced Setup

3. Using Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can
adjust to configure the EA-200 setup that suits your particular needs.

k Advanced Setup Operations
• To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup
The following procedure describes the general steps for using Advanced Setup. Refer to the
pages as noted for more information.
1. Display the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1).
2. Press 1(SET). This displays the “Setup EA-200” submenu.
3. Press 2(ADVANCE). This displays the Advanced Setup menu.

Advanced Setup Menu
4. If you want to configure a custom probe at this point, press f(Custom Probe). Next,
follow the steps under “To configure a custom probe setup” on page ε-19.
• You can also configure a custom probe during the procedure under “To configure
Channel Setup settings” on page ε-9.
• Custom probe configurations you have stored in memory can be selected using
Channel in step 5, below.
5. Use the Advanced Setup keys described below to set other parameters.
• b(Channel) ...... Displays a screen that shows the sensors that are currently
assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). You can
also use this dialog to change sensor assignments. See “Channel
Setup” on page ε-9 for more information.
• c(Sample) ....... Displays a screen for selecting the sampling mode, and for
specifying the sampling interval, the number of samples, and the
warm-up mode. When “Fast” is selected for “Mode”, this dialog box
also displays a setting for turning FFT (frequency characteristics)
graphing on and off. See “Sample Setup” on page ε-11 for more
information.
• d(Trigger) ........ Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger)
conditions. See “Trigger Setup” on page ε-13 for more information.
• e(Graph) ......... Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph
Setup” on page ε-17 for more information.
• You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the
procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults” below.
20100801

ε-9
Using Advanced Setup

6. After you configure a setup, you can use the function key operations described below to
start sampling or perform other operations.
• 1(START) ..........Starts sampling using the setup (page ε-30).
• 2(MULTI) ...........Starts MULTIMETER mode sampling using the setup (page
ε-23).
• 3(MEMORY) ......Saves the setup (page ε-24).

• 4(PROGRAM) ....Converts the setup to a program (page ε-27).
• 5(GRAPH) .........Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for
analyzing graphs (page ε-35).
• 6(ABOUT) ..........Displays version information about the EA-200 unit that is
currently connected to the calculator.

• To return setup parameters to their initial defaults
Perform the following procedure when you want to return the parameters of the setup in the
current setup memory area to their initial defaults.
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press g(Initialize).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to initialize the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without initializing the setup, press 6(No).

k Channel Setup
The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel
(CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic).

• To configure Channel Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press b(Channel).
• This displays the Channel Setup screen.

Currently selected channel

Channel Setup Screen
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting
you want to change.

20100801

ε-10
Using Advanced Setup

3. What you need to do next depends on the currently selected channel.
• CH1, CH2, or CH3
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to the selected
channel.
1(CASIO)..............Displays a menu of CASIO sensors.
2(VERNIR) ...........Displays a menu of Vernier sensors.
3(CUSTOM) .........Displays a menu of custom probes.
4(None) ................Press this key when you want leave the channel without any
sensor assigned to it.
• SONIC Channel
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to this channel.
1(CASIO)..............Displays a menu of CASIO sensors, but only “Motion” can be
selected.
2(VERNIR) ...........Displays a menu of Vernier sensors. You can select “Motion” or
“Photogate”.
Note
• On the menu that appears after you select “Motion” from either the CASIO or
Vernier sensor menu, select either “meters” or “feet” as the sampling unit.
• After selecting “Motion” from either the CASIO or Vernier sensor menu, you can
press the K key to toggle “smoothing (correction of measurement error)” on
(“-Smooth” displayed) and off (“-Smooth” not displayed).
• From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select
[Gate] or [Pulley].
[Gate] ...............Select this option when using the PhotoGate sensor alone.
[Pulley] .............Select this option when using the PhotoGate sensor along with a
smart pulley.
4(None) ................Select this option to disable the SONIC channel.
• Mic Channel
For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
However, you need to configure the settings described below.
1(Sound) ..............Select this option to record elapsed time and volume 2dimensional sampled sound data (elapsed time on the horizontal
axis, volume on the vertical axis).
2(FFT) ..................Select this option to record frequency and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (frequency on the horizontal axis, volume on
the vertical axis).
4(None) ................Select this option to disable the Mic channel.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary to configure all the channels you want.
5. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.

20100801

ε-11
Using Advanced Setup

Note
• When you select a channel on the Channel Setup
screen, the sampling range of the selected channel
appears in the bottom line of the screen.

In the above example, the range of the temperature sensor assigned to CH2 appears on
the display.
If the sampling range value is too long to fit on the display, only the part of the value that
fits on the display will be shown.

k Sample Setup
The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling.

• To configure Sample Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press c(Sample).
• This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the
“Mode” line highlighted, which indicates that you can
select the sampling mode.

2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
To do this:

Press this key:

To select this
mode:

Graph data in real-time as it is sampled

1(R-Time)

Real-time

Perform sampling of high-speed phenomena
(sound, etc.)

2(Fast)

Fast

Perform sampling over a long time (weather,
etc.)
• The EA-200 enters a power off sleep state
while standing by.

4(Extend)

Extended

Sample sound using the EA-200’s built-in
microphone

6(g)1(Sound)

Sound

Record the time of the occurrence of a particular
trigger event as an absolute value starting from
0, which is the sampling start time

6(g)2(Clock)

Clock

Perform periodic sampling, from a start trigger
event to an end trigger event

6(g)3(Period)

Period

Perform sampling other than that described
above

3(Norm)

Normal

20100801

ε-12
Using Advanced Setup

• Note that the mode you select also determines the channel(s) you can use.
Sampling Mode

Selectable Channel(s)

Real-time, Extended, Normal

CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC

Fast

CH1, Mic

Sound

Mic

Clock, Period

CH1

3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval.
• The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting.
If this sampling mode is selected:

This is the allowable setting range:

Real-time

0.2 to 299 sec

Fast

20 to 500 μsec

Extended

5 to 240 min

Period

“=Trigger” only (no value input required)

Sound

20 to 27 μsec

Clock

“=Trigger” only (no value input required)

Normal

0.0005 to 299 sec

4. To change the number of samples setting, move the highlighting to “Number”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the number of samples.
• You can specify a value in the range of 10 to 30,000.
• The total sampling time shown at the bottom of the dialog box is calculated by
multiplying the “Sampling Interval” value you specified in step 3 by the number of
samples you specify here.
Important!
• When all of the following conditions exist, a “Distance” setting appears in place of the
“Number” setting. See “To configure the Distance setting” (page ε-13) for information
about configuring the “Distance” setting.
- Channel setup (page ε-9): 2(VERNIR) - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
- Sampling mode (page ε-11): Clock
5. To change the warm-up time setting, move the highlighting to “Warm-up”. Next, perform
one of the function key operations described below.
Note
• The “Warm-up” setting will not be displayed on the Sample Setup screen if “Fast”,
“Sound” or “Extended” is currently selected as the sampling mode.
To do this:

Press this key:

Have the warm-up time for each sensor set automatically

1(Auto)

Input a warm-up time, in seconds, manually

2(Manual)

Disable the warm-up time

3(None)

20100801

ε-13
Using Advanced Setup

Important!
• When the following condition exists, an “FFT Graph” setting appears in place of the
“Warm-up” setting. See “To configure the FFT Graph setting” below, for information
about configuring the “FFT Graph” setting.
- Sampling mode (page ε-11): Fast
6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.

• To configure the Distance setting
In place of step 3 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for specifying the distance the weight travels in meters.
• Specify a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 meters.

• To configure the FFT Graph setting
In place of step 5 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for turning frequency characteristic graphing (FFT Graph) on and off.
To do this:

Press this key:

Turn on graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling

1(On)

Turn off graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling

2(Off)

k Trigger Setup
You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w
key operation, etc.). The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”,
which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen.
The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
To start sampling when this happens:

Select this trigger source:

When the w key is pressed

[EXE] key

After the specified number of seconds are counted down

Count Down

When input at CH1 reaches a specified value

CH1

When input at the SONIC channel reaches a specified value

SONIC

When the EA-200’s built-in microphone detects sound

Mic

When the EA-200’s [START/STOP] key is pressed

[START] key

20100801

ε-14
Using Advanced Setup

• To configure Trigger Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press d(Trigger).
• This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the
“Source” line highlighted.
• The function menu items that appears in the menu
bar depend on the sampling mode selected with
Sample Setup (page ε-11). The nearby screen shows
the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the
sample sampling mode.
2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
• The following shows the trigger sources that can be selected for each sampling mode.
Sampling Mode

Trigger Source

Real-time

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down

Fast

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 3(CH1), 5(Mic)

Normal

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
4(Sonic), 5([START]) : [START] key

Sound

1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 5(Mic)

• The trigger source is always “[EXE] key” when the sampling mode is “Extended”, and
“CH1” when the sampling mode is “Clock” or “Period”.
3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was
selected in step 2.
If this is the
trigger source:

Do this next:

[EXE] key

Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.

Count Down

Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown
start time” below.

CH1

Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction. See
“To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type” on
page ε-15, “To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and
trigger end edge settings” or “To configure PhotoGate trigger start
and end settings” on page ε-16.

SONIC

Specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level. See
“To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level” on
page ε-17.

Mic

Specify microphone sensitivity. See “To specify microphone
sensitivity” on page ε-15.

[START] key

Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.

20100801

ε-15
Using Advanced Setup

• To specify the countdown start time
1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”.
2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time.
3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10.
4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.

• To specify microphone sensitivity
1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys described
below.
To select this level of microphone sensitivity:

Press this key:

Low

1(Low)

Medium

2(Middle)

High

3(High)

2. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).

• To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type
Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling
mode (page ε-11).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel
Setup (page ε-9)

Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor

3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Edge”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:

Press this key:

Falling

1(Fall)

Rising

2(Rise)

6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).

20100801

ε-16
Using Advanced Setup

• To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge
settings
Perform the following steps when “Period” is specified as the sampling mode (page ε-11).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want.
4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:

Press this key:

Falling

1(Fall)

Rising

2(Rise)

6. Move the highlighting to “End Edge”.
7. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge:

Press this key:

Falling

1(Fall)

Rising

2(Rise)

8. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).

• To configure PhotoGate trigger start and end settings
Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source.
1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
2. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this PhotoGate status:

Press this key:

PhotoGate closed

1(Close)

PhotoGate open

2(Open)

3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”.
4. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this PhotoGate status:

Press this key:

PhotoGate closed

1(Close)

PhotoGate open

2(Open)

5. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).

20100801

ε-17
Using Advanced Setup

• To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Level”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of level:

Press this key:

Below

1(Below)

Above

2(Above)

6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).

k Graph Setup
Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is
complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page ε-11) to turn graphing on or off.

• To configure Graph Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press e(Graph).
• This displays the Graph Setup screen.
Currently selected item

Graph Setup Screen
2. To change the graph source data name display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Graph Func”. Next, press one of the function keys described
below.
To specify this graph source data name display setting:

Press this key:

Display source data name

1(On)

Hide source data name

2(Off)

• When the graph data is stored in a sample data memory file, the file name appears as
the source data name. When the graph data is stored in current data area, the channel
name appears.
Note
• For details about sample data memory and current data area, see “Using Sample Data
Memory” (page ε-33).

20100801

ε-18
Using Advanced Setup

3. To change the trace operation coordinate display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Coord”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this coordinate display setting for the trace
operation:

Press this key:

Display trace coordinates

1(On)

Hide trace coordinates

2(Off)

4. To change the numeric axes display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Econ Axes”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this axes display setting:

Press this key:

Display axes

1(On)

Hide axes

2(Off)

5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Real Scroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this real-time scrolling setting:

Press this key:

Real-time scrolling on

1(On)

Real-time scrolling off

2(Off)

6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.

20100801

ε-19
Using a Custom Probe

4. Using a Custom Probe
You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with the EA200. The term “custom probe” means any sensor other than the CASIO or Vernier sensors
specified as standard for the E-Con2 mode.

k Configuring a Custom Probe Setup
To configure a custom probe setup, you must input values for the constants of the fixed
linear interpolation formula (ax + b). The required constants are slope (a) and intercept (b).
x in the above expression (ax + b) is the sampled voltage value (sampling range: 0 to 5
volts).

• To configure a custom probe setup
1. From the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 1(SET) and then 2(ADVANCE) to
display the Advanced Setup menu.
2. On the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8), press f(Custom Probe) to display the
Custom Probe List.
• The message “No Custom Probe” appears if the Custom Probe List is empty.
3. Press 2(NEW).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen like the
one shown nearby.

4. Press 1(EDIT).
5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press w.
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”.
6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup.
• To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want.
(1) Slope
Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
(2) Intercept
Press 1(EDIT) to input the intercept for the linear interpolation formula.
(3) Unit Name
Press 1(EDIT) to input up to eight characters for the unit name.
(4) Warm-up
Press 1(EDIT) to input the warm-up time.
7. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the Custom Probe List, which should
now contain the new custom probe setup you configured.
20100801

ε-20
Using a Custom Probe

• To recall the specifications of a Vernier sensor and configure custom
probe settings
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
2. Press 5(VERNIR).
• This displays a Vernier sensor list.
3. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to the Vernier sensor whose setting
you want to use as the basis of the custom probe settings, and then press w.
• The name and specifications of the Vernier sensor you select will appear on the custom
probe setup screen.
• To complete this procedure, perform steps 4 through 7 under “To configure a custom
probe setup” (page ε-19).

k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe
Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe
setup based on two actual samples.
Important!
• Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose
measurement values are known.
• When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known
measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4. When inputting reference
value in step 7 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the
condition you will sample in step 6.

• To auto calibrate a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to auto
calibrate to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
calibration, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the slope and intercept, so you do not need to
specify them in step 6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
(1) On the Custom Probe List, use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of
the custom probe you want to edit, and then press 3(EDIT).
(2) Perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.

20100801

ε-21
Using a Custom Probe

3. Press 2(CALIB).
• This will start the first sampling operation with the sensor connected to EA-200’s CH1,
and then display a screen like the one shown below.

First sampling operation
Real-time display of sampled values

4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press
w.
• This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the
same type of screen that appeared in step 3.

Second sampling operation

6. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the second sampled value and display it on the screen. The cursor will
appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
7. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the second sampled value, and then
press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-Con2 will calculate the slope and intercept
value based on the two reference values that you
input, and configure the settings automatically. The
automatically configured values will appear on the
custom probe setup screen, where you can view
them.
8. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.

20100801

ε-22
Using a Custom Probe

k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe
This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual
sample using the applicable custom probe.

• To zero adjust a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to zero
adjust to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the intercept, so you do not need to specify it in step
6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
(1) On the Custom Probe List, use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of
the custom probe you want to edit, and then press 3(EDIT).
(2) Perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
3. Press 3(ZERO).
• This will start the sampling operation with the sensor
connected to EA-200’s CH1, and then display a
screen like the one shown nearby.

4. At the point your want to perform zero adjustment (the point that the displayed value is
the appropriate zero adjust value), press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-Con2 will set the intercept value automatically
based on the sampled value. The automatically
configured value will appear on the custom probe
setup screen, where you can view it.

5. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.

20100801

ε-23
Using the MULTIMETER Mode

5. Using the MULTIMETER Mode
You can use the Channel Setup screen (page ε-9) to configure a channel so that EA-200
MULTIMETER mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation.

• To use the MULTIMETER mode
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable
EA-200 channels.
2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8), use the Channel Setup screen (page ε-9) to
configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using.
3. After configuring the sensor setups, press w to return to the Advanced Setup menu
(page ε-8), and then press 2(MULTI).
• This starts sampling in the EA-200 MULTIMETER
mode and displays a list of sample values for each
channel.
• Displayed sample data is refreshed at 0.5-second
intervals.
• Do not connect sensors to any other channels except
for those you specified in step 2.
• Data sampled in the MULTIMETER mode is not saved in memory.
4. To end MULTIMETER mode sampling, press the w key.

20100801

ε-24
Using Setup Memory

6. Using Setup Memory
Creating EA-200 setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data
to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup
memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data.
You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator
memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.

k Saving a Setup
A setup can be saved when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard (page ε-2)

• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup (page ε-8)
• While the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display

Details on saving a setup are listed below.

• To save a setup
1. If the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4) is on the display, advance to step 2. If it isn’t,
start the save operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
- If the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press 3(MEMORY).
- If the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display, press 2(MEMORY).

• Performing any one of the above operations causes the setup memory list to appear.
• The message “No Setup-MEM” appears if setup memory is empty.
2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM).
If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name.
4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4), this saves the setup and the
message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen
(page ε-4).

• If you start from the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) or the E-Con2 main menu (page
ε-1), this saves the setup and returns to the setup memory list which includes the name
you assigned it.

Important!
• Since you assign both a setup name and a file number to each setup, you can assign the
same name to multiple setups, if you want.

20100801

ε-25
Using Setup Memory

k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory
All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the
list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it.

• To preview saved setup data
You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for
sampling.
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press K(Setup Preview).
• This displays the preview dialog box.

4. To close the preview dialog box, press J.

• To recall a setup and use it for sampling
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
5. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
6. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
7. Press 1(START).
8. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1.
• Pressing w sets up the EA-200 and then starts sampling.
• To clear the confirmation message without sampling, press 6.
Note
• See “Operations during a sampling operation” on page ε-31 for information about
operations you can perform while a sampling operation is in progress.

20100801

ε-26
Using Setup Memory

• To change the name of setup data
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 3(RENAME).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w.
• This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list.

• To delete setup data
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 4(DELETE).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).

• To recall setup data
Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. You can then use Advanced
Setup to edit the setup. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup
that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory.
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 5(LOAD).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to recall the setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without recalling the setup, press 6(No).
Note
• Recalling setup data replaces any other data currently in the current setup memory area.

20100801

ε-27
Using Program Converter

7. Using Program Converter
Program Converter converts an EA-200 setup you configured using Setup Wizard or
Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program
Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2
*1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information
about how to use a converted program.
*2 See online help (PROGRAM CONVERTER HELP) for information about supported CFX9850 Series and fx-7400 Series models.

k Converting a Setup to a Program
A setup can be converted to a program when any one of the following conditions exists.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard (page ε-2)

• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup (page ε-8)
• While the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display

The program converter procedure is identical in all of the above cases.

• To convert a setup to a program
1. Start the converter operation by performing one of the key operations described below.
- If the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4) is on the display, press d(Convert
Program).
- If the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press 4(PROGRAM).

- If the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display, press 3(PROGRAM).
• After you perform any one of the above operations,
the program converter screen will appear on the
display.

2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
Note
Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one
below.
• Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series
• Associated Data Analyzer: EA-200
• Calibration: None
• Password: None
If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3
through 7 and go directly to step 8. If you want to change any of the settings, perform the
applicable operations in steps 3 through 7.

20100801

ε-28
Using Program Converter

3. Specify the scientific calculator model to be associated with the program. Perform one of
the following key operations to associate the program with a scientific calculator.
To associate the program with this calculator:

Perform this key operation:

fx-9860 Series

1(CALC)1(9860)

CFX-9850 Series

1(CALC)2(9850)

fx-7400 Series

1(CALC)3(7400)

• The number part of the scientific calculator model number you specify will appear in line
“F1:” of the program converter screen.
Note
• For information about 1(CALC)4(→38k), see “Converting a CFX-9850 Series
Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program” (page ε-29).
4. Specify the Data Analyzer model (EA-100 or EA-200) to be associated with the program.
Perform one of the following key operations to associate the program with a Data
Analyzer.
To associate the program with this Data Analyzer:

Perform this key operation:

EA-200

2(TYPE)1(200)

EA-100

2(TYPE)2(100)

• The number part of the Data Analyzer model number you specify will appear in line
“F2:” of the program converter screen.
Important!
• Note that the capabilities of the EA-100 and EA-200 are different. Because of this, you
should keep in mind that an EA-200 program converted to an EA-100 program and
used to perform sampling with an EA-100 setup may not produce the desired results.
5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Analyzer, specify
whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key
operations to configure the desired setting.
To perform this operation:

Perform this key operation:

Calibration of the CH1 custom probe

3(CALIB)1(CALIB)

Zero adjust of the CH1 custom probe

3(CALIB)2(ZERO)

No calibration

3(CALIB)3(None)

• The operation you specify will appear in line “F3:” of the program converter screen.
6. To password protect the program, press 4(

).

• This will cause the “Password?” prompt and
password input field to appear under the program
name input field.

20100801

ε-29
Using Program Converter

7. Enter up to eight characters for the password.
• If you change your mind about assigning a password, press J here. This will cause
the password input field to disappear and cancel password input.
8. After everything is the way you want, press w to convert the program in accordance with
the setup.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message
and return to the screen that was on the display in step 1, press w or J.

k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible
Program
To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on
the CFX-9850) on the E-Con2, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program.
Conversion can be performed using the program converter.
EA-200 Control Program for
CFX-9850 Series

Convert

EA-200 Control Program for
fx-9860 Series

• To convert a program
1. Transfer the EA-200 control program created for the CFX-9850 Series to the fx-9860
main memory.
• Use the cable that comes bundled with the fx-9860 to connect its 3-pin serial port to the
3-pin serial port of the CFX-9850. For details, see Chapter 13 of this manual.
2. Perform step 1 under “To convert a setup to a program” on page ε-27, which displays the
program converter screen.
3. Press 1(CALC) and then press 4(→38k).
• This displays a list of programs currently in main memory.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting of the program you want to convert, and then
press 1(EXE) or w.
• A program name input screen will appear after conversion is complete.
5. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
• If you want to password protect the program, perform steps 6 and 7 under “To convert a
setup to a program” after inputting the program name.
6. Press w to start conversion of the program.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message,
press w or J.

20100801

ε-30
Starting a Sampling Operation

8. Starting a Sampling Operation
This section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-Con2 mode to start an
EA-200 sampling operation.

k Before getting started...
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.

k Starting a Sampling Operation
A sampling operation can be started when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard (page ε-2)

• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup (page ε-8)
• While the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display

• While the setup memory list is on the display
The following procedures explain the first three conditions described above. See “To recall a
setup and use it for sampling” on page ε-25 for information about starting sampling from the
setup memory list.

• To start sampling
1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
- If the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4) is on the display, press b(Start Setup).
- If the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press 1(START).

- If the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display, press 4(START).
• After you perform any one of the above operations,
a sampling start confirmation screen like the one
shown nearby will appear on the display.

20100801

ε-31
Starting a Sampling Operation

2. Press w.
• This sets up the EA-200 using the setup data in the current setup memory area.
• The message “Setting EA-200...” remains on the display while EA-200 setup is in
progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed by
pressing A.
• The screen shown nearby appears after EA-200
setup is complete.

3. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see
“Operations during a sampling operation” below.

• Operations during a sampling operation
Sending a sample start command from the calculator to the EA-200 causes the following
sequence to be performed.
Setup Data Transfer → Sampling Start → Sampling End →
Transfer of Sample Data from the EA-200 to the Calculator
The table on the next page shows how the trigger conditions and sensor type specified in the
setup data affects the above sequence.

20100801

20100801

Clock

Period

Extended

Sound

Normal

Fast

Real-time

Mode

1. EA-200 Setup

Starts Sampling
2. Start Standby

Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.

• The screen shown below appears when CH1,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.

3. Sampling

1

w

Sample values are stored as
List data only.

The following three graph types
can be produced when PhotoGate-Pulley is being used.
1. Time and distance graph
2. Time and velocity graph
• When Number of Samples > 1 3. Time and acceleration graph

• When Number of Samples = 1

w

Input values.
w

w

• When Mode = Sound
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.

Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.

4. Graphing

ε-32

Starting a Sampling Operation

ε-33
Using Sample Data Memory

9. Using Sample Data Memory
Performing an EA-200 sampling operation from the E-Con2 mode causes sampled results
to be stored in the “current data area” of E-Con2 memory. Separate data is saved for each
channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s
“current data”.
Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is
replaced by the newly sampled data. If you want to save a set of current data and keep it
from being replaced by a new sampling operation, save the data in sample data memory
under a different file name.

k Managing Sample Data Files
• To save current sample data to a file
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 5(GRAPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.

Graph Mode Screen
• For details about the Graph Mode screen, see “Using the Graph Analysis Tools to
Graph Data” (page ε-35).
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.

List of current data files
“cd” stands for “current data”. The text on
the right side of the colon indicates the
channel name.

Sampling Data List Screen
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want
to save, and then press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting a data name.

20100801

ε-34
Using Sample Data Memory

4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number.
5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
The sample data file you save is
indicated on the display using the format:
:.

• If you specify a memory number that is already being used to store a data file, a
confirmation message appears asking if you want to replace the existing file with the
new data file. Press 1 to replace the existing data file, or 6 to return to the memory
number input dialog box in step 4.
6. To return to the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press J twice.
Note
• You could select another data file besides a current data file in step 3 of the above
procedure and save it under a different memory number. You do not need to change the
file’s name as long as you use a different file number.

20100801

ε-35
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

10. Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph
Data
Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data.

k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools
You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
• Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the Graph Mode screen, which is displayed by
pressing 5(GRAPH) on the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1)

Graph Mode Screen
• The main menu appears after you perform a sampling operation. Press 5(GRAPH) at
that time.
• When you access Graph Analysis tools using this method, you can select from among a
variety of other Analysis modes. See “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph”
(page ε-36) for more information about the other Analysis modes.
• Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the screen of a graph drawn after a sampling
operation is executed from the Setup Wizard or from Advanced Setup (Real-time
Mode)

Graph Screen
• In this case, data is graphed after the sampling operation is complete, and the calculator
accesses Graph Analysis tools automatically. See “Graph Screen Key Operations” on
page ε-39.

20100801

ε-36
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph
This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis
mode to drawing a graph.
Note
• Step 4 through step 7 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step
automatically applies the initial default values for its settings.
• If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top
line of the Graph Mode screen.

• To select an analysis mode and draw a graph
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 5(GRAPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 3(MODE), and then select the analysis mode you want from the menu that
appears.
To do this:

Perform this menu
operation:

To select this
mode:

Graph three sets of sampled data
simultaneously

[Norm]

Graph Analysis

Graph sampled data along with its first
and second derivative graph

[diff]

d/dt & d2/dt2

Display the graphs of different sampled
data in upper and lower windows for
comparison

[COMPARE] → [GRAPH]

Compare Graph

Output sampled data from the speaker,
displaying graph of the raw data in
the upper window and the output
waveform in the lower window

[COMPARE] → [Sound]

Compare Sound

Display the graph of sampled data
in the upper window and its first
derivative graph in the lower window

[COMPARE] → [d/dt]

Compare d/dt

Display the graph of sampled data
in the upper window and its second
derivative graph in the lower window

[COMPARE] → [d2/dt2]

Compare d2/dt2

• The name of the currently selected mode appears in the top line of the Graph Mode
screen.
Analysis mode name

20100801

ε-37
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

3. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
4. Specify the sampled data for graphing.
a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled
data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASSIGN) or w.
• This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file
you selected.
Sample data file name

Graph on/off indicator

Name of sensor used for sampling

Graph Mode Screen
b. Repeat step a above to specify sample data files for other graphs, if there are any.
• If you select “Graph Analysis” as the analysis mode in step 2, you must specify
sample data files for three graphs. If you select “Compare Graph” as the analysis
mode in step 2, you must specify sample data files for two graphs. With other modes,
you need to specify only one sample data file.
• For details about Sampling Data List screen operations, see “Using Sample Data
Memory” (page ε-33).
5. Turn on graphing for each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to select a graph, and
then press 1(SELECT) to toggle graphing on or off.

Graphing turned off.
Graphing turned on.

b. Repeat step a to turn each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen on or off.
6. Select the graph style you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose style you want to specify, and then press
4(STYLE). This will cause the function menu to change as shown below.

20100801

ε-38
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data

b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want.
To specify this graph style:

Press this key:

Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers

1(

)

Line graph with square (  ) data markers

2(

)

Line graph with X (×) data markers

3(

)

Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers

4(

)

Scatter graph with square (  ) data markers

5(

)

Scatter graph with X (×) data markers

6(

)

c. Repeat a and b to specify the style for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
7. Select the graph color you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose color you want to specify, and then press
!f(FORMAT).
b. On the dialog box that appears, select a color using keys b through h.
c. Repeat a and b to specify the color for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
8. On the Graph Mode screen, press 6(DRAW) or w.
• This draws the graph(s) in accordance with the settings you configured in step 2
through step 7.

Graph Screen
• When a Graph screen is on the display, the function keys provide you with zooming and
other capabilities to aid in graph analysis.
For details about Graph screen function key operations, see the following section.

• To deselect sampled data assigned for graphing on the Graph Mode screen
1. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose sampled data you want to deselect.
2. Press 5(DELETE).
• This will deselect sample data assigned to the highlighted graph.

20100801

ε-39
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

11. Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen
Operations
This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after
drawing a graph.
You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation,
or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on
page ε-36.

k Graph Screen Key Operations
On the graph screen, you can use the keys described in the table below to analyze (CALC)
graphs by reading data points along the graph (Trace) and enlarging specific parts of the
graph (Zoom).
Key Operation

Description

!1(TRACE)

Displays a trace pointer on the graph along with the coordinates of
the current cursor location. Trace can also be used to obtain the
periodic frequency of a specific range on the graph and assign it
to a variable. See “Using Trace” on page ε-40.

!2(ZOOM)

Starts a zoom operation, which you can use to enlarge or reduce
the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis. See “Using
Zoom” on page ε-41.

!3(V-WIN)

Displays a function menu of special View Window commands for
the E-Con2 mode graph screen.
For details about each command, see “Configuring View Window
Parameters” on page ε-49.

!4(SKETCH)

Displays a menu that contains the following commands: Cls, Plot,
F-Line, Text, PEN, Vertical, and Horizontal. For details about
each command, see “Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph
Screen (Sketch)” on page 5-50.

K1(PICTURE)

Saves the currently displayed graph as a graphic image. You can
recall a saved graph image and overlay it on another graph to
compare them. For details about these procedures, see “Saving
and Recalling Graph Screen Contents” on page 5-20.

K2(LISTMEM)

Displays a menu of functions for saving the sample values in a
specific range of a graph to a list. See “Transforming Sampled
Data to List Data” on page ε-42.

K3(EDIT)

Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular
graph when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See
“Working with Multiple Graphs” on page ε-46.

K4(CALC)

Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a
function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression
to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series
Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page ε-43,
and “Performing Regression” on page ε-44.
20100801

ε-40
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

Key Operation

Description

K5(Y=fx)

Displays the graph relation list, which lets you select a Y=f(x)
graph to overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a
Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph” on page ε-45.

K6(SPEAKER)

Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data
waveform graph from the speaker. See “Outputting a Specific
Range of a Graph from the Speaker” on page ε-48.

k Scrolling the Graph Screen
Press the cursor keys while the graph screen is on the display scrolls the graph left, right, up,
or down.
Note
• The cursor keys perform different operations besides scrolling while a trace or graph
operation is in progress. To perform a graph screen scroll operation in this case, press J
to cancel the trace or graph operation, and then press the cursor keys.

k Using Trace
Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph.
You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and
assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha memory variables.

• To use trace
1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRACE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear on the graph.
The coordinates of the current trace pointer location
are also shown on the display.

2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the trace pointer along the graph to the location
you want.
• The coordinate values change in accordance with the trace pointer movement.
• You can exit the trace pointer at any time by pressing J.

• To obtain the periodic frequency value
1. Use the procedure under “To use trace” above to start a trace operation.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain, and then press w.

20100801

ε-41
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain.
• This causes the period and periodic frequency value
at the start point you selected in step 2 to appear
along the bottom of the screen.

4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha memory variables.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying variable
names for [Period] and [Frequency] values.
• The initial default variable name settings are “S” for
the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To
change to another variable name, use the up and
down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item
you want to change, and then press the applicable
letter key.
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This stores the values and exits the trace operation.
• For details about using Alpha memory, see Chapter 2 of this manual.

k Using Zoom
Zoom lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis.
Note
• When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the procedure below zooms all of them.
For information about zooming a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the
screen, see “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page ε-46.

• To zoom the graph screen
1. On the graph screen, press !2(ZOOM).
• This causes a magnifying glass cursor (
in the center of the screen.

) to appear

2. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.

20100801

ε-42
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

3. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:

Press this cursor key:

Enlarge the graph image horizontally

e

Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally

d

Enlarge the graph image vertically

f

Reduce the size of the graph image vertically

c

4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.

k Transforming Sampled Data to List Data
Use the following procedure to transform the sampled data in a specific range of a graph into
list data.

• To transform sampled data to list data
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 2(LISTMEM).
• This displays the LISTMEM menu.
2. Press 2(SELECT).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range
you want to convert to list data, and then press w.

4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the lists where you want to store the time data
and the sampled data.

→

• The initial default lists are List 1 for the time and List 2 for sample data. To change to
another list (List 1 to List 26), use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the list you want to change, and then input the applicable list number.

20100801

ε-43
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the
graph screen.
• For details about using list data, see Chapter 3 of this manual.
Note
• Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SELECT) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In
this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).

k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a
Function
Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
The procedure below assumes that there is a graph of sampled sound data already on the
graph screen.

• To perform Fourier series expansion
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the
display.

2. Press 1(FOURIE).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the graph range.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for
which you want to perform Fourier series expansion,
and then press w.

4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier
series expansion, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series.

→

20100801

ε-44
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of
the Fourier series.

6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
• The graph relation list appears with the calculation
result.

7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function.
• This lets you compare the expanded function graph
and the original graph to see if they are the same.

Note
• When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series
expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid. If this
happens, shift the position the original graph to align it with the overlaid graph.
For information about how to move the original graph, see “To move a particular graph on
a multi-graph display” (page ε-47).

k Performing Regression
You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace
pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic,
Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic.
For details about these regression types, see Chapter 6 of this manual.
The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression. The same general
steps can also be used to perform the other types of regression.

20100801

ε-45
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

• To perform quadratic regression
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 5(X2).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range
on the graph.

3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
• This displays the quadratic regression calculation
result screen.

5. Press 6(DRAW).
• This draws a quadratic regression graph and
overlays it over the original graph.
• To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph,
press !4(SKETCH) and then 1(Cls).

k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph
You can use the E-Con2 mode to graph equations based on the form Y=f(x). From the graph
screen, press K5(Y=fx) to display the graph relation list screen. From there, operations
are identical to those in the Graph mode.
Note
• The data on the graph relation list screen is shared with the Graph mode. Note, however,
that only Y= type graphs can be used in the E-Con2 mode. Because of this, calling up
the graph relation list screen from the E-Con2 mode will display a “Y” (Y= type) item for
function menu key 3. Also, 5(MODIFY) is not displayed, because it is not used in the
E-Con2 mode.

20100801

ε-46
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

k Working with Multiple Graphs
The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when
there are multiple graphs on the display.

• To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• The EDIT menu appears at the bottom of the display.

2. Press 1(ZOOM).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were
originally on the graph screen.

3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the
graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass
cursor ( ) in the center of the screen.

4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.

20100801

ε-47
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

5. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this:

Press this cursor key:

Enlarge the graph image horizontally

e

Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally

d

Enlarge the graph image vertically

f

Reduce the size of the graph image vertically

c

→

6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.

• To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• This displays the EDIT menu.
2. Press 2(MOVE).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear.
4. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the graph left and right, or the f and c
cursor keys to move the graph up and down.

→

5. To exit the move mode, press J.

20100801

ε-48
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker
Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from
the speaker.

• To output a graph from the speaker
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(SEAPKER).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range
on the graph.

2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.

→

4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is,
specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%. To
lower the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
5. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
6. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
7. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.

20100801

ε-49
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations

8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and
return to the graph screen, press 6(No).
• Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the
above steps from step 4.

k Configuring View Window Parameters
Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View
Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.

Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to
configure.
Function Key

Description

1(Auto)

Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size
X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item
equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases

2(FULL)

Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.

3(Y)

Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen along the Y-axis,
without changing the X-axis dimensions.

4(UNIT)

Specifies the unit of the numeric axis grid displayed by the Econ Axes
setting of the graph setup screen (page ε-17).
1(μsec): microseconds
2(msec): milliseconds
3(Sec): seconds
4(DHMS): days, hours, minutes, seconds (1 day, 2 hours, 30
minutes, 5 seconds = 1d2h30m5s)
5(Auto): Auto selection

5(CHANGE)

Toggles display of the source data on the graph screen on and off.

To exit the View Window function key menu and return to the standard function key menu,
press J.

20100801

ε-50
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity

12. Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
You can call E-Con2 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity
file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips.
• Econ SetupWizard strip
This strip calls the E-Con2 Setup Wizard. The Econ SetupWizard strip makes it
possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: EA-200
setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
• Econ AdvancSetup strip
This strip calls the E-Con2 Advanced Setup screen. The Advanced Setup
provides access to almost all executable functions (except for the program
converter), including detailed EA-200 setup and sampling execution; graphing
and Graph Analysis Tools; simultaneous sampling with multiple sensors using the
MULTIMETER mode, etc.
• Econ Sampling strip
This strip records on set of EA-200 setup information configured using Advanced
Setup, and performs sampling. Once setup information is recorded to this type of
strip, sampling starts immediately based on the recorded setup information the next
time the strip is executed.
• Econ Graph strip
This strip graphs sampled data that is recorded in the strip. The sampled data is
recorded to the strip the first time the strip is executed.
This section explains how to insert each type of Econ strip into an eActivity file, and how
to use inserted Econ strips. For details about eActivity operations, see Chapter 10 of this
manual.

k Inserting an Econ Strip into an eActivity File
The following procedure assumes that the eActivity file into which you want to insert the
Econ strip is already open. For information about creating a new file and other basic eActivity
operations, see Chapter 10 of this manual.

• To insert an Econ Strip into an eActivity file
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, move the cursor the location where you want to insert
the Econ strip.
2. Press 2(STRIP).
• This will display a dialog box with a list of insertable
strips.

20100801

ε-51
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity

3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the type of Econ strip you want to insert.
• See the beginning of this section (page ε-50) for
details about each Econ strip type.

4. Press w.
• The strip is inserted above the line or the strip where
the cursor is currently located.

5. Enter up to 16 characters for the strip title.
6. Press w to assign the title to the strip.
• This will highlight the strip.
• You can execute the strip here by pressing w. For
details about operations that are required when you
execute a strip, see “Calling an E-Con2 Function
from an Econ Strip” below.

k Calling an E-Con2 Function from an Econ Strip
This section explains operations for each type of Econ strip that can be inserted into an
eActivity file. The following procedure assumes that the applicable Econ strip has already
been inserted into an eActivity that is currently open.

• To access the Setup Wizard from an Econ SetupWizard strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f
and c keys to move the highlighting to the Econ
SetupWizard strip.

2. Press w.
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the
“Select Sensor” screen.

20100801

ε-52
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity

3. Perform the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” (page
ε-2) from step 3 to set up the EA-200 and execute sampling.
Note
• In the case of the Econ SetupWizard strip, only the “1: Start Setup” is available on the
“Complete!” dialog box. Other options are not available.

4. To return to the eActivity workspace screen, press !a(')J.

• To access Advanced Setup from an Econ AdvancSetup strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ AdvancSetup strip.
2. Press w.
• This displays the Advanced Setup screen.

• From here, perform the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Advanced Setup” (page ε-8) from step 4.
• To return to the eActivity workspace screen after you finished the procedure or at any
point during the procedure, press !a(') .
Note
• Using an Econ AdvancSetup strip to configure a setup causes the setup information to
be registered in the applicable strip. This means that the next time you open the strip,
sampling can be performed in accordance with the previously configured setup information.

20100801

ε-53
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity

• To execute sampling from an Econ Sampling strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and
c keys to move the highlighting to the Econ Sampling
strip.

2. Press w.
• This displays a sampling start confirmation screen.
• If this is the first time you are using this Econ
Sampling strip for sampling, continue on to step 3.
• If this is an Econ Sampling strip that you have used
for sampling in the paste and want to re-execute with
the same setup, jump to step 8.
3. Press !,(,) to display the application list.

4. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ AdvancSetup”, and
then press w.
• This displays the Advanced Setup screen.
5. Perform steps 4 and 5 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup (page
ε-8) to configure the setup for sampling.
6. Press !,(,) to display the application list.
7. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ Sampling”, and then
press w.
• This will return to the sampling start confirmation screen in step 2 of this procedure.
8. Press w.
• This will set up the EA-200 in accordance with the setup data registered in the Econ
Sampling strip. The message “Start sampling?” appears on the screen after EA-200 set
up is complete.
9. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details. For more information, see “Starting a Sampling Operation”
(page ε-30).
• After sampling is complete, the data will be graphed in accordance with the setup
settings.
10.To return to the eActivity workspace screen from the graph screen, press !a(').

20100801

ε-54
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity

• To graph sampled data from an Econ Graph strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ Graph strip.
2. Press w.
• If this Econ Graph strip already has sampled data registered to it because of a previous
execution, a graph of the existing data will appear on the display. In this case, jump to
step 5 of this procedure.
• If this is the first time you are executing this Econ Graph strip, the Advanced Setup
screen will appear on the display. If this happens, proceed with step 3 of this procedure.
3. Perform steps 4 and 5 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup”
(page ε-8) to configure the setup for sampling.
4. Press 1(START).
• As instructed by the message that appears on the display, press the w key to perform
sampling.
• After sampling is complete, the data will be graphed in accordance with the setup
settings.
5. To return to the eActivity workspace screen from the graph screen, press !a(').

• Econ Strip Memory Capacity Precautions
• The memory capacity of each Econ strip is 25 KB. An error will occur if you perform
an operation that causes this capacity to be exceeded. Particular care is required
when handling a large number of samples, which can cause memory capacity to be
exceeded.
• Always make sure that FFT Graph is turned off whenever performing sampling with the
microphone. Leaving FFT Graph turned on cause memory capacity to be exceeded.
• If an error occurs, press !a(') to return to the eActivity workspace screen and
perform the procedure again.
• For information about checking the memory usage of each strip, see “To display the
strip memory usage screen” on page 10-21.

20100801

Manufacturer:
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
Responsible within the European Union:
CASIO EUROPE GmbH
Casio-Platz 1
22848 Norderstedt, Germany

This mark applies in EU countries only.

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
One or more of the following patents may be used in the product.
U.S.Pats. 5,166,897 5,210,708 5,535,317 5,539,867 5,739,823

SA1011-B